Variable Frequency Drive

0.37-160kW (3Ph, 380-460VAC)

Programming Manual
Legal Information
The Lauritz Knudsen Electrical & Automation brand and any trademarks of Lauritz Knudsen Electrical &
Automation and its subsidiaries referred to in this guide are the property of Lauritz Knudsen Electrical &
Automation or its subsidiaries. All other brands may be trademarks of their respective owners.
This guide and its content are protected under applicable copyright laws and furnished for informational use
only. No part of this guide may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means (electronic,
mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise), for any purpose, without the prior written permission of
Lauritz Knudsen Electrical & Automation.
Lauritz Knudsen Electrical & Automation does not grant any right or license for commercial use of the guide or
its content, except for a non-exclusive and personal license to consult it on an “as is” basis. Lauritz Knudsen
Electrical & Automation products and equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only
by qualified personnel.
As standards, specifications, and designs change from time to time, information contained in this guide may
be subject to change without notice.
To the extent permitted by applicable law, no responsibility or liability is assumed by Lauritz Knudsen
Electrical & Automation and its subsidiaries for any errors or omissions in the informational content of this
material or consequences arising out of or resulting from the use of the information contained herein.
As part of a group of responsible, inclusive companies, we are updating our communications that contain
non-inclusive terminology. Until we complete this process, however, our content may still contain
standardized industry terms that may be deemed inappropriate by our customers.

2 SP51105 01/2025
 Table of Contents

Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
About the Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Part I Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Chapter 1 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Initial Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Steps for Setting-Up the Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Software Enhancements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Chapter 2 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Factory Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Macro Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Basic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Plain Text Display Terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
Structure of the Parameter Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Finding a Parameter in This Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Part II Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Chapter 3 [Simply start] SYS- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
[Macro-configuration] CFG- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
[Simply start] SiM- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
[Modified parameters] LMd- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
Chapter 4 [Display] Mon- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
4.1 [Motor parameters]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
4.2 [Drive parameters] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
4.3 [I/O map] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
4.4 Energy parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
4.5 [Communication map] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
4.6 [Application parameters] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
[Variable Speed Pump] MPP- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
[Booster Control Pump] bCP- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Chapter 5 [Diagnostics] diA- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
5.1 [Diag. data] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
5.2 [Error history] pFH- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
5.3 [Warnings] ALr- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Chapter 6 [Complete settings] CSt- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
6.1 [Motor parameters] MPA- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
[Input Filter] dCr– Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
6.2 [Input/Output] io- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
[Input/Output] io- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
[DI1 Assignment] Li1C– to [DI6 Assignment] Li6C - Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
[Input/Output] io- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
[AI1 configuration] Ai1- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
[AI2 configuration] Ai2- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
[AI3 configuration] Ai3- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
[AI4 configuration] Ai4- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
[AI5 configuration] Ai5- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
[Virtual AI1] AV1- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
[DQxx Configuration] doxx - Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
[Rx configuration] rx- Menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
[AQ1 configuration] Ao1- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
[AQ2 configuration] Ao2- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
6.3 [Command and Reference] CrP- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

SP51105 01/2025 3
 6.4 [Generic functions] - [Ramp] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
6.5 [Generic functions] - [+/- speed] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
6.6 [Generic functions] - [Stop configuration] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
6.7 [Generic functions] - [Auto DC injection] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
6.8 [Generic functions] - [Jog] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
6.9 [Generic functions] - [Preset speeds] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
6.10 [Generic functions] - [Jump frequency] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
6.11 [Generic functions] - [Define system units] SuC- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
6.12 [Generic functions] - [PID controller]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
[PID controller] Pid-Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
[PID Feedback] Fdb- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
[PID Reference] rF- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
[PID preset references] Pri- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
[PID Reference] rF- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
[Settings] St- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
6.13 [Generic functions] - [Sleep/wakeup] SPW- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
[Sleep/Wakeup] SPW- Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
[Sleep menu] SLP- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
[AI1 Sensor config.] SiF1- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
[AI2 Sensor config.] SiF2- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
[AI3 Sensor config.] SiF3- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
[AI4 Sensor config.] SiF4- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
[AI5 Sensor config.] SiF5- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
[PI5 Sensor config.] SiF8- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
[PI6 Sensor config.] SiF9- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
[AIV1 Sensor config.] SiV1- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
[Sleep menu] SLP- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
[Boost] Sbt- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
[Advanced sleep check] AdS- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
[Wake up menu] wKP- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
6.14 [Generic functions] - [Threshold reached] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
6.15 [Generic functions] - [Mains contactor command] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
6.16 [Generic functions] - [Parameters switching]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
6.17 [Generic functions] - [Stop after speed timeout] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
6.18 [Generic functions] - [Advanced sleep check] AdS- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
6.19 [Generic functions] - [Booster control] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
[System Architecture] Npq- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
[Pumps Configuration] puMp- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
[System Architecture] Npq- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
[Booster Control] bSC- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
[Stage/Destage Cond.] SdCN- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
[Booster Control] bSC- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
6.20 [Generic monitoring] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
[Stall monitoring] StPr- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
[Therm sensor monit] MtSP- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
6.21 [Error/Warning handling] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
[Fault reset] rSt- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
[Auto Fault Reset] Atr- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
[Catch on the fly] FLr- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
[Motor thermal monit] tHt- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
[Output phase loss] oPL- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
[Input phase loss] iPL- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
[External error] EtF- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
[Undervoltage handling] uSb- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
[Ground Fault] GrFL- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

4 SP51105 01/2025
 [4-20mA loss] LFL- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
[Fallback Speed] LFF- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
[Error detection disable] inH- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
[Fieldbus monitoring] CLL- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
[Communication module] CoMo- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
[Error/Warning handling] CSWM- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
[Process underload] uLd- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
[Process overload] oLd- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
[Warn grp 1 definition] A1C - to [Warn grp 5 definition] A5C - Menus. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
6.22 [Maintenance] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
[Diagnostics] dAu- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
[Fan management] FAMA- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
[Maintenance] CSMA- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Chapter 7 [Communication] CoM- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
[Modbus Fieldbus] Md1- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
[Com. scanner input] iCS- Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
[Com. scanner output] oCS- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
[Profibus] PbC- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Chapter 8 [File management] FMt- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
[Transfer config file] tCF- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
[Factory settings] FCS- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
[Parameter group list] FrY- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
[Factory settings] FCS- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
[Firmware update diag] FWud- Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Chapter 9 [My preferences] MYP- . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
9.1 [LANGUAGE] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
9.2 [Password]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
9.3 [Customization]. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
9.4 [Access level] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
9.5 [LCD settings] . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Part III Maintenance and diagnostics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Chapter 10 Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Chapter 11 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
11.1 Warning Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
11.2 Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
11.3 FAQ. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
11.4 Glossary. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293

SP51105 01/2025 5
6 SP51105 01/2025
 Safety Information

Important Information

NOTICE
Read these instructions carefully, and look at the equipment to become familiar with the device before trying to
install, operate, service, or maintain it. The following special messages may appear throughout this
documentation or on the equipment to warn of potential hazards or to call attention to information that clarifies
or simplifies a procedure.

PLEASE NOTE
Electrical equipment should be installed, operated, serviced, and maintained only by qualified personnel. No
responsibility is assumed by Lauritz Knudsen Electrical & Automation for any consequences arising out of the
use of this material.
A qualified person is one who has skills and knowledge related to the construction and operation of electrical
equipment and its installation, and has received safety training to recognize and avoid the hazards involved.

Qualification Of Personnel
Only appropriately trained persons who are familiar with and understand the contents of this manual and all
other pertinent product documentation are authorized to work on and with this product. In addition, these
persons must have received safety training to recognize and avoid hazards involved. These persons must have
sufficient technical training, knowledge and experience and be able to foresee and detect potential hazards that
may be caused by using the product, by changing the settings and by the mechanical, electrical and electronic
equipment of the entire system in which the product is used. All persons working on and with the product must
be fully familiar with all applicable standards, directives, and accident prevention regulations when performing
such work.

SP51105 01/2025 7
Intended Use
This product is a drive for three-phase asynchronous motors and intended for industrial use according to this
manual.
The product may only be used in compliance with all applicable safety standard and local regulations and
directives, the specified requirements and the technical data. The product must be installed outside the
hazardous ATEX zone. Prior to using the product, you must perform a risk assessment in view of the planned
application. Based on the results, the appropriate safety measures must be implemented. Since the product is
used as a component in an entire system, you must ensure the safety of persons by means of the design of this
entire system (for example, machine design). Any use other than the use explicitly permitted is prohibited and
can result in hazards.

Product Related Information

Read and understand these instructions before performing any procedure with this drive.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
• Only appropriately trained persons who are familiar with and fully understand the contents of the present
manual and all other pertinent product documentation and who have received all necessary training to
recognize and avoid hazards involved are authorized to work on and with this drive system.
• Installation, adjustment, repair and maintenance must be performed by qualified personnel.
• Verify compliance with all local and national electrical code requirements as well as all other applicable
regulations with respect to grounding of all equipment.
• Only use properly rated, electrically insulated tools and measuring equipment.
• Do not touch unshielded components or terminals with voltage present.
• Prior to performing any type of work on the drive system, block the motor shaft to prevent rotation.
• Insulate both ends of unused conductors of the motor cable.
• Do not short across the DC bus terminals or the DC bus capacitors or the braking resistor terminals.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Before performing work on the drive system:
• Disconnect all power, including external control power that may be present. Take into account that the circuit
breaker or main switch does not deenergize all circuits.
• Place a “Do Not Turn On” label on all power switches related to the drive system.
• Lock all power switches in the open position.
• Wait 15 minutes to allow the DC bus capacitors to discharge.
• Verify the absence of voltage. (1)
Before applying voltage to the drive system:
• Verify that the work has been completed and that the entire installation cannot cause hazards.
• If the mains input terminals and the motor output terminals have been grounded and short-circuited, remove
the ground and the short circuits on the mains input terminals and the motor output terminals.
• Verify proper grounding of all equipment.
• Verify that all protective equipment such as covers, doors, grids is installed and/or closed.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Refer to Verifying the absence of voltage to the installation manual of the product.
Damaged products or accessories may cause electric shock or unanticipated equipment operation.

DANGER
ELECTRIC SHOCK OR UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Do not use damaged products or accessories.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Contact your local Lauritz Knudsen Electrical & Automation sales office if you detect any damage whatsoever.

8 SP51105 01/2025
 This equipment has been designed to operate outside of any hazardous location. Only install this equipment in zones
known to be free of a hazardous atmosphere.

DANGER
POTENTIAL FOR EXPLOSION
Install and use this equipment in non-hazardous locations only.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

Your application consists of a whole range of different interrelated mechanical, electrical, and electronic
components, the drive being just one part of the application. The drive by itself is neither intended to nor
capable of providing the entire functionality to meet all safety-related requirements that apply to your
application. Depending on the application and the corresponding risk assessment to be conducted by you, a
whole variety of additional equipment is required such as, but not limited to, external encoders, external brakes,
external monitoring devices, guards, etc.
As a designer/manufacturer of machines, you must be familiar with and observe all standards that apply to
your machine. You must conduct a risk assessment and determine the appropriate Performance Level (PL)
and/or Safety Integrity Level (SIL) and design and build your machine in compliance with all applicable
standards. In doing so, you must consider the interrelation of all components of the machine. In addition, you
must provide instructions for use that enable the user of your machine to perform any type of work on and with
the machine such as operation and maintenance in a safe manner.
The present document assumes that you are fully aware of all normative standards and requirements that
apply to your application. Since the drive cannot provide all safety-related functionality for your entire
application, you must ensure that the required Performance Level and/or Safety Integrity Level is reached by
installing all necessary additional equipment.

WARNING
INSUFFICIENT PERFORMANCE LEVEL/SAFETY INTEGRITY LEVEL AND/OR UNINTENDED EQUIPMENT
OPERATION
 Conduct a risk assessment according to EN ISO 12100 and all other standards that apply to your
application.
 Use redundant components and/or control paths for all critical control functions identified in your risk
assessment.
 Implement all monitoring functions required to avoid any type of hazard identified in your risk assessment,
for example, slipping or falling loads.
 Verify that the service life of all individual components used in your application is sufficient for the intended
service life of your overall application.
 Perform extensive commissioning tests for all potential error situations to verify the effectiveness of the
safety-related functions and monitoring functions implemented, for example, but not limited to, speed
monitoring by means of encoders, short circuit monitoring for all connected equipment, correct operation
of brakes and guards.
 Perform extensive commissioning tests for all potential error situations to verify that the load can be
brought to a safe stop under all conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

The products may perform unexpected movements because of incorrect wiring, incorrect settings, incorrect
data or other errors.

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
 Carefully install the wiring in accordance with the EMC requirements.
 Do not operate the product with unknown or unsuitable settings or data.
 Perform a comprehensive commissioning test.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

SP51105 01/2025 9
 WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
 The designer of any control scheme must consider the potential failure modes of control paths and, for
critical control functions, provide a means to achieve a safe state during and after a path failure. Examples
of critical control functions are emergency stop, overtravel stop, power outage and restart.
 Separate or redundant control paths must be provided for critical control functions.
 System control paths may include communication links. Consideration must be given to the implications
of unanticipated transmission delays or failures of the link.
 Observe all accident prevention regulations and local safety guidelines (1).
 Each implementation of the product must be individually and thoroughly tested for proper operation before
being placed into service.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

(1) For USA: Additional information, refer to NEMA ICS 1.1 (latest edition), Safety Guidelines for the Application,
Installation, and Maintenance of Solid State Control and to NEMA ICS 7.1 (latest edition), Safety Standards for
Construction and Guide for Selection, Installation and Operation of Adjustable-Speed Drive Systems.
The temperature of the products described in this manual may exceed 80 °C (176 °F) during operation.

WARNING
HOT SURFACES
 Ensure that any contact with hot surfaces is avoided.
 Do not allow flammable or heat-sensitive parts in the immediate vicinity of hot surfaces.
 Verify that the product has sufficiently cooled down before handling it.
 Verify that the heat dissipation is sufficient by performing a test run under maximum load conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Machines, controllers, and related equipment are usually integrated into networks. Unauthorized persons and
malware may gain access to the machine as well as to other devices on the network/fieldbus of the machine
and connected networks via insufficiently secure access to software and networks.

WARNING
UNAUTHORIZED ACCESS TO THE MACHINE VIA SOFTWARE AND NETWORKS
 In your hazard and risk analysis, consider all hazards that result from access to and operation on the
network/fieldbus and develop an appropriate cyber security concept.
 Verify that the hardware infrastructure and the software infrastructure into which the machine is integrated
as well as all organizational measures and rules covering access to this infrastructure consider the results
of the hazard and risk analysis and are implemented according to best practices and standards covering
IT security and cyber security (such as: ISO/IEC 27000 series, Common Criteria for Information Technology
Security Evaluation, ISO/ IEC 15408, IEC 62351, ISA/IEC 62443, NIST Cybersecurity Framework,
Information Security Forum - Standard of Good Practice for Information Security).
 Verify the effectiveness of your IT security and cyber security systems using appropriate, proven methods.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
Perform a comprehensive commissioning test to verify that communication monitoring properly detects
communication interruptions
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

NOTICE
DESTRUCTION DUE TO INCORRECT MAINS VOLTAGE
Before switching on and configuring the product, verify that it is approved for the mains voltage.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

10 SP51105 01/2025
 About the Book

At a Glance

Document Scope
The purpose of this document is to:
 help you to set up the drive,
 show you how to program the drive,
 show you the different menus, modes, and parameters,
 help you in maintenance and diagnostics.

Validity Note
This documentation is valid for the xD2000 drives.
The technical characteristics of the devices described in the present document also appear online. To access
the information online, go to the https://www.lk-ea.com.
The characteristics that are described in the present document should be the same as those characteristics
that appear online. In line with our policy of constant improvement, we may revise content over time to improve
clarity and accuracy. If you see a difference between the document and online information, use the online
information as your reference.

Related Documents
Use your tablet or your PC to quickly access detailed and comprehensive information on all our products on
https://www.lk-ea.com.
The internet site provides the information you need for products and solutions:
 The whole catalog for detailed characteristics and selection guides,
 A large quantity of White Papers, Environment documents, Application solutions, Specifications... to gain a
better understanding of our electrical systems and equipment or automation,
 And finally all the User Guides related to your drive, listed below:
(Other option manuals and Instruction sheets are available on https://www.lk-ea.com)

Title of Documentation Catalog Number

xD2000 Getting Started SP51108 (English)
xD2000 Installation Manual SP51104 (English)
xD2000 Programming Manual SP51105 (English)
xD2000 Modbus Manual SP51106 (English)
xD2000 PROFIBUS DP manual SP51107 (English)
xD2000 Communication Parameters File

You can download these technical publications and other technical information from our website at
https://www.lk-ea.com.

SP51105 01/2025 11
Terminology
The technical terms, terminology, and the corresponding descriptions in this manual normally use the terms or
definitions in the relevant standards.
In the area of drive systems this includes, but is not limited to, terms such as error, error message, failure, fault,
fault reset, protection, safe state, safety function, warning, warning message, and so on.
Among others, these standards include:
 IEC 61800 series: Adjustable speed electrical power drive systems
 IEC 61508 Ed.2 series: Functional safety of electrical/electronic/programmable electronic safety-related
 EN 954-1 Safety of machinery - Safety related parts of control systems
 EN ISO 13849-1 & 2 Safety of machinery - Safety related parts of control systems.
 IEC 61158 series: Industrial communication networks - Fieldbus specifications
 IEC 61784 series: Industrial communication networks - Profiles
 IEC 60204-1: Safety of machinery - Electrical equipment of machines – Part 1: General requirements
In addition, the term zone of operation is used in conjunction with the description of specific hazards, and is
defined as it is for a hazard zone or danger zone in the EC Machinery Directive (2006/42/EC) and in
ISO 12100-1.
Also see the glossary at the end of this manual.

12 SP51105 01/2025
 Easy xD Series xD2000
Introduction
EAV64387 12/2019

Part I
Introduction

Introduction

What Is in This Part?

This part contains the following chapters:
Chapter Chapter Name Page
1 Setup 15
2 Overview 21

SP51105 01/2025 13
Introduction

14 SP51105 01/2025
 Easy xD Series xD2000
Setup
EAV64387 12/2019

Chapter 1
Setup

Setup

What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Initial Steps 16
Steps for Setting-Up the Drive 18
Software Enhancements 19

SP51105 01/2025 15
Setup

Initial Steps

Before Powering up the Drive

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Before switching on the device, verify that no unintended signals can be applied to the digital inputs that could
cause unintended movements.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

If the drive was not connected to mains for an extended period of time, the capacitors must be restored to their
full performance before the motor is started.

NOTICE
REDUCED CAPACITOR PERFORMANCE
 Apply mains voltage to the drive for one hour before starting the motor if the drive has not been connected
to mains for the specified periods of time (1):
 Verify that no Run command can be applied before the period of one hour has elapsed.
 Verify the date of manufacture if the drive is commissioned for the first time and run the specified
procedure if the date of manufacture is more than 12 months in the past.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

(1) Period of time:

 12 months at a maximum storage temperature of +50°C (+122°F)
 24 months at a maximum storage temperature of +45°C (+113°F)
 36 months at a maximum storage temperature of +40°C (+104°F)

If the specified procedure cannot be performed without a Run command because of internal mains contactor
control, perform this procedure with the power stage enabled, but the motor being a standstill so that there is
no appreciable mains current in the capacitors.

Mains Contactor

NOTICE
DAMAGE TO THE DRIVE
Do not use this function at intervals of less than 60 s.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Using a Motor with a Lower Rating or Dispensing with a Motor Altogether

In factory settings, the motor output phase loss detection is active: [OutPhaseLoss Assign] oPL is set to
[OPF Error Triggered] YES. For details, refer to the parameter description page 214. For commissioning tests
or maintenance phase, the drive could be connected to a small motor power size and thus trigger an error
[Output Phase Loss] oPF2 or [Single output phase loss] oPF1 when a Run command is applied.For that
purpose, the function can be disabled by setting [OutPhaseLossAssign] oPL to [Function Inactive] no.
Set also [Motor control type] Ctt to [U/F VC Standard] Std in [Motor parameters] MPA-. For details, refer
to the parameter description page 76.

16 SP51105 01/2025
 Setup

NOTICE
MOTOR OVERHEATING
Install external thermal monitoring equipment under the following conditions:
 If a motor with a nominal current of less than 20% of the nominal current of the drive is connected.
 If you use the function Motor Switching.

Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
If output phase monitoring is disabled, phase loss and, by implication, accidental disconnection of cables, are
not detected.
 Verify that the setting of this parameter does not result in unsafe conditions.

Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

SP51105 01/2025 17
Setup

Steps for Setting-Up the Drive

1 Refer to the installation manual.

2 Switch ON the drive without active run

command.

3 Configure:
In the [Simply start] SYS- menu, select
the [Macro Config] CFG configuration
compalible with the wiring used.

4 In the [Simply start] SIM - menu,

adjust the following parameters:

[Nominal Motor Power] NPr.

[Motor Th Current] itH only if the factory

configuration of the drive is not suitable.

[Acceleration] ACC and

[Deceleration] dEC.

[Low speed] LSP and [High Speed] HSP.

[Output Ph Rotation] PHr

5 Start the drive.

The products may perform unexpected movements because of incorrect wiring, incorrect settings, incorrect
data or other errors.

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
 Carefully install the wiring in accordance with the EMC requirements.
 Do not operate the product with unknown or unsuitable settings or data.
 Perform a comprehensive commissioning test.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Tips
Use the [Config. Source] FCSi parameter page 233 to restore the factory settings at any time.
NOTE: The following operations must be performed for optimum drive performance in terms of accuracy and
response time:
 Enter the values indicated on the motor nameplate in the [Motor parameters] MPA- menu.
 Perform autotuning with the motor cold and connected using the [Autotuning] tun parameter.

18 SP51105 01/2025
 Setup

Software Enhancements

Overview
Since the xD2000 was first launched, it has benefited from the addition of several new functions.
The software version has been updated to V1.6.

Enhancements Made to Version V1.6. in Comparison to V1.5

[Inertia Factor] SPGu parameter has been added in the [Motor parameters] MPA- menu.
In the [Motor parameters] MPA- menu, the [Input Filter] dCr- menu is available, including its related
parameters.
Support of 460 V mains supply voltage. Refer to the [Undervoltage handling] uSb-menu.
Fallback speed response on some error detection is now possible. Refer to the [Fallback Speed] LFF- menu.
New parameters to display the motor run time and the power-on time in 0.1 hours. Refer to the parameters
[Motor Run Time] rtHH and [Power-on Time] PtHH.
PID monitoring parameters can be selected to be displayed on the default screen. Refer to the [Display screen
type] MSC- menu.
A new possible behavior is added for the STOP/RESET key, see [Stop Key Enable] PSt parameter.
New possible settings are available on drive outputs (digital outputs and relays).
New motor control type [SYN_U VC] SYnu is now available. More details in [Motor control type] Ctt
parameter description.
New parameters are now available in [Motor parameters] MPA menu.

Enhancements Made to Version V1.5 in Comparison to V1.4

The setting range of [Nom Motor Current] nCr and [Motor Th Current] itH has been updated.
New menu to display the energy consumption.
[Overmodul. Activation] oVMA parameter has been added in the [Maintenance] CSMA- menu.
[Fan mode] FFM is forced to [Never] StP on XD2000-02P2-4B1121 frame size 0.

Enhancements Made to Version V1.4 in Comparison to V1.3

In the [My preferences] MYP- menu, the [Password] Cod- submenu has been added. It allows you to
protect the configuration access via a password.
New settings in the [LCD settings] CnL- menu.
New parameter to configure a delay for the function Sleep Wakeup.
New parameter for the ground fault detection. Refer to the [Ground Fault] GrFL- menu.
New menu to customize the default screen. Refer to the [Display screen type] MSC- menu.

Enhancements Made to Version V1.3 in Comparison to V1.2

In the [My preferences] MYP menu, the [LCD settings] CnL- menu has been added.
The default value of several parameters, such a [Motor control type] Ctt, [R3 assignment] r3 or
[DI1 Delay] L1d to [D16 Delay] L16d, has been modified.
The relay R1 can now be asssigned for multipump feature.

Enhancements Made to Version V1.2 in Comparison to V1.1

Improvements of the Sleep Wakeup function.
In the [Display] Mon- menu, the [Application parameters] APr- menu has been added.
New functions are available. Refer to the [Complete Settings] CSt- menu.

SP51105 01/2025 19
Setup

20 SP51105 01/2025
 Easy xD Series xD2000
Overview
EAV64387 12/2019

Chapter 2
Overview

Overview

What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Factory Configuration 22
Macro Configuration 23
Basic Functions 25
Plain Text Display Terminal 26
Structure of the Parameter Table 28
Finding a Parameter in This Document 29

SP51105 01/2025 21
Overview

Factory Configuration

Factory Settings
The drive is factory-set for common operating conditions:
 Display: drive ready [Pre-Ramp Ref Freq] FrH when motor is ready to run and motor frequency when motor
is running.
 The DI3 and DI5 to DI6 digital inputs, AI2 and AI3 analog inputs, R2 and R3 relays are unassigned.
 Stop mode when error detected: freewheel.
This table presents the basic parameters of the drive and their factory setting values:

Code Name Factory setting values

bFr [Motor Standard] [50Hz IEC] 50
rin [Reverse Disable] [Yes] YES
tCC [2/3-Wire Control] [2-Wire Control] 2C: 2-wire control
Ctt [Motor control type] [U/F VC Quad.] uFq: U/F for quadratics loads
ACC [Acceleration] 30.0 s
dEC [Deceleration] 30.0 s
LSP [Low Speed] 0.0 Hz
HSP [High Speed] 50.0 Hz
itH [Motor Th Current] Nominal motor current (value depending on drive rating)
Frd [Forward] [DI1] di1: Digital input DI1
Fr1 [Ref Freq 1 Config] [AI1] Ai1: Analog input AI1
r1 [R1 Assignment] [Operating State Fault] FLt: the contact opens when the
drive has detected error or when the drive has been switched
off
brA [Dec.Ramp Adapt] [Yes] YES: function active (automatic adaptation of
deceleration ramp)
Atr [Auto Fault Reset] [No] no: function inactive
Stt [Type of stop] [On Ramp] rMP: on ramp
Ao1 [AQ1 assignment] [Motor Frequency] oFr: Motor frequency
Ao2 [AQ2 assignment] [Motor Current] oCr: Motor current

NOTE: If you want to restore the drive presettings to their factory values, set [Config. Source] FCSi to
[Macro Config] ini.
Verify whether the above values are compatible with the application and modify them if required.

22 SP51105 01/2025
 Overview

Macro Configuration

Introduction
The drive offers quick programming using macro configurations that correspond to different applications or
uses:
 Start/Stop
 Automatic/Manual control
 PID controller usage
 Preset speeds
 Connection to Modbus fieldbus
 Multi Pump control
Each of these configurations is still configurable.

Macro Configuration Presets

[Start/Stop] [Auto/Manual] [PID Controller] [Preset [Modbus] [Multi-pump 1] [Multi-pump 2]

bStS bAMM bPid speeds] bMbC bMP1 bMP2
(Factory bPSP
setting)
[R1 [Operating [Operating State [Operating State [Operating [Operating [Operating [Operating
Assignment] State Fault] Fault] FLt Fault] FLt State Fault] State Fault] State Fault] State Fault]
r1 FLt FLt FLt FLt FLt
[R2 [Device [Device Running] [Device [Device [Device [Pump 2 Cmd] [Pump 1 Cmd]
Assignment] Running]run run Running] run Running] Running] run MPo2 MPo1
r2 run
[R3 [Not Assigned] [Not Assigned] [Not Assigned] [Not Assigned] [Not Assigned] [Pump 3 Cmd] [Pump 2 Cmd]
Assignment] no no no no no MPo3 MPo2
r3
[AQ1 [Motor [Motor [Motor [Motor [Motor [Motor [Motor
assignment] Frequency] Frequency] oFr Frequency] Frequency] Frequency] Frequency] Frequency]
Ao1 oFr oFr oFr oFr oFr oFr
[AQ1 Type] [Current] 0A [Current] 0A [Current] 0A [Current] 0A [Current] 0A [Current] 0A [Current] 0A
Ao1t
[AQ1 min 4 mA 4 mA 4 mA 4 mA 4 mA 4 mA 4 mA
output]
AoL1
[AQ1 max 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA
output]
AoH1
[AQ2 [Motor Current] [Motor Current] [Motor Current] [Motor [Motor Current] [Motor Current] [Motor Current]
assignment] oCr oCr oCr Current] oCr oCr oCr oCr
Ao2
[AQ2 Type] [Current] 0A [Current] 0A [Current] 0A [Current] 0A [Current] 0A [Current] 0A [Current] 0A
Ao2t
[AQ2 min 4 mA 4 mA 4 mA 4 mA 4 mA 4 mA 4 mA
output]
AoL2
[AQ2 max 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA
output]
AoH2
[AI1 Type] [Voltage]10u [Voltage] 10u [Voltage] 10u [Voltage] [Voltage] 10u [Voltage] 10u [Voltage] 10u
Ai1t 10u
[AI1 min value] 0 V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V 0V
uiL1
[AI1 max 10 V 10 V 10 V 10 V 10 V 10 V 10 V
value] uiH1
[AI2 Type] [Current] 0A [Current] 0A [Current] 0A [Current] 0A [Current] 0A [Current] 0A [Current] 0A
Ai2t
[AI2 min. 4 mA 4 mA 4 mA 4 mA 4 mA 4 mA 4 mA
value] CrL2
[AI2 max. 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA 20 mA
value] CrH2

SP51105 01/2025 23
Overview

[Start/Stop] [Auto/Manual] [PID Controller] [Preset [Modbus] [Multi-pump 1] [Multi-pump 2]

bStS bAMM bPid speeds] bMbC bMP1 bMP2
(Factory bPSP
setting)
[Control [Not separ.] [Not separ.] [Not separ.] [Not separ.] [Separate] [Not separ.] [Not separ.]
Mode] CHCF SiM SiM SiM SiM SEP SiM SiM
[Command [Cmd Channel [Cmd Channel 1] [Cmd Channel 1] [Cmd Channel [Cmd Channel [Cmd Channel [Cmd Channel
Switching] 1] Cd1 Cd1 Cd1 1] Cd1 1] Cd1 1] Cd1 1] Cd1
CCS
[Cmd channel [Terminal] [Terminal] tEr [Terminal] [Terminal] [Terminal] [Terminal] [Terminal]
1] Cd1 tEr tEr tEr tEr tEr tEr
[Cmd channel [Ref. Freq- [Ref. Freq- [Ref. Freq- [Ref. Freq- [Ref. Freq- [Ref. Freq- [Ref. Freq-
2] Cd2 Modbus] Modbus] Modbus] Modbus] Modbus] Modbus] Modbus]
Mdb Mdb Mdb Mdb Mdb Mdb Mdb
[Freq Switch [Ref Freq [DI4 [Ref Freq [Ref Freq [DI3 [Ref Freq [Ref Freq
Assign] rFC Channel 1] Configuration] Channel 1] Channel 1] Configuration] Channel 1] Channel 1]
Fr1 di4 Fr1 Fr1 di3 Fr1 Fr1
[Ref Freq 1 [AI1] Ai1 [AI1] Ai1 [AI1] Ai1 [AI1] Ai1 [Ref. Freq- [AI1] Ai1 [AI1] Ai1
Config] Fr1 Modbus]
Mdb
[Ref Freq 2 [Not [AI2] Ai2 [Not [Not [AI1] Ai1 [Not [Not
Config] Fr2 Configured] Configured] no Configured] Configured] Configured]
no no no no
[2/3-Wire [2-Wire Control] [2-Wire Control] [2-Wire Control] [2-Wire [2-Wire [2-Wire [2-Wire
Control] tCC 2C 2C 2C Control] 2C Control] 2C Control] 2C Control] 2C
[Reverse [Not Assigned] [DI2 [Not Assigned] [Not Assigned] [Not Assigned] [Not Assigned] [Not Assigned]
Assign] rrS no Configuration] no no no no no
di2
[Fault Reset [DI2] Li2 [Not Assigned] [NotAssigned] [DI2 ] Li2 [DI2] Li2 [Not [Not Assigned]
Assign] rSF no no Assigned]no no
[PID feedback [Not [Not Configured] [AI2] Ai2 [No] no [Not [AI2] Ai2 [AI2] Ai2
Assign] PiF Configured] no Configured]
no no
[2 Preset Freq] [Not Assigned] [Not Assigned] [Not Assigned] [DI3 [Not Assigned] [Not Assigned] [Not Assigned]
PS2 no no no Configuration] no no no
di3
[4 Preset Freq] [Not Assigned] [Not Assigned] [Not Assigned] [DI4 [Not Assigned] [Not Assigned] [Not Assigned]
PS4 no no no Configuration] no no no
di4
[Preset speed 10 10 10 10 10 10 10
2] SP2
[Preset speed 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
3] SP3
[Preset speed 30 30 30 30 30 30 30
4] SP4

24 SP51105 01/2025
 Overview

Basic Functions

Drive Ventilation
If [Fan mode] FFM is set to:
 [Standard] Std, the operation of the fan is enabled when the motor is running. According to drive rating,
this could be the only available setting.
 [Always] run, the fan is always activated.
 [Economy] ECo, the fan is activated only if necessary, according to the internal thermal state of the drive.
NOTE: This parameter is forced to [Never] StP on XD2000-02P2-4B1121 frame size 0.
If [Fan mode] FFM is set to [Never] StP, the fan of the drive is disabled.

NOTICE
OVERHEATING
Verify that the ambient temperature does not exceed 40 °C (104° F) if the fan is disabled.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Fan speed and [Fan Operation Time] FPbt are monitored values:
 An abnormal low speed of the fan triggers a warning [Fan Feedback Warning] FFdA.
 As soon as [Fan Operation Time] FPbt reach the predefined value of 45,000 hours, a warning
[Fan Counter Warning] FCtA is triggered.
[Fan Operation Time] FPbt counter can be set to 0 by using the [Time Counter Reset] rPr parameter.

SP51105 01/2025 25
Overview

Plain Text Display Terminal

Description of the Plain Text Display Terminal

This Plain Text Display Terminal is a local control unit which can be either plugged on the drive or mounted on
the door of the wall-mounted or floor-standing enclosure. It has a cable with connectors, which is connected
to the drive front Modbus serial link.

1 STOP / RESET: Stop command / apply a Fault Reset.

2 ESC: used to quit a menu/parameter or remove the currently displayed value in order to revert to the previous value
retained in the memory
3 Graphic display.
4 Home: access directly the home page.
5 RUN: executes the function assuming it has been configured.
6 Touch wheel / OK: used to save the current value or access the selected menu/parameter. The touch wheel is used
to scroll fast into the menus. Up/down arrows are used for precise selections, right/left arrows are used to select
digits when setting a numerical value of a parameter.

NOTE: Keys 1, 5 and 6 can be used to control the drive, if control via the Plain Text Display Terminal is activated.
To activate the keys on the Plain Text Display Terminal, you first need to set [Ref Freq 1 Config] Fr1 to
[HMI] LCC.

Description of the Graphic Display

Key
1 Display line: its content can be configured
2 Drive state
3 Customer defined
4 Active control channel
 TERM: terminals
 HMI: Plain Text Display Terminal
 MDB: integrated Modbus serial
 NET: fieldbus module
5 Menu line: indicates the name of the current menu or submenu
6 Menus, submenus, parameters, values, bar charts, and so on, are displayed in drop-down window format
on a maximum of 2 lines. The line or value selected by the navigation button is displayed in reverse video

26 SP51105 01/2025
 Overview

Description of the Product Front LEDs

Key LED color LED status Drive status

1 Green Blinking Ready
Flickering Acceleration or deceleration
On Running
2 Red Blinking Warning
On Operating state fault
3 Yellow Blinking Modbus communication active
4 Green On Fieldbus module: communication active
5 Red On Fieldbus module: communication detected error
Blinking Fieldbus module: incorrect settings

SP51105 01/2025 27
Overview

Structure of the Parameter Table

General Legend

Pictogram Description
These parameters only appear if the corresponding function has been selected in another
menu. When the parameters can also be accessed and adjusted from within the configuration
menu for the corresponding function, their description is detailed in these menus, on the pages
indicated, to aid programming.
Setting of this parameter can be done during operation or when stopped.
NOTE: It is advisable to stop the motor before modifying any of the settings.
To modify the assignment of the parameter, reinforced validation is required.

Parameter Presentation
Below is an example of a parameter presentation:

Table 1

1 Way to access parameter 7 Parameter name

2 Menu code, followed by a "-" 8 Parameter description

3 Name of menu 9 Value code, if any

4 Sub-menu code, if any 10 Possible value(s) / state of parameter, if any

5 Name of sub-menu 11 Adjustment range, if any

6 Parameter code 12 Factory setting, if any

28 SP51105 01/2025
 Overview

Finding a Parameter in This Document

With the Manual

It is possible to use either the parameter name or the parameter code to search in the manual the page giving
details of the selected parameter.

Difference Between Menu and Parameter

A dash after menu and submenu codes is used to differentiate menu commands from parameter codes.
Example:

Level Name Code

Menu [Ramp] rAMP-
Parameter [Acceleration] ACC

SP51105 01/2025 29
Overview

30 SP51105 01/2025
 Easy xD Series xD2000
Programming
EAV64387 12/2019

Part II
Programmi ng

Programming

What Is in This Part?

This part contains the following chapters:
Chapter Chapter Name Page
3 [Simply start] SYS- 33
4 [Display] Mon- 39
5 [Diagnostics] diA- 59
6 [Complete settings] CSt- 65
7 [Communication] CoM- 227
8 [File management] FMt- 231
9 [My preferences] MYP- 235

SP51105 01/2025 31
Programming

32 SP51105 01/2025
 Easy xD Series xD2000
Simply start SYS-
EAV64387 12/2019

Chapter 3
[Simply start] SyS -

[Simply start] SYS-

What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[Macro-configuration] CFG- Menu 34
[Simply start] SiM- Menu 35
[Modified parameters] LMd- Menu 38

Introduction

[Simply start] SYS- menu contains 3 tabs for quick access to mains features:
 Macro Configuration tab
 Simply Start tab which gives a quick access to basic parameters to set.
 Modified Parameters tab which gives a quick access to the 10 last modified parameters.

SP51105 01/2025 33
Simply start SYS-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: SYS>CFG

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

SYS- [Simply start]

CFG- [Macro config]

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Verify that the parameter setting is compatible with the type of wiring used.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.

[Macro config]
Macro Configuration
Settings Code/Value Description
[Start/Stop] bStS Start / Stop
Factory setting
[Auto/Manual] bAMM Auto / Manual
[PID Controller] bPid PID controller
[Preset speeds] bPSP Preset speeds
[Modbus] bMbC Modbus
[Multi-pump 1] bMP1 Multi- pump 1
[Multi-pump 2] bMP2 Multi- pump 2

For more information, refer to the macro configuration presets table, page 23.

34 SP51105 01/2025
 Simply start SYS-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: SYS>SIM

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

SYS- [Simply start]
SiM- [Simply start]
This menu provides a quick access to the basic parameters to set.

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
 Fully read and understand the manual of the connected motor.
 Verify that all motor parameters are correctly set by referring to the nameplate and the manual
of the connected motor.
 If you modify the value of one or more motor parameters after having performed autotuning,
the value of the measured tune parameters is reset and you must re-perform autotuning.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.

nPr [Nominal motor power] According to the drive According to the drive
rating rating
g Nominal motor power (given on the motor nameplate).
Setting range in kW if [Motor Standard] bFr is set to [50Hz] 50, in HP if [Motor Standard]
bFr is set to [60Hz] 60.
NOTE: Modifying this parameter resets the motor tune parameters.
Autotuning will need to be performed again.
nCr [Nominal Motor Current] 0.25...1.5 In(1) According to drive
(2)) rating and [Motor
(step: 0.01 A
Standard] bFr
Nominal motor current (given on the motor nameplate).
NOTE: Modifying this parameter resets the motor tune parameters.
Autotuning will need to be performed again.
(1) Corresponding to the rated drive current indicated in the installation manual and on the
drive nameplate.
itH [Motor Th Current] 0.2...1.1(1) According to drive rating

Motor thermal monitoring current to be set to the rated current indicated on the nameplate.
 (1) Corresponding to the rated drive current indicated in the installation manual and on the
drive nameplate.
ACC [Acceleration] 0.0...6,000.0 s(1) 30.0 s

Time to accelerate from 0 to the [Nominal Motor Freq] FrS. To have a repeatability in the
 ramps, the value of this parameter must be set according to the possibility of the
application.
(1) Range 0.01 to 99.99 s or 0.1 to 999.9 s or 1...6,000 s according to [Ramp increment]
INr.
dEC [Deceleration] 0.0...6,000.0 s(1) 30.0 s
Time to decelerate from the [Nominal Motor Freq] FrS to 0. To have a repeatability in the
 ramps, the value of this parameter must be set according to the possibility of the
application.
(1) Range 0.01 to 99.99 s or 0.1 to 999.9 s or 1...6,000 s according to [Ramp increment]
INr.
LSP [Low Speed] 0...[High Speed] HSP 0.0 Hz
(step: 0.1 Hz)

 Motor frequency at minimum reference.

SP51105 01/2025 35
Simply start SYS-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: SYS>SIM

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

SYS- [Simply start]

SiM- [Simply start]
HSP [High Speed] [Low Speed] LSP...[Max 50.0 Hz, or preset to
Frequency] tFr 60 Hz if [Motor
(step: 0.1 Hz) Standard] bFr is set
 to [60 Hz] 60.
Motor frequency at maximum reference.
To help prevent [Motor Overspeed] SoF error, it is recommended to have [Max Frequency]
tFr equal to or higher than 110% of [High Speed] HSP.
PHr [Output Ph Rotation]
Output phase rotation.
The modification of this parameter has the same consequence as an inversion of two
g phases of the motor wiring. It allows you to follow color standards for wiring or to adapt the
rotation of the motor to the intended forward direction without any electrical wiring
modification.
Settings Code/Value Description
[ABC] AbC Standard rotation

Factory setting
[ACB] ACb Opposite rotation

Fr1 [Ref Freq 1 Config]

Configuration reference frequency 1
Settings Code/Value Description
[Not Configured] no Not assigned
[AI1]...[AI5] Ai1...Ai5 Analog input AI1...AI5

Factory Setting

NOTE: AI4 and AI5 can only be accessed if

XDIO-EX1-V01 Extended I/O option module
has been inserted.
[HMI] LCC Display terminal source
[Ref. Freq-Modbus] Mdb Modbus service
[Ref. Freq-Com. Module] nEt Fieldbus module source
[DI5 PulseInput Pi5...Pi6 Digital input DI5...DI6 used as pulse input
Assignment]...[DI6 PulseInput
Assignment]

36 SP51105 01/2025
 Simply start SYS-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: SYS>SIM

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

SYS- [Simply start]

SiM- [Simply start]
oPL [OutPhaseLoss Assign]
Output phase loss assignment.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
If output phase monitoring is disabled, phase loss and, by implication, accidental disconnection of
cables, are not detected.
 Verify that the setting of this parameter does not result in unsafe conditions
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.

Settings Code/Value Description

[Function Inactive] no Function inactive
[OPF error triggered] YES Output phase loss monitoring activated: [Single
Output Phase Loss] oPF1 or [Output Phase
Loss] oPF2 is triggered and freewheel stop is
activated.
Factory setting
[No error Triggered] oAC No detected error triggered, but management of
the output voltage in order to avoid an
overcurrent when the link with the motor is re-
established and catch on the fly performed
(even if this function has not been
configured).The drive switches to [Output cut
]SoC state after [OutPhL Time] odt time.
Catch on fly is possible as soon as the drive is in
stand by output cut [Output cut] SoC state.

tCC [2/3-Wire Control]

2-wire or 3-wire control.

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
If this parameter is changed, the parameters [Reverse Assign] rrS and [2/3-Wire Control] tCC
and the assignments of the digital inputs are reset to the factory setting.
• Verify that this change is compatible with the type of wiring used.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Settings Code/Value Description

[2-wire control] 2C 2-wire control (level commands): This is the
input state (0 or 1) or edge (0 to 1 or 1 to 0),
which controls running or stopping.
Example of source wiring:
xD2000

DI1 Forward
DIx Reverse

Factory setting

SP51105 01/2025 37
Simply start SYS-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: SYS>SIM

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

SYS- [Simply start]

SiM- [Simply start]

Settings Code/Value Description

[3-wire control] 3C 3-wire control (pulse commands) [3 wire]: A
forward or reverse pulse is sufficient to
command starting, a stop pulse is sufficient to
command stopping.
Example of source wiring:
xD2000

DI1 Stop
DI2 Forward
DIx Reverse

drt [Dual Rating]

Dual rating state.
Select the normal/heady duty depending on the overload required on the application.
NOTE: Modifying this parameter resets the motor tune parameters.
Autotuning will need to be performed again.
Settings Code/Value Description
[Normal Duty] norMAL Normal rating, drive current limitation is 1.1 x In
Factory setting
[Heavy Duty] HiGH High rating, drive current limitation is 1.5 x In

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: SYS>LMD

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

SYS- [Simply start]
LNd- [Modified parameters]
This menu gives a quick access to the 10 last modified parameters.

38 SP51105 01/2025
 Easy xD Series xD2000
Display MOn-
EAV64387 12/2019

Chapter 4
[Display] Mon-

What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains the following sections:
Section Topic Page
4.1 [Motor parameters] 40
4.2 [Drive parameters] 41
4.3 [I/O map] 43
4.4 Energy parameters 45
4.5 [Communication map] 46
4.6 [Application parameters] 53

Introduction

[Display] Mon- menu shows monitoring data related to the drive and the application.
It offers an application-oriented display in terms of energy, cost, cycle, efficiency, ...
This is available with customized units and graphics view.

SP51105 01/2025 39
Display MOn-

Section 4.1
[Motor parameters]

[Motor parameters]

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: MON>MMO

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

Mon- [Display]
MMo- [Motor parameters]
This menu shows the motor-related parameters.
The parameters available in this menu are in read-only mode, they cannot be configured.
SPd [Motor Speed] 0...65,535 rpm –

Motor Speed.
This parameter displays the estimated rotor speed without motor slip.
uoP [Motor Voltage] 0...[Nom Motor –
Voltage] unS
(step: 1 V)
Motor voltage
oPr [Motor Power] -300...300 % –
(step: 1 %)
Motor power.
Output power in % (100% = nominal motor mechanical power).
otr [Motor Torque] -300...300 % –
(step: 0.1 %)
Motor torque.
Output torque in % (100% = nominal motor mechanical power).
NOTE: The displayed value is always positive in motor mode and negative in generator
mode whatever the direction
LCr [Motor Current] 0...2 In(1) –
(2))
(step: 0.01 A
Motor current (estimation).
The value depends on the drive ratings.
(1): In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the
drive nameplate.
(2): For drives with power range ≤ 15 kW. If the power range is between 18 and 160 kW
(limits included), the step is 0.1 A else it is 1 A.
tHr [Motor Therm state] 0...200 % –
(step: 1 %)
Motor thermal state.
The normal motor thermal state is 100%, the [Motor Overload] oLF threshold is set to 118%

40 SP51105 01/2025
 Display MOn-

Section 4.2
[Drive parameters]

[Drive parameters]

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: MON>MPI

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

Mon- [Display]
MPi- [Drive parameters]
This menu shows the drive-related parameters.
FrH [Pre-Ramp Ref Freq] -500.0...500.0 Hz –

Frequency reference before ramp (signed value).

This parameter is read-only. It enables you to display the reference frequency applied to
the motor, regardless of which channel for reference value has been selected.
LFr [Ref Frequency] -500.0...500.0 Hz 0.0 Hz

 Reference frequency.
This parameter only appears if the function has been enabled. It is used to change the
reference frequency from the remote control. OK does not have to be pressed to enable a
change of reference.
rFr [Motor Frequency] -3,276.8...3,276.7 Hz 0.0 Hz

Motor frequency.
uLn [Mains Voltage] 1.0...860.0 V _

Mains voltage.
Line voltage based on DC bus measurement, motor running or stopped.
Setting range: [No meas.] uLnunK is displayed if no value is measured.
VbuS [DC Bus Voltage] 0...65,535 V –

DC Bus Voltage.
Setting range: [No meas.] uLnunK is displayed if no value is measured.
tHd [Drive Therm State] 0...200% _

Drive thermal state.

The normal drive thermal state is 100%, the [Drive Overheating] oHF threshold is set to 118%
CFpS [Used Param. Set]
Used parameter set.
g Configuration parameter status (can be accessed if parameter switching has been enabled).
Settings Code/Value Description
[None] no Not assigned

[Set N°1] CFP1 Parameter set 1 active

[Set N°2] CFP2 Parameter set 2 active

[Set N°3] CFP3 Parameter set 3 active

rtHH [Motor Run Time] 0.0...429,496,729.5 h _

Motor run time.

Run elapsed time display (resettable) in 0.1 hours (length of time the motor has been switched
on).
PtHH [Power-on Time] 0.0...429,496,729.5 h _

Power-on time (resettable).

This counter can be set to 0 by using the [Time Counter Reset ] rPr parameter.

SP51105 01/2025 41
Display MOn-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: MON>MPI

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

Mon- [Display]
MPi- [Drive parameters]
tAC [IGBT Warning Counter] 0...65,535 s –

IGBT Warning counter.

g This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr
rPC [PID Reference] 0...65,535% –

PID reference.
g This parameter can be accessed if [PID Feedback] PiF is not set to [Not Configured] no.
rPF [PID Feedback] 0...65,535 0

PID feedback value.

g This parameter can be accessed if [PID Feedback] PiF is not set to [Not Configured] no.
rPE [PID Error] -32,768...32,767 –

PID error value.

g This parameter can be accessed if [PID Feedback] PiF is not set to [Not Configured] no.
rPo [PID Output] -3,276.8...3,276.7 Hz –

PID output value.

g Output value with limitation.
This parameter can be accessed if [PID Feedback] PiF is not set to [Not Configured] no.

42 SP51105 01/2025
 Display MOn-

Section 4.3
[I/O map]

[I/O map]

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: MON>IOM

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

Mon- [Display]
ioM- [I/O map]
This menu shows information about the inputs and the outputs of the drive such as: the
function assigned, the configuration and the present value or state.
The information is separated in different categories/menus:

• [Digital Input Map] LiA-: The mapping of the digital inputs,

• [Analog inputs image] AiA-: The image of the analog inputs,
• [Digital Output Map] LoA-: The mapping of the digital outputs and relays,
• [Analog Outputs image] AoA-: The image of the analog outputs ,

The parameters available in this menu are in read-only mode, they cannot be configured.
For more information on the inputs/outputs configuration, refer to the submenus in
[Complete settings] [Input/Output].
LiA [Digital Input Map]
This menu is used to display the state of digital inputs. Use the touch wheel to
scroll through the digital inputs:
• Digital inputs DI1 to DI6 of the drive,
• Optional digital inputs DI11 to DI16 if XDIO-EX1-V01 Extended I/O module has been
inserted.
On the Plain Text Display Terminal , click the digital input to see all the functions that are
assigned to the digital input in order to verify the compatibility with the multiple
assignments (low level assignment and high level assignment). If no functions have been
assigned, [No] no is displayed.
For more information on the digital inputs refer to [Complete settings]
[Input/Output] [DI/DQ].
AiA [Analog inputs image]
This menu is used to display the value of analog inputs. Use the touch wheel to scroll
through the analog inputs:
• [AI1] Ai1C- to [AI3] Ai3C-: Analog inputs AI1 to AI3 of the drive.
• [AI4] Ai4C- and [AI5] Ai5C-: Optional analog inputs AI4 and AI5 if XDIO-EX1-V01
Extended I/Omodule has been inserted.
The physical value of the analog input AIx shown in this menu corresponds to the
parameter [AIx] AiXC. The range and the unit depend on the customer configuration.
On the Plain Text Display Terminal , click the analog input AIx (with ‘x’ from 1 to 5) to
display:
• [AIx Assignment] AiXA: all the functions associated with the analog input in order to
verify, for example, compatibility problems with the multiple assignments.
• The minimum and maximum values according to the configured type [AIx Type] AiXt:
• [AIx min value] uiLX and [AIx max value] uiHX with [Voltage] 10u type,
• [AIx min. value] CrLX and [AIx max. value] CrHX with [Current] 0A type.
• The configured value of the interference filtering: [AIx filter] AiXF.
For more information on the analog inputs refer to [Complete settings]
[Input/Output] [AI/AQ].

SP51105 01/2025 43
Display MOn-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: MON>IOM

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

Mon- [Display]
ioM- [I/O map]
LoA- [Digital Output Map]
This menu is used to display the state of digital outputs. Use the touch wheel to scroll
through them:
• R1 to R3: the relays of the drive.
• R4 to R6: the optional relays if XDIO-EX2-V01 Extended relay module has been inserted.
• DQ11 and DQ12: the optional digital output if XDIO-EX1-V01 Extended I/O module has
been inserted.
On the Plain Text Display Terminal , click the relay or the digital output to display:
• The function assigned to the digital output or the relay. If no functions have been
assigned, [No] no is displayed,
• The delay time,
•The active level (high or low),
• The holding time.
For more information on the configuration of the digital outputs and the relays refer
to [Complete settings] [Input/Output].
AoA- [Analog Outputs image]
This menu is used to visualize the value of analog outputs . Use the touch wheel to scroll
through the outputs [AQ1] Ao1C-, [AQ2] Ao2C- and.
The physical value of the analog output AQx displayed in this menu corresponds to the
parameter [AQx] AoXC. The range and the unit depend on the customer configuration.
On the Plain Text Display Terminal , click the analog outputs to display:
• [AQx Assignment] AoX: the function associated with the analog output in order to
verify, for example, compatibility problems with the multiple assignments,
• The minimum and maximum values according to the configured type [AQx Type]
AqXt:
• [AQx min value] uoLX and [AQx max value] uoHX with [Voltage] 10u type,
• [AQx min value] AoLX and [AQx max value] AoHX with [Current] 0A type.
• [Scaling AQx min] ASLx (respectively [Scaling AQx max] ASHX): The scaling of the
lower limit (respectively upper limit) of the assigned parameter, as a percentage of the
minimum (respectively maximum) possible variation.
• The configured value of the interference filtering: [AQx filter] AqXF.
For more information (such as the configuration), refer to [Complete settings]
[Input/Output] [AI/AQ].

44 SP51105 01/2025
 Display MOn-

Section 4.4
Energy parameters

Energy parameters

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: MON>ENP

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

Mon- [Display]
EnP- [Energy parameters]
This menu presents the output mechanical energy data.
NE4 [Motor Consumption] 0...999 TWh –

Motor energy consumption (TWh).

This parameter can be accessed if [Motor Consumption] ME4 is not set to 0.
NE3 [Motor Consumption] 0...999 GWh –

Motor energy consumption (GWh).

NE2 [Motor Consumption] 0...999 MWh –

Motor energy consumption (MWh).

NE1 [Motor Consumption] 0...999 KWh –

Motor energyconsumption (KWh).

NE0 [Motor Consumption] 0...999 Wh –

Motor energy consumption (Wh).

SP51105 01/2025 45
Display MOn-

Section 4.5
[Communication map]

[Communication map]

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: MON>CMM

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

Mon- [Display]
CNN- [Communication map]
CNdC [Command Channel]
Command channel.
Settings Code/Value Description
[Terminals] tEr Terminal block source
Factory Setting
[HMI] LCC Command via Plain Text Display Terminal
[Ref. Freq-Modbus] Mdb Command via Modbus
[Ref. Freq-Com. nEt Command via fieldbus module if a fieldbus module
Module] has been inserted

CMd [Cmd Register]

Command register.
[Control Mode] CHCF is not set to [I/O profile] io
Possible values in CiA402 profile, separate, or not separate mode:
Bit Description, Value
0 Set to 1: "Switch on"/Contactor command
1 Set to 0: "Disable voltage"/Authorization to supply AC power
2 Set to 0: "Quick stop"
3 Set to 1: "Enable operation"/Run command
4 to 6 Reserved (= 0)
7 "Fault reset" acknowledgment active on 0 to 1 rising edge
8 Set to 1: Halt stop according to the [Type Of Stop] Stt parameter
without leaving the operation enabled state
9 and 10 Reserved (= 0)
11 to 15 Can be assigned to commands

Possible values in the I/O profile. On state command [2-Wire Control] 2C:
Bit Description, Value
0 Forward (on state) command:
0: No forward command
1: Forward command
NOTE: The assignment of bit 0 cannot be modified. It corresponds to the
assignment of the terminals. It can be switched. Bit 0 Cd00 is only
active if the channel of this control word is active.
1 to 15 Can be assigned to commands

Possible values in the I/O profile. On edge command [3-Wire Control] 3C:
Bit Description, Value
0 Stop (run authorization):
0: Stop
1: Run is authorized on a forward or reverse command
1 Forward (on 0 to 1 rising edge) command
2 to 15 Can be assigned to commands
NOTE: The assignment of bits 0 and 1 cannot be modified. It corresponds to the assignment of the
terminals. It can be switched. Bits 0 Cd00 and 1 Cd01 are only active if the channel of this control word
is active.

46 SP51105 01/2025
 Display MOn-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: MON>CMM

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

Mon- [Display]
CNN- [Communication map]
rFCC [Ref Freq Channel]
Channel of reference frequency.
Identical to [Command Channel] CMdC page 48
FrH [Pre-Ramp Ref Freq] 0 Hz

Frequency reference before ramp (signed value).

This parameter is read-only. It enables to display the reference frequency applied to the
motor, regardless of which channel for reference value has been selected.
EtA [CIA402 Status Register]
CIA402 State Register.
Possible values in CiA402 profile, separate, or not separate mode:
Bit Description, Value
0 "Ready to switch on", awaiting power section line supply
1 "Switched on", ready
2 "Operation enabled", running
3 Operating detected error state:
0: Inactive
1: Active
4 "Voltage enabled", power section line supply present:
0: Power section line supply unavailable
1: Power section line supply present
NOTE: When the drive is powered by the power section only, this bit is
always at 1.
5 Quick stop
6 "Switched on disabled", power section line supply locked
7 Warning:
0: No warning
1: Warning
8 Reserved (= 0)
9 Remote: command or reference via the network
0: Command or reference via the Plain Text Display Terminal
1: Command or reference via the network
10 Targets reference reached:
0: The reference is not reached
1: The reference has been reached
NOTE: When the drive is in speed mode, this is the speed reference.
11 "Internal limit active", reference outside limits:
0: The reference is within the limits
1: The reference is not within the limits
NOTE: When the drive is in speed mode, the limits are defined by the
[Low speed] LSP and [High speed] HSP parameters.
12 Reserved
13 Reserved
14 "Stop key", STOP via stop key:
0: STOP key not pressed
1: Stop triggered by the STOP key on the Plain Text Display Terminal
15 "Direction", direction of rotation:
0: Forward rotation at output
1: Reverse rotation at output
NOTE: The combination of bits 0, 1, 2, 4, 5 and 6 defines the state in the DSP 402 state chart (see the
communication manuals).

SP51105 01/2025 47
Display MOn-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: MON>CMM

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

Mon- [Display]
CNN- [Communication map]
Possible values in the I/O profile:
Bit Description, Value

0 Reserved (= 0 or 1)

1 Ready:
0: Not ready
1: Ready
2 Running:
0: The drive does not start if a reference other than zero is applied
1: Running, if a reference other than zero is applied, the drive can start
3 Operating detected error state:
0: Inactive
1: Active
4 Power section line supply present:
0: Power section line supply unavailable
1: Power section line supply present
5 Reserved (= 1)

6 Reserved (= 0 or 1)

7 Warning
0: No warning
1: Warning
8 Reserved (= 0)

9 Command via a network:

0: Command via the terminals or the Plain Text Display Terminal
1: Command via a network
10 Reference reached:
0: The reference is not reached
1: The reference has been reached
11 Reference outside limits:
0: The reference is within the limits
1: The reference is not within the limits
NOTE: When the drive is in speed mode, the limits are defined by LSP
and HSP parameters.
12 Reserved (= 0)

13 Reserved (= 0)

14 Stop via STOP key:

0: STOP key not pressed
1: Stop triggered by the STOP key on the Plain Text Display Terminal
15 Direction of rotation:
0: Forward rotation at output
1: Reverse rotation at output
NOTE: he combination of bits 0, 1, 2, 4, 5 and 6 defines the state in the DSP 402 state chart (see the
communication manuals).

48 SP51105 01/2025
 Display MOn-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: MON>CMM>MND

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

Mon- [Display]
CNN- [Communication map]
Mnd- [Modbus network diag]
Used for the Modbus serial communication port at the bottom of the control block. Refer to the
Modbus serial embedded communication manual for a complete description.
Mdb1 [COM LED]
View of the Modbus communication LED.
M1Ct [Mdb Frame Nb] 0...65,535 Read only

Modbus network frames counter: number of processed frames.

M1EC [Mdb CRC errors] 0...65,535 Read only

Modbus network CRC error countered: number of CRC errors

SP51105 01/2025 49
Display MOn-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: MON>CMM>ISA

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

Mon- [Display]
CMM- [Communication map]
iSA- [Com. scanner input map]
Used for CANopen® and Modbus networks..
nM1 [Com Scan In1 val.] 0...65,535 Read only

Com scan input 1 value. Value of the first input word.

nM2 [Com Scan In2 val.]
Com scan input 2 value. Value of the second input word.
Identical to [Com Scan In1 val.] nM1 page 50
nM3 [Com Scan In3 val.]
Com scan input 3 value. Value of the third input word.
Identical to [Com Scan In1 val.] nM1 page 50
nM4 [Com Scan In4 val.]
Com scan input 4 value. Value of the fourth input word.
Identical to [Com Scan In1 val.] nM1 page 50
nM5 [Com Scan In5 val.]
Com scan input 5 value. Value of the fifth input word.
Identical to [Com Scan In1 val.] nM1 page 50
nM6 [Com Scan In6 val.]
Com scan input 6 value. Value of the sixth input word.
Identical to [Com Scan In1 val.] nM1 page 50
nM7 [Com Scan In7 val.]
Com scan input 7 value. Value of the seventh input word.
Identical to [Com Scan In1 val.] nM1 page 50
nM8 [Com Scan In8 val.]
Com scan input 8 value. Value of the eighth input word.
Identical to [Com Scan In1 val.] nM1 page 50

50 SP51105 01/2025
 Display MOn-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: MON>CMM>OSA

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

Mon- [Display]
CMM- [Communication map]
oSA- [Com scan output map]
Used for CANopen® and Modbus networks.
nC1 [Com Scan Out1 val.] 0...65,535 Read only

 Com scan input 1 value. Value of the first input word.

nC2 [Com Scan Out2 val.]
 Com scan input 2 value. Value of the second input word.
Identical to [Com Scan Out1 val.] nC1 page 51
nC3 [Com Scan Out3 val.]
 Com scan input 3 value. Value of the third input word.
Identical to [Com Scan Out1 val.] nC1 page 51
nC4 [Com Scan Out4 val.]
 Com scan input 4 value. Value of the fourth input word.
Identical to [Com Scan Out1 val.] nC1 page 51
nC5 [Com Scan Out5 val.]
 Com scan input 5 value. Value of the fifth input word.
Identical to [Com Scan Out1 val.] nC1 page 51
nC6 [Com Scan Out6 val.]
 Com scan input 6 value. Value of the sixth input word.
Identical to [Com Scan Out1 val.] nC1 page 51
nC7 [Com Scan Out7 val.]
 Com scan input 7 value. Value of the seventh input word.
Identical to [Com Scan Out1 val.] nC1 page 51
nC8 [Com Scan Out8 val.]
 Com scan input 8 value. Value of the eighth input word.
Identical to [Com Scan Out1 val.] nC1 page 51

SP51105 01/2025 51
Display MOn-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: MON>CMM>MDH

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

Mon- [Display]
CMM- [Communication map]
MdH- [Modbus HMI Diag]
Used for the Modbus serial communication port at the front of the control block
(used by the Plain Text Display Terminal)
Mdb2 [COM LED]
View of the Modbus HMI communication LED.
M2Ct [Mdb Net frames] 0...65,535 Read only

 Terminal Modbus 2: number of processed frames.

M2EC [Mdb Net CRC errors] 0...65,535 Read only

 Terminal Modbus 2: number of CRC errors.

CWi- [Command word image]

Command word image.
CMd1 [Modbus Cmd]
 Command word image built with Modbus port source.
Identical to [Cmd Register] CMd page 45
CMd3 [COM. Module Cmd.]
 Command word image built with fieldbus module source.
Identical to [Cmd Register] CMd page 45
rWi- [Freq. ref. word map]
Frequency reference image.
LFr1 [Modbus Ref Freq.] -32,767...32,767 Hz 0.0 Hz

 Frequency reference image built with Modbus port source (LFR_MDB).

LFr3 [Com Module Ref Freq.] -32,767...32,767 Hz 0.0 Hz

 Frequency reference image built with fieldbus module source (LFR_COM).

52 SP51105 01/2025
 Display MOn-

Section 4.6
[Application parameters]

[Application parameters]

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: MON>APR>MPP

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

Mon- [Display]
APr- [Application parameters]
NPP- [Variable Speed Pump]
MPAn [Available Pumps] 0...65,535 –

Number of available pumps.

This parameter can be accessed if [Pump System Archit] MPSA is set to a value different
from [No] no.
MPSn [Nb of Staged Pumps] 0...65,535 –

Number of staged pumps.

This parameter can be accessed if [Pump System Archit] MPSA is set to a value different
from [No] no.
pLid [Lead Pump]
Lead pump.
Settings Code/Value Description

[None] nonE None

[Pump 1] p01 Pump number 1

[Pump 2] p02 Pump number 2

[Pump 3] p03 Pump number 3

[Pump 4] p04 Pump number 4

[Pump 5] p05 Pump number 5

[Pump 6] p06 Pump number 6

PntS [Next Staged Pump]

Next pump to stage.
Identical to [Lead Pump] pLid page 53
Pntd [Next Destaged Pump]
Next pump to destage.
Identical to [Lead Pump] pLid page 53
plS [Pump 1 State]
Pump 1 state.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] MPPn or [Nb of Devices] MPGn is set
to 1 or higher.
Settings Code/Value Description

[None] nonE Not configured

[Not Available] nAui Unavailable

[Ready] rdY Ready

[Running] run Running

SP51105 01/2025 53
Display MOn-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: MON>APR>MPP

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

Mon- [Display]
APr- [Application parameters]
MPP- [Variable Speed Pump]
p1t [Pump 1 Type]
Pump 1 type.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] Mppn or [Nb of Devices] MPGn is set
to 1 or higher.
Settings Code/Value Description
[Undefined] nonE Undefined
[Lead] LEAd Lead pump
[Lead or Auxiliary] LAF Lead or auxiliary fixed speed pump
[Lead or Aux Variable] LAV Lead or auxiliary variable speed pump
[Auxiliary] AuxF Auxiliary fixed speed pump
[Auxiliary Variable] AuxV Auxiliary variable speed pump
[Error] Err Error

P1ot [Pump 1 Runtime] 0...4,294,967,295 s –

Pump 1 running time.

g This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] Mppn or [Nb of Devices] MPGn is set
to 1 or higher.
P1nS [Pump 1 Nb Starts] 0...4,294,967,295 s –

Pump 1 number of starts.

g This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] Mppn or [Nb of Devices] MPGn is set
to 1 or higher.
p2S [Pump 2 State]
Pump state.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] MPPn or [Nb of Devices] MPGn is set
to 2 or higher.
Identical to [Pump 1 State] p1S page 53
p2t [Pump 2 Type]
Pump 2 type.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] MPPn or [Nb of Devices] MPGn is set
to 2 or higher.
Identical to [Pump 1 Type] p1t page 54
P2ot [Pump 2 Runtime]
Pump 2 running time.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] Mppn or [Nb of Devices] MPGn is set
to 2 or higher.
Identical to [Pump 1 Runtime] P1ot page 54
P2nS [Pump 2 Nb Starts]
Pump 2 number of starts.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] Mppn or [Nb of Devices] MPGn is set
to 2 or higher.
Identical to [Pump 1 Nb Starts] P1nS page 54
p3S [Pump 3 State]
Pump 3 state.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] MPPn or [Nb of Devices] MPGn is set
to 3 or higher.
Identical to [Pump 1 State] p1S page 53

54 SP51105 01/2025
 Display MOn-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: MON>APR>MPP

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

Mon- [Display]
APr- [Application parameters]
MPP- [Variable Speed Pump]
p3t [Pump 3 Type]
Pump 3 type.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] MPPn or [Nb of Devices] MPGn is set
to 3 or higher.
Identical to [Pump 1 Type] p1t page 54
P3ot [Pump 3 Runtime]
Pump 3 running time.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] Mppn or [Nb of Devices] MPGn is set
to 3 or higher.
Identical to [Pump 1 Runtime] P1ot page 54
P3nS [Pump 3 Nb Starts]
Pump 3 number of starts.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] Mppn or [Nb of Devices] MPGn is set
to 3 or higher.
Identical to [Pump 1 Nb Starts] P1nS page 54
p4S [Pump 4 State]
Pump 4 state.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] MPPn or [Nb of Devices] MPGn is set
to 4 or higher.
Identical to [Pump 1 State] p1S page 54
p4t [Pump 4 Type]
Pump 4 type.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] MPPn or [Nb of Devices] MPGn is set
to 4 or higher.
Identical to [Pump 1 Type] p1t page 54
P4ot [Pump 4 Runtime]
Pump 4 running time.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] Mppn or [Nb of Devices] MPGn is set
to 4 or higher.
Identical to [Pump 1 Runtime] P1ot page 54
P4nS [Pump 4 Nb Starts]
Pump 4 number of starts.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] Mppn or [Nb of Devices] MPGn is set
to 4 or higher.
Identical to [Pump 1 Nb Starts] P1nS page 54
p5S [Pump 5 State]
Pump 5 state.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] MPPn or [Nb of Devices] MPGn is set
to 5 or higher.
Identical to [Pump 1 State] p1S page 54
p5t [Pump 5 Type]
Pump 5 type.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] MPPn or [Nb of Devices] MPGn is set
to 5 or higher.
Identical to [Pump 1 Type] p1t page 53
P5ot [Pump 5 Runtime]
Pump 5 running time.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] Mppn or [Nb of Devices] MPGn is set
to 5 or higher.
Identical to [Pump 1 Runtime] P1ot page 54

SP51105 01/2025 55
Display MOn-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: MON>APR>MPP

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

Mon- [Display]
APr- [Application parameters]
MPP- [Variable Speed Pump]
P5nS [Pump 5 Nb Starts]
Pump 5 number of starts.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] Mppn or [Nb of Devices] MPGn is set
to 5 or higher.
Identical to [Pump 1 Nb Starts] P1nS page 54
p6S [Pump 6 State]
Pump 6 state.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] MPPn or [Nb of Devices] MPGn is set
to 6 or higher.
Identical to [Pump 1 State] p1S page 53
p6t [Pump 6 Type]
Pump 6 type.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] MPPn or [Nb of Devices] MPGn is set
to 6 or higher.
Identical to [Pump 1 Type] p1t page 53
P6ot [Pump 6 Runtime]
Pump 6 running time.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] Mppn or [Nb of Devices] MPGn is set
to 6 or higher.
Identical to [Pump 1 Runtime] P1ot page 54
P6nS [Pump 6 Nb Starts]
Pump 6 number of starts.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] Mppn or [Nb of Devices] MPGn is set
to 6 or higher.
Identical to [Pump 1 Nb Starts] P1nS page 54

56 SP51105 01/2025
 Display MOn-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: MON>APR>BCP

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

Mon- [Display]
APr- [Application parameters]
bCP- [Booster Control Pump]
bCS [Booster Status]
Booster status.
Settings Code/Value Description
[None] nonE Not configured
[Inactive] nAct Inactive
[Running] run Running
[Stage Pending] StGp Stage pending
[Destage Pending] dStGp Destage pending
[Staging] StG Staging
[Destaging] dStG Destage in progress

SP51105 01/2025 57
Display MOn-

58 SP51105 01/2025
 Easy xD Series xD2000
Diagnostics dIA-
EAV64387 12/2019

Chapter 5
[Diagnostics] diA-

[Diagnostics] diA-

What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains the following sections:
Section Topic Page
5.1 [Diag. data] 60
5.2 [Error history] pFH- Menu 61
5.3 [Warnings] ALr- Menu 63

Introduction

[Diagnostics] diA- menu presents drive and application data useful when diagnostics is required.

SP51105 01/2025 59
Diagnostics dIA-

Section 5.1
[Diag. data]

[Diag. data]

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: DIA>DDT

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

diA- [Diagnostics]
ddt- [Diag. data]
This menu presents the last warning and detected error in addition to drive data.
LALr [Last Warning]
Last warning which occurred.
The list of warning codes is available in the chapter "Warning Codes" page 264.
LFt [Last Error]
Last error which occurred.
The list of error codes is available in the chapter "Error Codes" page 265
nSM [Nb Of Starts] 0...4,294,967,295 –

Number of motor starts (resettable).

rtHH [Motor Run Time] 0.0...429,496,729.5 h –

Motor run time.

Run elapsed time display (resettable) in 0.1 hours (length of time the motor has been
switched on).
SSt- [Other State]
This menu shows the list of present secondary states.
The possible secondary states are the followings:
[Anti-Jam pending] AMP
[Sleep Active] SLM
[Sleep Boost active] SLPb
[Sleep Check Active] ASLC
[Set 1 active] CFP1
[Set 2 active] CFP2
[Set 3 active] CFP3
[Set 4 active] CFP4
[Automatic restart] Auto
[DC charged] dbL
[Fast stop Active] FSt
[Fallback Frequency] FrF
[Speed Maintained] rLS
[Type of stop] Stt
[Ref Freq Warning] SrA
[DC Bus Ripple Warn] dCrW
[Run Forward] MFrd
[Run Reverse] MrrS
[Autotuning] tun

oid [Identification]
This is a read-only menu that cannot be configured. It enables the following information to
be displayed:
• Drive reference, power rating, and voltage
• Drive software version
• Drive serial number
• Type of option modules present, with their software version
• Plain Text Display Terminal type and version

60 SP51105 01/2025
 Diagnostics dIA-

Section 5.2
[Error history] pFH- Menu

[Error history] pFH- Menu

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: DIA>PFH

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

diA- [Diagnostics]
PFH- [Error history]
This menu shows the 8 last detected errors ([Last Error 1] dP1 to [Last Error 8] dP8).
[Last Error 1] dP1 is the last stored error.
Pressing OK key on the selected error code in the Error history list displays the drive data
recorded when the error has been detected.
NOTE: Same content for [Last Error 1] dP1 to [Last Error 8] dP8.
dP1- [Last Error 1]
Last error 1.
Identical to [Last Error] LFt page 60
HSI [Drive State]
HMI status
Settings Code/Value Description

[Autotuning] tun Autotuning

[In DC inject.] dCb Injection braking

[Ready] rdY Drive ready

[Freewheel] nSt Freewheel stop

[Device Running] run Motor in steady state or run command present

and zero reference
[Accelerating] ACC Accelerating

[Decelerating] dEC Decelerating

[Current lim.] CLi Current limit

[Fast stop] FSt Fast stop

[Motor fluxing] FLu Fluxing function is activated

[no mains V.] nLP Control is powered on but the DC bus is not loaded

[control.stop] CtL Controlled stop

EP1 [Last Error 1 Status]

Status of last error 1.
DRIVECOM status register (same as [CIA402 Status Register] EtA).
iP1 [ETI state word]
ETI state word.
ETI status register (see the communication parameter file).
CMP1 [Cmd word]
Cmd word.
Command register (same as [Cmd Register] CMd).
LCP1 [Motor current] 0...2*In (1) _

Motor current (same as [Motor Current] LCr).

(1) Corresponding to the rated drive current indicated in the installation manual and on the
drive nameplate.

SP51105 01/2025 61
Diagnostics dIA-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: DIA>PFH

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

diA- [Diagnostics]
PFH- [Error history]
dP1- [Last Error 1]
rFP1 [Output frequency] -3,276.7...3,276.7 Hz _

Output frequency (same as [Motor Frequency] rFr).

rtPI [Run Elapsed time] 0...65,535 h _

Elapsed Time
uLP1 [DC bus voltage] 0...921 Vdc _

DC bus voltage (same as [DC bus voltage] VbuS).

[No meas.] uLnunK is displayed if no value is measured.
tHP1 [Motor therm state] 0...200% _

Motor thermal state (same as [Motor Therm state] tHr).

dCCI [Command Channel] 0...65,535 h _

Command channel (same as [Command channel] CMdC).

Settings Code/Value Description

[Terminals] tEr Terminal block

[HMI] LCC Plain Text Display Terminal

[Ref. Freq-Modbus] Mdb Modbus serial

[Ref. Freq-Com. Module] nEt Fieldbus module

drCI [Ref Freq Channel]

Channel for reference frequency (same as [Ref Freq Channel] rFCC).
Identical to [Command channel] dCC1 page 62
otPI [Motor Torque] -300...300% _

Estimated motor torque value (same as [Motor Torque] otr).

NOTE: The displayed value is always positive in motor mode and negative in generator
mode whatever the direction.
tdPI [Drive Thermal State] 0...200% _

Measured drive thermal state (same as [Drive Therm State] tHd).

tJPI [IGBT Junction Temp] 0...255°C _

Estimated junction temperature value.

SFPI [Switching Frequency] 2...12 kHz _

Switching frequency applied (related to [Switching Frequency] SFr).

dP2- to [Last Error 2 to Last Error 8]
dP8-
Last error 2... Last error 8
Identical to [Last Error1] dP1 page 61

62 SP51105 01/2025
 Diagnostics dIA-

Section 5.3
[Warnings] ALr- Menu

[Warnings] ALr- Menu

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: DIA>ALR

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

diA- [Diagnostics]
ALr- [Warnings]
ALrd [Actual warnings]
List of current warnings.
If a warning is active, and appears on the Plain Text Display Terminal.
The list of warning codes is available in the chapter "Diagnostics and Troubleshooting"
page 264.
ALH [Warning History]
This menu presents the warning history (30 past warnings) Identical to [Last warning]
LALr.

SP51105 01/2025 63
Diagnostics dIA-

64 SP51105 01/2025
 Easy xD Series xD2000
Complete settings CSt-
EAV64387 12/2019

Chapter 6
[Complete settings] CSt-

[Complete settings] CSt-

What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains the following sections:
Section Topic Page
6.1 [Motor parameters] MPA- Menu 66
6.2 [Input/Output] io- Menu 81
6.3 [Command and Reference] CrP- Menu 103
6.4 [Generic functions] - [Ramp] 114
6.5 [Generic functions] - [+/- speed] 117
6.6 [Generic functions] - [Stop configuration] 120
6.7 [Generic functions] - [Auto DC injection] 124
6.8 [Generic functions] - [Jog] 126
6.9 [Generic functions] - [Preset speeds] 128
6.10 [Generic functions] - [Jump frequency] 130
6.11 [Generic functions] - [Define system units] SuC- Menu 131
6.12 [Generic functions] - [PID controller] 135
6.13 [Generic functions] - [Sleep/wakeup] SPW- Menu 151
6.14 [Generic functions] - [Threshold reached] 171
6.15 [Generic functions] - [Mains contactor command] 172
6.16 [Generic functions] - [Parameters switching] 174
6.17 [Generic functions] - [Stop after speed timeout] 177
6.18 [Generic functions] - [Advanced sleep check] AdS- Menu 179
6.19 [Generic functions] - [Booster control] 182
6.20 [Generic monitoring] 193
6.21 [Error/Warning handling] 198
6.22 [Maintenance] 223

Introduction

[Complete settings] CSt- menu presents all the settings related to drive functions for:
• Motor and drive configuration
• Application functions
• Monitoring functions

SP51105 01/2025 65
Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.1
[Motor parameters] MPA- Menu

[Motor parameters] MPA- Menu

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>MPA

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
MPA- [Motor parameters]

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
• Fully read and understand the manual of the connected motor.
• Verify that all motor parameters are correctly set by referring to the nameplate and the manual
of the connected motor.
• If you modify the value of one or more motor parameters after having performed autotuning,
the value of the measured tune parameters is reset and you must re-perform autotuning.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
This menu contains motor-related data such as, but not limited to, motor nameplate
parameters, motor tuning parameters and motor control parameters.
bFr [Motor Standard]
Motor standard.
g This parameter modifies the presets of the following parameters:
• [High Speed] HSP
• [Motor Freq Thd] Ftd
• [Nom Motor Voltage] unS
• [Nominal Motor Freq] FrS
• [Max Frequency] tFr
NOTE: Modifying this parameter resets the motor tune parameters.
Autotuning will need to be performed again.
Settings Code/Value Description
[50 Hz] 50 50Hz motor frequency — IEC
Factory setting
[60 Hz] 60 0Hz motor frequency — NEMA

nPr [Nominal motor Power] According to drive rating According to drive rating

Nominal motor power (given on the motor nameplate).

g NOTE: Modifying this parameter resets the motor tune parameters.
Autotuning will need to be performed again.
Setting range in kW if [Motor Standard] bFr is set to [50Hz] 50, in HP if [Motor Standard]
bFr is set to [60Hz] 60.
unS [Nom Motor Voltage] 100...690 Vac according to drive rating
(step: 1 Vac) and [Motor Standard] bFr

g Nominal motor voltage (given on the nameplate).

NOTE: Modifying this parameter resets the motor tune parameters.
Autotuning will need to be performed again.
nCr [Nom Motor Current] 0.25...1.5 In (1) according to drive rating
(2)
(step: 0.01 A ) and [Motor Standard] bFr

g Rated motor current given on the nameplate.

NOTE: Modifying this parameter resets the motor tune parameters.
Autotuning will need to be performed again.
(1) Corresponding to the rated drive current indicated in the installation manual and on the
drive nameplate.
(2): For drives with power range = 15 kW. If the power range is between 18 and 160 kW
(limits included), the step is 0.1 A.

66 SP51105 01/2025
 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>MPA

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
MPA- [Motor parameters]
FrS [Nominal Motor Freq] 40.0...500.0 Hz The factory setting is 50
(step: 0.1 Hz) Hz, or preset to 60 Hz if
[MotoStandard] bFr is
g set to [60 Hz] 60.

Nominal motor frequency (given on the motor nameplate)

NOTE: Modifying this parameter resets the motor tune parameters.
Autotuning will need to be performed again.
nSP [Nominal Motor Speed] 0...65,535 rpm according to drive rating
(step: 1 rpm) and [Motor Standard]

g bFr
Nominal motor speed (related to the motor nameplate data).
NOTE: Modifying this parameter resets the motor tune parameters.
Autotuning will need to be performed again.
If the nameplate indicates the synchronous speed and the slip in Hz or as a %, use one of
the formulas to calculate the rated speed:

• Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x

• Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x (60 Hz motors)

• Nominal speed = Synchronous speed x (50 Hz motors).

tFr [Max Frequency] 10.0...500.0 Hz(1) 60 Hz, or preset to 72 Hz

(step: 0.1 Hz) if [Motor Standard] bFr
is set to [60 Hz] 60.

Maximum output frequency.

To help prevent [Motor Overspeed] SoF error, it is recommended to have [Max Frequency]
tFr equal to or higher than 110% of [High Speed] HSP.
(1) The maximum of the range is 10 * [Nominal Motor Freq] FrS.
itH [Motor Th Current] 0.2...1.1 In(1) According to drive rating

Motor thermal monitoring current to be set to the rated current indicated on the nameplate.
 (1) Corresponding to the rated drive current indicated in the installation manual and on the
drive nameplate.
PHr [Output Ph Rotation]
Output phase rotation.
Modifying this parameter operates as an inversion of 2 of the 3 motor phases. This results
in changing the direction of rotation of the motor.
Settings Code/Value Description
[ABC] AbC Standard rotation
Factory setting
[ACB] ACb Opposite rotation

SPGu [Inertia Factor] 1...1,000% 40%

Inertia factor
This parameter can be accessed if:
• [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr, and
• [Motor Control Type] Ctt is set to:
• [U/F VC 5pts] uFS, or
• [U/F VC Quad.] uFq, or
• [SYN_U VC] SYnu.
Motor thermal monitoring current to be set to the rated current indicated on the nameplate

SP51105 01/2025 67
Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>MPA

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

MPA- [Motor parameters]
Ctt [Motor Control Type]
Motor control type.
Set this parameter according to the application. The selection must be done before
entering motor parameter values.
NOTE: Modifying this parameter resets the motor tune parameters. Autotuning will need to
be performed again.
Settings Code/Value Description

[U/F VC Standard] Std U/F VC Standard motor control type. For applications
that require torque at low speed. Simple motor
control type keeping a constant Voltage Frequency
ratio, with a possible adjustment of the curve bottom.
This motor control type is used for motors connected
in parallel.

Factory setting

NOTE: U0 is the result of an internal calculation

based on motor parameters and multiplied by
[IR compensation] uFr (%).

U0 can be adjusted by modifying [IR compensation]

uFr value.

68 SP51105 01/2025
 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>MPA

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

MPA- [Motor parameters]

Settings Code/Value Description

[U/F VC 5pts] uFS 5U/F VC 5 point voltage/frequency: As [U/F VC Standard]

Std profile but also supports the avoidance of
resonance (saturation).

The profile is defined by the values of parameters unS,

FrS, u1 to u5 and F1 to F5.
FrS > F5 > F4 > F3 > F2 > F1

NOTE: U0 is the result of an internal calculation based

on motor parameters and multiplied by [IR
compensation] uFr (%).

U0 can be adjusted by modifying [IR compensation]

uFr value.
[U/F VC Quad.] uFq U/F VC Quadratic: Motor control type dedicated to
variable torque applications, typically used for pumps
and fans.
[U/F VC Energy Sav.] ECo Specific motor control type optimized for energy saving.

[SYN_U VC] SYnu Open-loop synchronous motor: Motor control type spe-
cific for permanent magnet synchronous motors. This
motor control type is used for variable torque applica-
tions.

PFL [U/F Profile] 0...100 % (step: 1 %) 30%

U/F profile.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Motor Control Type] Ctt is set to [U/F VC Quad.]
uFq.
This parameter is used to adjust the fluxing current level at zero speed, in % of nominal
motor current at nominal speed.

SP51105 01/2025 69
Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>MPA

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

MPA- [Motor parameters]
NCrS [Sync Nominal I] 0.25...1.5 In (1) according to the drive
(2)) rating.
(step: 0.01 A
g This parameter can only be accessed if [Motor control type] Ctt is set to [SYN_ U VC]
SYnu.
NOTE: Modifying this parameter resets the motor tune parameters and, [Tune selection]
Stun is reset to [Default] tAb. Autotuning need to be performed again.
(1): Corresponding to the rated drive current indicated in the installation manual and on
the drive nameplate.
(2): For drives with power range ≤15 kW. If the power range is between 18 and 160 kW
(limits included), the step is 0.1 A else it is 1 A.
NSPS [Nom SyncMotor Speed] 0...48,000 rpm according to the drive
(step: 1 rpm) rating.

g This parameter can only be accessed if [Motor control type] Ctt is set to [SYN_ U VC]
SYnu.
NOTE: Modifying this parameter resets the motor tune parameters and, [Tune selection]
Stun is reset to [Default] tAb. Autotuning need to be performed again.
tqS [Nom Motor torque] 0.1...6,553.5 Nm according to the drive
rating.

g This parameter can only be accessed if [Motor control type] Ctt is set to [SYN_ U VC]
SYnu.
NOTE: Modifying this parameter resets the motor tune parameters and, [Tune selection]
Stun is reset to [Default] tAb. Autotuning need to be performed again.
The value is according to drive ratings and [Torque Scaling] inrt setting.
ppnS [Pole pairs] 1...240 (step: 1) according to the drive
rating.

g This parameter is used to calculated [Sync Nominal Freq] FrSS.

This parameter can only be accessed if [Motor control type] Ctt is set to [SYN_ U VC]
SYnu.
NOTE: Modifying this parameter resets the motor tune parameters and, [Tune selection]
Stun is reset to [Default] tAb. Autotuning need to be performed again.
ASt [Angle setting type]
This function is used to align the rotor or to compute the angle of the rotor flux linked to
permanent magnets to reduce torque jolt at start-up.
This parameter can only be accessed if [Motor control type] Ctt is set to [SYN_ U VC]
SYnu.

value Code/Value Description

[PSI align.] PSi Pulse signal injection. Standard alignment mode,
without rotor motion.
The angle measurement is realized by monitoring
the stator current response to a pulse signal
injection over a wide range of frequencies.
[PSIO align.] PSio Pulse signal injection - optimized. Optimized
alignment mode,without rotor motion.
Same operation as [PSI align.] PSi is performed
over an optimized range of frequencies
The measurement time is reduced after the first run
order ortune operation, even if the drive has been
turned off.
Factory setting

70 SP51105 01/2025
 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>MPA

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

MPA- [Motor parameters]

value Code/Value Description

[Rotational Current rCi Rotational current injection. Alignment mode with
Injection] rotor motion.
This alignment mode realizes the mechanical
alignment of the rotor and the stator; it requires up to
4 s.
The motor needs to be stopped and without resistive
torque.
NOTE: This setting is recommended when a sinus
filter is used on the application.
NOTE: For synchronous reluctance motor, it is
recommended to use this setting.
[No align.] no No alignment

PHS [Syn. EMF constant] 0...6,553.5 mV/rpm 0 mV/rpm.

(step: 0.1mV/rpm)

g PHS adjustment allows you to reduce the current in operation without load (or with
minimum of load). To optimize the synchronous motor settings, follow the steps.
This parameter can only be accessed if [Motor control type] Ctt is set to [SYN_ U VC]
SYnu.
rSAS [SyncMotor Stator R] 0...65,535 mOhm 0 mOhm
(step: 1mOhm) (1)
g The factory setting is replaced by an estimation resulting from a standstill motor tune
(autotuning) if it has been performed. Only enter manually a value if you are copying a drive
configuration that has been tuned via autotuning.
This parameter can only be accessed if [Motor control type] Ctt is set to [SYN_ U VC]
SYnu and if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr.
(1): For drives with power range . 15 kW. If the power range is between 18 and 75 kW (limits
included), the range is 0.0...6,553.5 mOhm (step: 0.1 mOhm). If the power range is between
90 and 500 kW (limits included), the range is 0.00...655.35 mOhm (step: 0.01 mOhm) else
the range is 0.000...65.535 mOhm (step: 0.001 mOhm).
LdS [Autotune L d-axis] 0.00...655.35 mH 0.00 mH.
(step: 0.01mH) (1)
g The factory setting is replaced by an estimation resulting from a standstill motor tune
(autotuning) if it has been performed. Only enter manually a value if you are copying a drive
configuration that has been tuned via autotuning.
NOTE: On motors with smooth poles, [Autotune L d-axis] LdS = [Autotune L q-axis] LqS
= Stator inductance L.
This parameter can only be accessed if [Motor control type] Ctt is set to [SYN_ U VC]
SYnu and if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr.
(1): For drives with power range ≤ 15 kW. If the power range is greater than 160 kW, the
range is 0.0…6,553.5 µH (step: 0.1 µH) else the range is 0.00…65,535 µH (step: 1 µH).

SP51105 01/2025 71
Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>MPA

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

MPA- [Motor parameters]
LqS [Autotune L q-axis] 0.00...655.35 mH 0.00 mH
(step: 0.01mH) (1)

The factory setting is replaced by an estimation resulting from a standstill motor tune
(autotuning) if it has been performed. Only enter manually a value if you are copying a drive
configuration that has been tuned via autotuning.

NOTE: On motors with smooth poles, [Autotune L d-axis] LdS = [Autotune L q-axis] LqS
= Stator inductance L.
This parameter can only be accessed if [Motor control type] Ctt is set to [SYN_ U VC]
SYnu and if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr.
(1): For drives with power range ≤ 15 kW. If the power range is greater than 160 kW, the
range is 0.0…6,553.5 µH (step: 0.1 µH) else the range is 0.00…65,535 µH (step: 1 µH).
FrSS [Sync Nominal Freq] 10.0...500.0 Hz NSPS x PPNS / 60
(step: 0.1 Hz) (the value is automatically
g updated and cannot be
modified)

This parameter can only be accessed if [Motor control type] Ctt is set to [SYN_ U VC]
SYnu and if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr.

NOTE: Modifying this parameter resets the motor tune parameters and, [Tune selection]
Stun is reset to [Default] tAb. Autotuning need to be performed again.
MCr [PSI Align Curr Max] 1...300% [Auto] Auto
(step: 1 %)

g Current level in % of [Sync Nominal I] nCrS for [PSI align.] PSi and [PSIO align.] PSio
angle shift measurement modes. This parameter has an impact on the inductor
measurement.
This current must be equal to or higher than the maximum current level of the application;
otherwise an instability may occur.
[PSI Align Curr Max] MCr is adapted by the drive according to the motor data settings.

NOTE: In case of instability, [PSI Align Curr Max] MCr should be increased by steps up to
obtain the requested performances.

rdAE [Relative d-axis error] -3276.7....3276.7% Read-only parameter.

(step: 0.1 %)

g This parameter is used to perform adjustments on [Syn. EMF constant] PHS for
synchronous motors and [Magnetizing Current] idA for asynchronous motors :
This parameter should be close to 0 %. If [Relative d-axis error] rdAE is:
• Lower than 0%:
• [Syn. EMF constant] PHS may be increased for synchronous motors.
• [Magnetizing Current] idA may be reduced for asynchronous motors.
• Greater than 0%:
• [Syn. EMF constant] PHS may be reduced for synchronous motors.
• [Magnetizing Current] idA may be increased for asynchronous motors.
For asynchronous motors, the value [Relative d-axis error] rdAE may change according
to the motor operating point. A value of [Relative d-axis error] rdAE between -10% and
10% ensures good motor performance.

72 SP51105 01/2025
 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>MPA

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

MPA- [Motor parameters]
SMot [Saliency mot. state]
g Read-only parameter (internally calculated).
This parameter helps the optimization of motor control performances for synchronous
motors.
value Code/Value Description
[No info.] no Tune not done
[Low salient] LLS Low saliency level.
Recommended configuration: [Angle setting
type] ASt = [PSIalign.] PSi or [PSIO align.]
PSio and [HF inj. activation] HFi= [No] no.
[Med salient] MLS Medium saliency level.
Recommended configuration: [Angle setting
type] ASt = [SPM align.] SPMA.
Additionally, [HF inj. activation] HFi = [Yes]
YES can be used. First, tests without high
frequency injection must be performed. If the
results meet the requirements,
[High salient] HLS High saliency level.
Recommended configuration: [Angle setting
type] ASt = [IPM align.]iPMA.
Additionally, [HF inj. activation] HFi = [Yes]
YES can be used. First, tests without high
frequency injection must be performed. If the
results meet the requirements, [HF inj.
activation] HFi must be let to [No] no.

Stun [Tune selection]

g Read-only parameter.
Value Code/Value Description

[Default] tAb The default motor parameter values are used to

control the motor. Return to default value if a motor
parameter is modified after autotuning has been
performed.
Factory setting
[Measure] MEAS The values measured by the autotuning function
are used to control the motor. This parameter
switches automatically to this value after an
autotuning is successfully performed.
[Custom] CuS The values manually set are used to control the
motor

rCL [Rotational Current Level] 10...300% (step: 1 %) 75%

g This parameter can be accessed if [Angle setting type] ASt is set to [Rotational Current
Injection] rCi.
The current level should be set according to the torque required during the alignment
operation.
The value is displayed as percentage of the nominal motor current
rtC [Rotational Torque Current] 0...[Rotational Current 0%
Level] rCL (step: 1 %)
g
The value is displayed as a percentage of the nominal motor current

SP51105 01/2025 73
Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>MPA

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

MPA- [Motor parameters]
rCSp [RCI Max Freq] 0.0...500.0 Hz [Auto] Auto
(step: 0.1 Hz)
g

rCrP [RCI Round Nb] 0...32,767 [Auto] Auto

(step: 1)
g
rCir [RCI With Transformer]
g
Value Code / Value Description
[No] no Function inactive
Factory setting
[Yes] YES Function active

u1 [U1] to [U5] 0...800 Vac 0 Vac

to (step: 1 Vac)
u5 V/F profile setting.
Voltage point 1 on 5 points V/F to Voltage point 5 on 5 points V/F.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Motor Control Type] Ctt is set to [V/F 5pts] uF5.

F1 [F1] to [F5] 0.0...500.0 Hz 0.0 Hz

to (step: 0.1 Hz)
F5 V/F profile setting.
Frequency point 1 on 5 points V/F to Frequency point 5 on 5 points V/F.
This parameter can be accessed if [Motor Control Type] Ctt is set to [V/F 5pts] uF5.
g

74 SP51105 01/2025
 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>MPA

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

MPA- [Motor parameters]
uFr [IR compensation] 0 to 200% 100%

This parameter is used to optimize torque at low speed, or to adapt to special cases (for
 example: for motors connected in parallel, decrease [IR compensation] uFr). If there is
insufficient torque at low speed, increase [IR compensation] uFr. A too high value can
avoid the motor to start (locking) or change the current limiting mode.
SLP [Slip compensation] 0 to 300% 100%

Slip compensation.
g This parameter is set to 0% when [Motor Control Type] Ctt is set to [U/F VC Quad.] uFq.
The speeds given on motor nameplates are not necessarily exact.
 If the slip setting is lower than the actual slip, the motor is not rotating at the correct speed
in steady state, but at a lower speed than the reference.
If the slip setting is higher than the actual slip, the motor is overcompensated and the
speed is unstable.
SFr [Switching frequency] 2 to 12 kHz according to 4.0 kHz or 2.5 kHz
drive rating according to the drive
rating
 Drive switching frequency.

NOTICE
DAMAGE TO THE DRIVE
Verify that the switching frequency of the drive does not exceed 4 kHz if the EMC filter is
disconnected for operation of the drive in an IT mains.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
Adjustment range: The maximum value is limited to 4 kHz if [Motor surge limit.] SVL
parameter is configured.
NOTE: In the event of excessive temperature rise, the drive automatically reduces the
switching frequency and reset it once the temperature returns to normal.
In case of high-speed motor, it is advised to increase the PWM frequency [Switching
frequency] SFr at 8, 12 kHz.
SFt [Switch Freq Type]
Switching frequency type.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert]EPr.
The motor switching frequency is modified (reduced) when the internal temperature of the
 drive is too high.
Settings Code/Value Description
[SFR type 1] HF1 Heating optimization
Allows the system to adapt the switching frequency
according to the motor frequency. This setting
optimizes the heating loss of the drive in order to
improve the drive efficiency.
Factory setting
[SFR type 2] HF2 Allows the system to keep a constant chosen
switching frequency [Switching frequency] SFr
whatever the motor frequency [Motor
Frequency]rFr.
With this setting, the motor noise is kept as low as
possible for a high switching frequency.
In the event of overheating, the drive automatically
decreases the switching frequency.
It is restored to its original value when the
temperature returns to normal.

SP51105 01/2025 75
Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>MPA

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

MPA- [Motor parameters]
nrd [Noise Reduction]
Motor noise reduction.
Random frequency modulation helps to prevent any resonance, which may occur at a fixed
frequency.
Settings Code/Value Description
[No] no Fixed PWM frequency
Factory setting
[Yes] YES PWM Frequency with random modulation

SVL [Motor Surge Limit.]

Surge voltage limitation.
This function limits motor over voltages and is useful in the following applications:
• NEMA motors
• Old or poor quality motors
• Spindle motors
• Rewound motors
This parameter can remain set to [No] no for 230/400 Vac motors used at 230 Vac, or if
the length of cable between the drive and the motor does not exceed:
• 4 m with unshielded cables
• 10 m with shielded cables
NOTE: When [Motor Surge Limit.] SVL is set to [Yes] YES, the maximum switching
frequency [Switching frequency]SFr is modified.
Settings Code/Value Description
[No] no Function inactive
Factory setting
[Yes] YES Function active

SoP [Attenuation Time]

Attenuation time.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Motor Surge Limit.] SVL is set to [Yes] YES.
The value of the [Attenuation Time] SoP parameter corresponds to the attenuation time
of the cable used. It has been defined to prevent the superimposition of voltage wave
reflections resulting from long cable lengths. It limits over voltages to twice the DC bus
rated voltage.
As surge voltage depends on many parameters such as types of cable, different motor
powers in parallel, different cable lengths in parallel, etc., we recommend using an
oscilloscope to check the over voltage values obtained at the motor terminals.
For long cable lengths, an output of the filter or a dV/dt filter must be used.
To retain the overall drive performance, do not increase the [Attenuation Time]SoP value
unnecessarily.
Settings Code/Value Description
[6] 6 6 µs
[8] 8 8 µs
Factory setting
[10] 10 10 µs

76 SP51105 01/2025
 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>MPA

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
MPA- [Motor parameters]
CLi [Current Limitation] 0 to 1.1 In(1) 1.1 In(1)

Internal current limit.

g
NOTICE
OVERHEATING
• Verify that the motor is properly rated for the maximum current to be applied to the motor.
• Consider the duty cycle of the motor and all factors of your application including derating
requirements in determining the current limit.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
NOTE: If the setting is less than 0.25*In, the drive may lock in Output Phase Loss (oPF1
or oPF2) if this has been enabled. If it is less than the noload motor current, the motor
cannot run.
(1) The maximum and factory setting value change to 1.5 In if [Dual Rating] drt is set to
[Heavy Duty] HiGH.
tun [Autotuning]

WARNING
UNEXPECTED MOVEMENT
Autotuning moves the motor in order to tune the control loops.
• Only start the system if there are no persons or obstructions in the zone of operation.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
During autotuning, noise development and oscillations of the system are normal.

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
• If you modify the value of one or more motor parameters after having performed
autotuning, the value of the measured tune parameters is reset and you must re-perform
autotuning.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
In any case, the motor has to be stopped before performing a tune operation. Verify that the
application does not make the motor turn during the tune operation.
The tune operation optimizes:
• The motor performances at low speed.
• The estimation of the motor torque.
• The accuracy of the estimation of the process values in sensorless operation and
monitoring.
Autotuning is only performed if no stop command has been activated. If a “freewheel stop”
or “fast stop” function has been assigned to a digital input, this input must be set to 1
(active at 0).
Autotuning takes priority over any run or prefluxing commands, which will be taken into
account after the autotuning sequence.
If autotuning has detected error, this parameter automatically switches back to [No action]
no and, the error response depends on the configuration of [Tuning Error Resp] tnL.
Autotuning may last for several seconds. Do not interrupt the process. Wait for the Plain
Text Display Terminal to change to [No action] no.
NOTE: The motor thermal state has a significant influence on the tuning result. Always
perform a motor tuning with the motor stopped and cold. Verify that the application does
not have the motor operate during a tuning operation.
To redo a motor tuning, wait that it is stopped and cold. Set first [Autotuning] tUn to
[Erase Autotuning] CLr, then redo the motor tuning.
The use of the motor tuning without doing a [Erase Autotuning] CLr first is used to get the
thermal state estimation of the motor.
The cable length has an influence on the tune result. If the wiring is modified, it is necessary
to redo the tune operation.

SP51105 01/2025 77
Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>MPA

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
MPA- [Motor parameters]

Settings Code/Value Description

[No action] no Autotuning not in progress
Factory setting
[Apply Autotuning] YES Autotuning is performed immediately if possible, then the
parameter automatically changes to [No action] no. If the drive
state does not allow the tune operation immediately, the parameter
changes to [No] no and the operation must be done again.
NOTE: The motor parameters must be set before performing
autotuning
[Erase Autotuning] CLr The motor parameters measured by the autotuning function are
reset. The default motor parameter values are used to control the
motor. [Autotuning Status] tuS is set to [Not done] tAB.

tuS [Autotuning Status]

Autotuning status.
 Read-only parameter. This parameter is not saved at drive power-off. It shows the autotuning
status since the last power-on.
Settings Code/Value Description
[Not done] tAb The autotuning is not done
Factory setting
[Pending] PEnd The autotuning has been requested but not yet performed
[In Progress] ProG The autotuning is in progress
[Error] FAiL The autotuning has detected an error
[Autotuning Done] donE The motor parameters measured by the autotuning function are
used to control the motor

drt [Dual rating]

Dual rating state.
Select the Normal Duty / Heavy Duty depending on the overload required on the application.
NOTE: Modifying this parameter resets the motor tune parameters.
Autotuning will need to be performed again
Settings Code/Value Description
[Normal Duty] norMAL Normal rating, drive currentclimitation is 1.1 x In
Factory setting
[Heavy Duty] HiGH High rating, drive current limitation is 1.5 x In

boA [Boost Activation]

Boost activation.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr.
Settings Code/Value Description
[Inactive] no No boost
[Dynamic] dYnA Dynamic boost, the magnetizing current value is modified
according to the motor load.
Factory setting
NOTE: Drive manages itself the value [Magnetizing Current] idA
to optimize the performances.
[Static] StAt Static boost, the magnetizing current value follows the profile
whatever the motor load
NOTE: With this selection the [Boost] boo and [Freq Boost] FAb
are taken into account.
NOTE: This selection can be used for conical motor with [Boost]
boo sets to a negative value.

78 SP51105 01/2025
 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>MPA

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
MPA- [Motor parameters]
boo [Boost] -100...100 % 0%
(step: 1 %)

g Value at 0 Hz: % of nominal magnetizing current (taken into account if different from 0).
A too high value of [Boost] boo can result in a magnetic saturation of the motor, which
leads to a torque reduction.
This parameter can be accessed if:
• [Boost Activation] boA is set to a value different from [Inactive] no, and
• [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr.

If [Boost Activation] boA is set to [Dynamic] dYnA, [Boost] boo is set to 25%.

FAb [Freq Boost] 0.0...500.0 Hz 30.0 Hz

s(step: 0.1 Hz)

g Value at 0 Hz: speed threshold to reach nominal magnetizing current.

This parameter can be accessed if:
• [Boost Activation] boA is set to a value different from [Inactive] no, and
• [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr.

SP51105 01/2025 79
Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>MPA>DCR

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
MPA- [Motor Parameters]
dCr- [Input Filter]
This function monitors the ripple on the DC bus by detecting instabilities. It is not used to
detect input phase loss.
On the DC bus, if the oscillation frequencies are inconsistent with those observed on the
mains supply, and if the amplitude is inconsistent with the drive capability (such as the DC
bus capacitors), the drive triggers [DC Bus Ripple Warn] dCrW warning.
Depending on the setting of [DC Bus Ripple Config] dCrC, if [DC Bus Ripple Warn] dCrW
warning is persistent during an amount of time set by an internal fixed value, [DC Bus
Ripple Error] dCrE error is triggered.

iFi [Input Filter]

Use of an input filter.
This parameter is forced to [No] no if:
• [Motor Control Type] Ctt is set to a value different from [U/F VC Standard] Std and
[U/F VC 5pts] uF5, or
• [Motor Control Type] Ctt is set to [U/F VC 5pts] uF5, and
• [U1] u1 or … or [U5] u5 is configured, or
• [F1] F1 or … or [F5] F5 is configured.
Settings Code/Value Description
[No] no No input filter used
Factory setting
[Yes] YES Motor control performance is adjusted to consider
the use of an input filter in order to help to prevent
ripple on the DC bus

dCrC [DC Bus Ripple Config]

Configuration of the DC bus ripple monitoring.
This parameter is preset to [Error] FLt, if [Input Filter] iFi is set to [Yes] YES.
Settings Code/Value Description
[Ignore ] no DC bus ripple monitoring function is inactive.
This selection can't be accessed if [Input Filter]
iFi is set to [Yes] YES.
Factory setting
[Warning] WArn DC bus ripple monitoring function is enabled.
In case of DC bus ripple, the drive triggers [DC Bus
Ripple Warn] dCrW warning.
[Error] FLt The DC bus ripple monitoring function is fully
enabled. The drive triggers [DC Bus Ripple Error]
dCrE error if [DC Bus Ripple Warn] dCrW
warning is persistent.

80 SP51105 01/2025
 Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.2
[Input/Output] io- Menu

[Input/Output] io- Menu

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>IO

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
io- [Input/Output]
tCC [2/3-Wire Control]
2-wire or 3-wire control.

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
If this parameter is changed, the parameters [Reverse Assign] rrS and [2-wire type] tCt and the
assignments of the digital inputs are reset to the factory setting.
REQUIRES CLEANUP
Verify that this change is compatible with the type of wiring used.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Settings Code/Value Description

[2-Wire Control] 2C 2-wire control (level commands): This is the input state
(0 or 1) or edge (0 to 1 or 1 to 0), which controls running
or stopping. Example of source wiring:
xD2000

DI1 Forward
DIx Reverse
Factory setting
[3-Wire Control] 3C 3-wire control (pulse commands) [3 wire]: A forward or
reverse pulse is sufficient to command starting, a stop
pulse is sufficient to command stopping. Example of
source wiring:
xD2000

DI1 Stop
DI2 Forward
DIx Reverse

tCt [2-wire Type]

Type of 2-wire control.
g This parameter can be accessed if [2/3-Wire Control] tCC is set to [2-Wire Control] 2C.

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Verify that this change is compatible with the type of wiring used.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Settings Code/Value Description

[Level] LEL State 0 or 1 is taken into account for run (1) or stop (0)
[Transition] trn A change of state (transition or edge) is necessary to
initiate operation in order to avoid accidental restarts
after a break in the supply mains
Factory setting
[Level With Fwd Priority] PFo State 0 or 1 is taken into account for run or stop, but the
“forward” input takes priority over the “reverse” input

SP51105 01/2025 81
Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>IO

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
io- [Input/Output]
rr5 [Reverse Assign]
Reverse assignment.
Settings Code/Value Description
[Not Assigned] no Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI6] Li1...Li6 Digital input DI1...DI6
[DI11]...[DI16] Li11...Li16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O
extension module has been inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile]
io configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 in [I/O profile]
io configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with
integrated Modbus Serial in [I/O profile] io
configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with
integrated Modbus Serial in [I/O profile] io
configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a
fieldbus module in [I/O profile] io configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a
fieldbus module in [I/O profile] io configuration

82 SP51105 01/2025
 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>IO>Li1C>Li6C

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
io- [Input/Output]
Li1C to [DI1 Assignment] to [DI6 Assignment]
Li6C
L1L to [DI1 Low Assignment] to [DI6 Low Assignment]
L6L
DI1 to DI6 Low Assignment.
Read-only parameter, cannot be configured. It displays all the functions associated with
digital input DI1 in order to verify, for example, for compatibility problems.
If no functions have been assigned, [No] no is displayed.
LIH to [DI1 High Assignment] to [DI6 High Assignment]
L6H
DI1to DI6 high Assignment.
Read-only parameter, cannot be configured. It displays all the functions associated with
digital input DI1 in order to verify, for example, for compatibility problems.
If no functions have been assigned, [No] no is displayed.
The digital input DI1 is assigned to:
• [Forward] Frd in 2-wire control.
• [Drive Running]run in 3-wire control.
[Drive Running] run and [Forward] Frd settings cannot be modified manually.
NOTE: In IO profile, the assignment of [Drive Running] run (respectively [Forward] Frd)
switches to [CD00] Cd00 in 2-wire control (respectively 3-wire control).
The digital input DI2 is assigned to [Forward] Frd in 3-wire control. [Forward] Frd
setting cannot be modified manually.
NOTE: In IO profile, the assignment of [Forward] Frd switches to [CD01] Cd01 in 3-wire
control.
LId to [DI1 Delay to DI6 Delay] 0...200 ms 5 ms
L6d
DI1 to DI6 delay.
NOTE: Commands received via this digital input are processed once the delay time set via
this parameter has elapsed.

SP51105 01/2025 83
Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>IO

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
io_ [Input/Output]
bSP [Ref Freq Template]
Low speed management (template).
 This parameter defines how the speed reference is taken into account, for analog inputs
and pulse input only. In the case of the PID controller, this is the PID output reference.
The limits are set by the [Low speed] LSP and [High speed] HSP parameters.
Settings Code/Value Description
[Standard] bSd

F Frequency
R Reference

At reference = 0, the frequency = [Low speed] LSP

Factory setting
[Pedestal] bLS

F Frequency
R Reference

At reference = 0 to [Low speed] LSP, the frequency

= [Low speed] LSP

84 SP51105 01/2025
 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>IO

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

io- [Input/Output]

Settings Code/Value Settings

[Deadband] bn5

F Frequency
R Reference

At reference = 0 to LSP the frequency = 0

[Deadband at 0%] bn50

F Frequency
R Reference

This operation is the same as [Standard] bSd, except

that in the following cases at zero reference, the
frequency = 0: The signal is less than [Min nvalue],
which is greater than 0 (example: 1 V on a 2–10 V
input) The signal is greater than [Min nvalue], which is
greater than [Max value] (example: 11 V on a 10–0 V
input).
If the input range is configured as “bidirectional”,
operation remains identical to [Standard] bSd.

SP51105 01/2025 85
Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>IO>AI1

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
io- [Input/Output]
Ai1- [AI1 configuration]
The input can be delinearized by configuring an intermediate point on the input/output
curve of this input:

R Reference
C / VI Current or Voltage Input
1 [Y Interm. point]
2 [Min value] (0%)
3 [X Interm. point]
4 [Max value] (100%)
NOTE: For [X Interm. point], 0% corresponds to [Min value] and 100% to [Max value].
Ai1A [AI1 Assignment]
Analog input AI1 functions assignment.
Read-only parameter, cannot be configured. It displays all the functions associated with
input AI1 in order to verify, for example, for compatibility problems.
If no functions have been assigned, [No] no is displayed.
Ai1t [AI1 Type]
Configuration of analog input AI1.
Settings Code/Value Settings
[Voltage] 10u 0-10 Vdc
Factory setting
[Current] 0A 0-20 mA

uiL1 [AI1 Min. value] 0.0...10.0 Vdc 0.0 Vdc

g AI1 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Type] Ai1t is set to [Voltage] 10u.
uiH1 [AI1 Max. value] 0.0...10.0 Vdc 10.0 Vdc
g AI1 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Type] Ai1t is set to [Voltage] 10u.
CrL1 [AI1 Min. value] 0.0...20.0 mA 0.0 mA
g AI1 current scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Type] Ai1t is set to [Current] 0u.
CrH1 [AI1 Max. value] 0.0...20.0 mA 20.0 mA
g AI1 current scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Type] Ai1t is set to [Current] 0A.
Ai1F [AI1 filter] 0.00...10.00 s 0.00 s

 AI1 cutoff time of the low filter.

This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Type] Ai1t is set to [Current] 0A.

86 SP51105 01/2025
 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>IO>AI1

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

io- [Input/Output]
Ai1 [AI1 configuration]
Ai1E [AI1 Interm. point X] 0...100% 0%

Input delinearization point coordinate. Percentage of the physical input signal.

 0% corresponds to [AI1 min value] (uiLI)
100% corresponds to [AI1 max value] (uiHI)
Ai15 [AI1 Interm. point Y] 0...100% 0%

Input delinearization point coordinate (frequency reference).

 Percentage of the internal frequency reference corresponding to the [AI1 Interm. point X]
(Ai1E) percentage of physical input signal.

SP51105 01/2025 87
Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>IO>AI2

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
io- [Input/Output]
Ai2- [AI2 configuration]
Ai2A [AI2 Assignment]
AI2 functions assignment.
Identical to [AI1 Assignment] Ai1A page 86
Ai2t [AI2 Type]
Configuration of analog input AI2.
Settings Code/Value Settings
[Voltage] 10u 0-10 Vdc
[Current] 0A 0-20 mA
Factory setting
[KTY] KtY 1 KTY84
This selection can be accessed if [AIx Th Monitoring]
tHxS is not set to [No] no
[PT1000] 1Pt3 1 PT1000 connected with 2 wires
This selection can be accessed if [AIx Th Monitoring]
tHxS is not set to [No] no
[PT100] 1Pt2 1 PT100 connected with 2 wires
This selection can be accessed if [AIx Th Monitoring]
tHxS is not set to [No] no
[3PT1000] 3Pt3 3 PT1000 connected with 2 wires
This selection can be accessed if [AIx Th Monitoring]
tHxS is not set to [No] no
[3PT100] 3Pt2 3 PT100 connected with 2 wires
This selection can be accessed if [AIx Th Monitoring]
tHxS is not set to [No] no

uiL2 [AI2 min value]

g AI2 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Type] Ai2t is set to [Voltage] 10u.
Identical to [AI1 min value] uiL1 page 86.
uiH2 [AI2 max. value]
AI2 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
g This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Type] Ai2t is set to [Voltage] 10u.
Identical to [AI1 max. value] uiH1 page 86.
CrL2 [AI2 min. value]
g AI2 current scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Type] Ai2t is set to [Voltage] 0A.
Identical to [AI1 min value] CrL1 page 86.
CrH2 [AI2 max. value]
g AI2 current scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Type] Ai2t is set to [Voltage] 0A.
Identical to [AI1 max value] CrH1 page 86.
Ai2F [AI2 Filter]
AI2 filter.
Identical to [AI1 filter] Ai1F page 86.
Ai2E [AI2 Interm. point X]
AI2 delinearization input level..
Identical to [AI1 Interm. point X] Ai1E page 87
Ai2S [AI2 Interm. point Y]
AI2 delinearization output level..
Identical to [AI1 Interm. point Y] Ai1S page 87

88 SP51105 01/2025
 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>IO>AI3

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
io- [Input/Output]
Ai3- [AI3 configuration]
Ai3A [AI3 Assignment]
AI3 functions assignment.
Identical to [AI1 Assignment] Ai1A page 86
Ai3t [AI3 Type]
Configuration of analog input AI3.
Identical to [AI2 Type] Ai2t
uiL3 [AI3 min. value]
g AI3 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Type] Ai3t is set to [Voltage] 10u.
Identical to [AI1 min value] uiL1 page 86.
uiH3 [AI3 max. value]
AI3 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
g This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Type] Ai3t is set to [Voltage] 10u.
Identical to [AI1 max. value] uiH1 page 86.
CrL3 [AI3 min. value]
g AI3 current scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Type] Ai3t is set to [Voltage] 0A.
Identical to [AI1 min value] CrL1 page 86
CrH3 [AI3 max. value]
g AI3 current scaling parameter of 100%.
This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Type] Ai3t is set to [Voltage] 0A.
Identical to [AI1 max value] CrH1 page 86.
Ai3F [AI3 Filter]
AI3 cutoff time of the low filter.
Identical to [AI1 filter] Ai1F page 86.
Ai3E [AI3 Interm. point X]
AI3 delinearization input level..
Identical to [AI1 Interm. point X] Ai1E page 86
Ai3S [AI3 Interm. point Y]
AI3 delinearization output level..
Identical to [AI1 Interm. point Y] Ai1S page 86

SP51105 01/2025 89
Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CSt>IO>AI4

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
io- [Input/Output]
Ai4- [AI4 configuration]
Ai4A [AI4 Assignment]
g AI4 functions assignment.
This parameter can be accessed if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O extension module has been inserted.
Identical to [AI1 Assignment] Ai1A page 86
Ai4t [AI4 Type]
g Configuration of analog input AI4.
This parameter can be accessed if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O extension module has been inserted.
Settings Code/Value Settings
[Voltage] 10u 0-10 Vdc
[Current] 0A 0-20 mA
Factory setting
[Voltage +/-] n10u -10/+10 Vdc

uiL4 [AI4 min. value]

g AI4 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
Identical to [AI1 min value] uiL1 page 86.
uiH4 [AI4 max. value]
AI4 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
g Identical to [AI1 max. value] uiH1 page 86.
CrL4 [AI4 min. value]
g AI4 current scaling parameter of 0%.
Identical to [AI1 min value] CrL1 page 86
CrH4 [AI4 max. value]
g AI4 current scaling parameter of 100%.
Identical to [AI1 max value] CrH1 page 86.
Ai4F [AI4 Filter]
g AI4 cutoff time of the low filter.
This parameter can be accessed if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O extension module has been inserted.
Identical to [AI1 filter] Ai1F page 86.
Ai4E [AI4 Interm. point X]
g AI4 delinearization input level.
This parameter can be accessed if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O extension module has been inserted.
Identical to [AI1 Interm. point X] Ai1E page 86
Ai4S [AI4 Interm. point Y]
g AI4 delinearization output level.
This parameter can be accessed if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O extension module has been inserted.
Identical to [AI1 Interm. point Y] Ai1S page 86

90 SP51105 01/2025
 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>IO>AI5

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
io- [Input/Output]
Ai5- [AI5 configuration]
Ai5A [AI5 Assignment]
g AI5 functions assignment.
This parameter can be accessed if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O extension module has been inserted.
Identical to [AI1 Assignment] Ai1A page 86
Ai5t [AI5 Type]
g Configuration of analog input AI5.
This parameter can be accessed if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O extension module has been inserted.
Identical to [AI4 Type] Ai4t
uiL5 [AI5 min. value]
g AI5 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
Identical to [AI1 min value] uiL1 page 86.
uiH5 [AI5 max. value]
AI5 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
g Identical to [AI1 max. value] uiH1 page 86.
CrL5 [AI5 min. value]
g AI5 current scaling parameter of 0%.
Identical to [AI1 min value] CrL1 page 86
CrH5 [AI5 max. value]
g AI5 current scaling parameter of 100%.
Identical to [AI1 max value] CrH1 page 86.
Ai5F [AI5 Filter]
g AI5 cutoff time of the low filter.
This parameter can be accessed if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O extension module has been inserted.
Identical to [AI1 filter] Ai1F page 86.
Ai5E [AI5 Interm. point X]
g AI5 delinearization input level.
This parameter can be accessed if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O extension module has been inserted.
Identical to [AI1 Interm. point X] Ai1E page 87
Ai5S [AI5 Interm. point Y]
g AI5 delinearization output level.
This parameter can be accessed if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O extension module has been inserted.
Identical to [AI1 Interm. point Y] Ai1S page 87

SP51105 01/2025 91
Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>IO>AVI

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
io- [Input/Output]
AV1- [Virtual AI1]
AVIA [AIV1 Assignment]
Virtual analog input function assignment. Read-only parameter.
Settings Code/Value Settings
[No] no Not assigned
[PID Feedback] PiF PI controller feedback
[Inst Flow Assign] FS1A Select the source of installation flow sensor
[Pump Flow Assign] FS2A Select the source of pump flow sensor

92 SP51105 01/2025
 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>IO>DOXX

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
io- [Input/Output]
doXX- [DQxx Configuration]
These menus are used to configure the digital outputs of the drive:
• [DQ11 Configuration] do11- and [DQ12 Configuration] do12-: the digital output
DQ11 and DQ12 if the XDIO-EX1-V01 Extended I/O option moduleis inserted.
Use the touch wheel to scroll through the digital outputs. Click OK to access the
configuration of the digital output.
For a given digital output (DQxx), the configuration is composed by:
• [DQxx Assignment] doXX: the assignment of the digital output DQxx,
• [DQxx actv delay] dXXd: the delay time of the digital output DQxx. It represents the
delay before modifying the state of the output when the assigned event becomes true,
• [DQxx status]dXXS: the active level of the digital output DQxx. It defines the state 1 or
0 of the output to the “True” state of the assigned event.
• [DQxx hold delay] dXXH: the holding time of the digital output DQxx. It represents the
delay before modifying the state of the output when the assigned event becomes false.

doxx [DQxx Assignment]

[DQ11 Assignment] do11, [DQ12 Assignment] do12
g Digital output xx assignment.
It is used to assign an output to an event or a function.
Possible settings: Identical to [Rx Assignment] rx Menus, page 97.
dxxd [DQxx actv delay] 0...60,000 ms 0 ms
(step: 1 ms)
g DQxx activation delay time.
[DQ11 actv delay] d11d, [DQ12 actv delay]d12d
It represents the delay before modifying the state of the output when the assigned event
becomes true.
If the corresponding output is assigned to one of the following assignments, the delay is
forced to 0 ms and it cannot be modified:
• [Operating State “Fault”] FLt,
• [Mains Contactor] LLC,
• [Priming] PriM,
• [Jockey] JokY,
• [Pump 1 Cmd] MPo1...[Pump 6 Cmd] MPo6,
Setting range: 0...9,999 ms then 10.00...60.00 s on the Plain Text Display Terminal.

SP51105 01/2025 93
Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>IO>DOXX

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
io- [Input/Output]
doXX [DQxx Configuration]
dxx5 [DQxx status]
[DQ11 status] d11S, [DQ12 status] d12S
g DQxx status (output active level)
It defines the state 1 or 0 of the output to the “True” state of the assigned event.
If the output is assigned to one of the following assignments, the delay is forced to
[1] Pos:
• [Mains Contactor] LLC,
Settings Code/Value Description
[1] Po5 State 1 if the event is true.
Factory Setting
[0] nEG State 0 if the event is true.

dxxH [DQxx hold delay] 0...9,999 ms 0 ms

(step: 1 ms)
g [DQ11 hold delay] d11H, [DQ12 hold delay] d12H
DQxx holding delay time.
It represents the delay before modifying the state of the output when the assigned event
becomes false.
If the corresponding output is assigned to one of the following assignments, the delay is
forced to 0 ms and it cannot be modified:
• [Operating State “Fault”] FLt,
• [Mains Contactor] LLC,
• [Priming] PriM,
• [Jockey] JoKY,
• [Pump 1 Cmd] MPo1...[Pump 6 Cmd] MPo6,

94 SP51105 01/2025
 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>IO>RX

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
io- [Input/Output]
rx- [Rx Configuration]
This menu is used to configure the relays of the drive:
• [R1 configuration] r1– to [R3 configuration] r3–: the relays R1 to R3 embedded to the
drive.
• [R4 configuration] r4– to [R6 configuration] r6–: the relays R4 to R6 if the XDIO-EX2-
V01 relay output option module is inserted,
Use the touch wheel to scroll through the relays. Click OK to access the configuration of the
relay.
For a given relay (Rx), the configuration is composed by:
• [Rx Assignment] rx: the assignment of the relay Rx,
• [Rx Delay time] rxd: the delay time of the relay Rx. It represents the delay before
modifying the state of the relay when the assigned event becomes true,
• [Rx Active at] rxS: the active level of the relay Rx. It defines the state 1 or 0 of the relay to
the true state of the assigned event.
• [Rx Holding Time] rxH: the holding time of the relay Rx. It represents the delay before
modifying the state of the relay when the assigned event becomes false.

SP51105 01/2025 95
Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>IO>RX

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
io- [Input/Output]
rX- [Rx Configuration]
rx [Rx Assignment]
[R1 Assignment] r1, [R2 Assignment] r2, [R3 Assignment] r3, [R4 Assignment] r4,
[R5 Assignment] r5, [R6 Assignment] r6
Rx assignment.
It is used to assign the relay to an event or a function. The following table gives the possible
settings:
Settings Code/Value Description
[Not Assigned] no Not assigned
Factory setting(1)
[Warning Grp 1]... AG1... Warning group 1 to Warning group 5.
[Warning Grp 5] AG5
[AI1 4-20 Loss Warning]... AP1... 4-20 mA loss warning on AI
[AI5 4-20 Loss Warning] AP5
[Neg Torque] AtS Actual torque sign
[HMI L/R cmd] bMP Control via the Graphic Display Terminal is active. (only
active with Local/Remote button)
[set 1 active]... CFP1.. Parameter set 1, 2 or 3 is active.
[set 2active] CFP3
[Cnfg.0 act.] CnFo Configuration 0 is active
[Current Thd Reached] CtA Motor current threshold ([High Current Thd] Ctd)
reached
[Low Current Reached] CtAL Current low threshold ([Low I Threshold] CtdL) reached
[DC Bus Charged] dbL DC bus charged
[External Error EFA External error warning
Warning]
[Mot Freq High Thd 2] F2A Motor frequency threshold ([Freq. threshold 2] F2d)
reached
[Mot Freq Low Thd 2] F2AL Secondary frequency low threshold ([2 Freq.threshold]
F2dL) reached
[High Speed Reached] FLA High speed reached
[Operating State Fault] FLt Operating state fault
[Fallback speed] FrF Reaction on event / fallback speed
[Mot Freq High Thd] FtA Motor frequency threshold ([Motor Freq. threshold]
Ftd) reached
[Mot Freq Low Thd] FtAL Frequency low threshold ([Low Freq. threshold] FtdL)
reached
[Jockey] JoKY Jockey (2)
The output is automatically configured to this function by
setting the parameter [Jockey Selection] JP.
[Idle State] idLE Device in energy saving state
[Idle Rdy Or Run State] idrr Device in energy saving or ready or running state.
[Idle Or Rdy State] idrY Device in energy saving or ready state.
[Mains Contactor] LLC Mains contactor (2)
The output is automatically configured to this function by
setting the parameter [Mains Contactor] LLC.
[I present] MCP Motor current present
[Run Forward] MFrd Run forward
[Pump 1 Cmd]... MPo1.. Pump command
[Pump 6 Cmd] MPo6 The output is automatically configured to this function by
setting the parameter [Pump X Cmd Assign] MPoX.
[Run Reverse] MrrS Run reverse
[Process Overload Warning] oLA Overload warning

96 SP51105 01/2025
 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>IO>RX

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
io- [Input/Output]
rX- [Rx Configuration]
Settings Code/Value Description
[PID Error Warning] PEE PID error warning
[PID Feedback Warn] PFA PID feedback warning
[PID High Fdbck Warn] PFAH PID feedback high threshold (PAH) reached
[PID Low Fdbck Warn] PFAL PID feedback low threshold (PAL) reached
[Regulation Warning] piSH PID regulation unabled to reach the set point
[Priming] PriM Priming (2)
The output is automatically configured to this function
by setting the parameter [Priming Pump Assign] PPoA.
[Ready] rdY Ready to start
[Speed Maintained] rLS Reaction on event / maintain speed
[Ramp switching] rP2 Ramp switching state
[Ref Freq High Thd Reached] rtAH Frequency reference high threshold reached

[Ref Freq Low Thd Reached] rtAL Frequency reference low threshold reached
[Device Running] run Drive running
[Rdy Or Run State] rYrN Device in ready or running state.
[Modbus Com Inter.] SLF1 Modbus communication interruption warning
[Ref Freq Reached] SrA Frequency reference reached
[Per Type of Stop] Stt Reaction on event / stop on STT without an error
triggered after stop.
[Dev Thermal reached] tAd Drive thermal threshold reached
[Device Therm Warn] tHA Drive thermal state warning
[Therm Junction Warn] tJA Thermal junction warning
[AI1 Th Warning] to tp1A to Thermal warning on AI (3)
[AI5 Th Warning] p5A
[Temp Sens AI1 Warn] to tS1A to Temperature sensor AI warning (open circuit) (3)
[Temp Sens AI5 Warn] tS5A
[Motor Therm Thd Reached] tSA Motor thermal threshold ([Motor Therm Thd] ttd)
reached
[Process Undld Warning] uLA Underload warning
[Preventive UnderV Active] uPA Undervoltage prevention warning
[Undervoltage Warning] u5A Undervoltage warning
(1): The factory setting of R1, R2 and R3 depends on the macro configuration.
(2): This setting cannot be accessed with R1.
(3): Event on AI1 is not available on xD2000.

rxd [Rx Delay time] 0...60,000 ms (step: 1 ms) 0 ms

[R1 Delay time] r1d, [R2 Delay time] r2d, [R3 Delay time] r3d, [R4 Delay time] r4d,
[R5 Delay time] r5d, [R6 Delay time] r6d
Rx activation delay time.
It represents the delay before modifying the state of the relay when the assigned event becomes
true.
If the corresponding relay is assigned to one of the following assignments, the delay is forced to
0 ms and it cannot be modified:
• [Operating State “Fault”] FLt,
• [Mains Contactor] LLC,
• [Priming] PriM,
• [Jockey] JokY,
• [Pump 1 Cmd] MPo1...[Pump 6 Cmd] MPo6,

SP51105 01/2025 97
Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>IO>RX

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
io- [Input/Output]
rX- [Rx Configuration]
rxS [Rx Active at]
[R1 Active at] r1S, [R2 Active at] r2S, [R3 Active at] r3S, [R4 Active at] r4S,
[R5 Active at] r5S, [R6 Active at] r6S
Rx status (output active level).
It defines the state 1 or 0 of the relay to the true state of the assigned event.
If the relay R1...R6 is assigned to one of the following assignments, the delay is forced to [1]
Pos:
• [Mains Contactor] LLC,
Settings Code/Value Description
1 PoS State 1 when the information is true
Factory setting
0 nEG State 0 when the information is true

rxH [Rx Holding Time] 0...9,999 ms (step: 1 ms) 0 ms

[R1 Holding time] r1H, [R2 Holding time] r2H, [R3 Holding time] r3H,
[R4 Holding time] r4H, [R5 Holding time] r5H, [R6 Holding time] r6H
Rx holding delay time.
It represents the delay before modifying the state of the relay when the assigned event
becomes false.
If the corresponding relay is assigned to one of the following assignments, the delay is
forced to 0 ms and it cannot be modified:
• [Operating State “Fault”] FLt,
• [Mains Contactor] LLC,
• [Priming] PriM,
• [Jockey] JokY,
• [Pump 1 Cmd] MPo1...[Pump 6 Cmd] MPo6,

98 SP51105 01/2025
 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>IO>AQ1

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
io- [Input/Output]
Ao1- [AQ1 configuration]
Minimum and Maximum Output Values
The minimum output value, in volts, corresponds to the lower limit of the assigned
parameter and the maximum value corresponds to its upper limit. The minimum value may
be greater than the maximum value.

PA Parameter assigned
C / VO Current or voltage output
UL Upper limit
LL Lower limit
1 [AQx min output] AoLx or uoLx
2 [AQx max output] AoHx or uoHx

Scaling of the Assigned Parameter

The scale of the assigned parameter can be adapted in accordance with the requirements
by modifying the values of the lower and upper limits with two parameters for each analog
output ([Scaling AQx min] ASLx and [Scaling AQx max] ASHx).
These parameters are given in %. 100 % corresponds to the total variation range of the
configured parameter, so: 100% = upper limit - lower limit.
For example, [Sign. torque] Stq which varies between –3 and +3 times the rated torque,
100% corresponds to 6 times the rated torque.
• The [Scaling AQx min] ASLx parameter modifies the lower limit: new value = lower
limit + (range x ASLx). The value 0% (factory setting) does not modify the lower limit.
• The [Scaling AQx max] ASHx) parameter modifies the upper limit: new value = lower
limit + (range x ASLx). The value 100% (factory setting) does not modify the upper
limit.
• [Scaling AQx min] ASLx must always be lower than [Scaling AQx max] ASHx.

SP51105 01/2025 99
Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>IO>AQ1

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
io- [Input/Output]
Ao1- [AQ1 configuration]

UL Upper limit of the assigned parameter

LL Lower limit of the assigned parameter
NS New scale
1 [Scaling AQx max] ASHx
2 [Scaling AQx min] ASLx
Application Example
In an application, it is requested to read on the analog output AQ1 the value of the motor current.
The value must in current (0...20 mA) and the full range must correspond to 0 up to 2 x nominal
motor current (2 x In motor).
In this example, In motor corresponds to 0.8 x In drive.
Consequently, the analog output AQ1 must be configured as following:
• The Set [AQ1 Assignment] Ao1 to [Motor Current] oCr. By default, the total variation range
is 0 to 2 times the nominal drive current (2 x In drive).
• Set [AQ1 Type] Ao1t to [Current] 0A. Then, set [AQ1 min output] AoL1 and [AQ1 max
output] AoH1. By default, they are equal to 0.0 mA and 20.0 mA, that is corresponding to the
requirements.
• The requested minimum value is 0 A (0 x In motor = 0 x In drive): [Scaling AQ1 min] ASL1
does not need to be modified (its factory setting is 0 %).
• The requested total variation range is 2 x In motor (= 1.6 x In drive). By default, the full range for
[Motor Current] oCr is 2 x In drive. It means that the requested total variation range must be
reduced to 80 % (1.6/2 = 0.8). Consequently, [Scaling AQ1 max] ASH1 must be set to 80 %.
Ao1 [AQ1 Assignment]
AQ1 assignment.
Settings Code/Value Description
[Not Configured] no Not assigned
[Installation Flow] FS1V Installation flow value
[Motor Current] oCr Current in the motor, from 0 to 2 In (In = rated drive
current indicated in the Installation manual and on
the drive nameplate)
[Motor Frequency] oFr Output frequency, from 0 to [Max Frequency] tFr
Factory Setting (according to macro configuration)
[Sig. O/P Frq.] oFS Signed output frequency, between –[Max
Frequency] tFr and + [Max Frequency] TFR
[PID error] oPE PID controller detected error between –5% and +5%
of [Max PID feedback] PiF2 – [Min PID feedback]
PiF1
[PID feedbk] oPF PID controller feedback between [Min PID feedback]
PiF1 and [Max PID feedback] PiF2
[PID output] oPi PID controller output between [Low speed] LSP
and
[High speed] HSP

100 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>IO>AO2

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
io- [Input/Output]
Ao1- [AQ1 configuration]

Settings Code/Value Description

[Mot Mech oPr Motor power, between 0 and 2.5 times [Nominal
Power in %] Motor Power] NPr
[PID ref.] oPS PID controller reference between [Min PID reference]
PiP1 and [Max PID reference] PiP2
[Ramp out.] orP From 0 to [Max Frequency] tFr
[sign ramp] orS Signed ramp output, between –[Max Frequency]
tFr and +[Max Frequency] tFr
[Inlet Pressure Value] PS1V Inlet pressure value
[Outlet Pressure Value] PS2V Outlet pressure value
[Sign. Torque] Stq Signed motor torque, between –3 and +3 times the
rated motor torque. The + sign corresponds to the
motor mode and the – sign to the generator mode
(braking).
[Drv thermal] tHd Drive thermal state, from 0 to 200% of the rated
thermal state
[Mot thermal] tHr Motor thermal state, from 0 to 200% of the rated
thermal state
[Motor Torq.] trq Motor torque, from 0 to 3 times the rated motor torque
[Motor volt.] uoP Voltage applied to the motor, between 0 and
[Nom Motor Voltage] unS

Ao1t [AQ1 Type]

AQ1 type.
Select according to the requirements the type of output.
Settings Code/Value Description
[Voltage] 10u 0-10 Vdc
If necessary, adjust [AQ1 min Output] uoL1 and
[AQ1 max Output] AoH1.
[Current] 0A 0-20 mA
If necessary, adjust [AQ1 min Output] AoL1 and
[AQ1 max Output] AoH1.
Factory setting

AoL1 [AQ1 min output] 0.0...20.0 mA 4.0 mA (according to

g (step: 0.1 mA) macro configuration)
AQ1 min output value.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ1 Type] Ao1t is set to [Current] 0A.
AoH1 [AQ1 max output] 0.0...20.0 mA 20.0 mA
g (step: 0.1 mA)
AQ1 max output value.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ1 Type] Ao1t is set to [Current] 0A.
uoL1 [AQ1 min output] 0.0...10.0 Vdc 0.0 Vdc
g (step: 0.1 Vdc)
AQ1 minimum output.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ1 Type] Ao1t is set to [Voltage] 10u.
uoH1 [AQ1 max output] 0.0...10.0 Vdc 10.0 Vdc
g (step: 0.1 Vdc
AQ2 maximum output.
This parameter can be accessed if [AQ1 Type] Ao1t is set to [Voltage] 10u.

SP51105 01/2025 101

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>IO>AO2

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
io- [Input/Output]
Ao1- [AQ1 configuration]
ASL1 [Scaling AQ1 min] 0.0... [Scaling AQ1 max] 0.0%
ASH1 (step: 0.1 %)
Scaling AQ1 min.
Scaling of the lower limit of the assigned parameter, as a % of the maximum possible
variation.
ASH1 [Scaling AQ1 max] [Scaling AQ1 min] 100.0%
ASL1 ...100.0%
(step: 0.1 %)
Scaling AQ1 max.
Scaling of the lower limit of the assigned parameter, as a % of the maximum possible
variation.
Ao1F [AQ1 Filter] 0.00...10.00 s 0.00 s
(step: 0.01 s)
AQ1 filter.
Enable/disable the low pass-filter and configure its time constant.
If this parameter is set to 0.00 s, the filter is deactivated.
Ao2- [AQ2 configuration]
This menu is used to configure the analog output AQ2.
In this menu, the following parameters can be accessed:

• [AQ2 assignment] Ao2

• [AQ2 Type] Ao2t
• [AQ2 min output] AoL2
• [AQ2 max output] AoH2
• [AQ2 min Output] uoL2
• [AQ2 max Output] uoH2
• [Scaling AQ2 min] ASL2
• [Scaling AQ2 max] ASH2
• [AQ2 Filter] Ao2F

Refer to [AQ1 configuration] Ao1– for more information about analog output
configuration and the possible settings.

NOTE: The default configuration of the analog input AQ2 depends on the macro
configuration.

102 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.3
[Command and Reference] CrP- Menu

[Command and Reference] CrP- Menu

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CRP

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
Crp- [Command and Reference]
Command and Reference Channels Parameter Can Be Accessed
Run commands (forward, reverse, stop, and so on) and references can be sent using the
following channels:
Command Reference
Terminals: Digital inputs DI Terminals: Analog inputs AI, pulse input
Plain Text Display Terminal Plain Text Display Terminal
Integrated Modbus Integrated Modbus
Fieldbus module Fieldbus module
– +/– speed via the Plain Text Display Terminal

NOTE: The stop keys on the Plain Text Display Terminal can be programmed as non-priority
keys. A stop key can only have priority if the [Stop Key Enable] PSt parameter menu is set to
[Stop Key Priority ] YES.
The behavior of the drive can be adapted according to requirements:

• [Not separ.] SiM: Command and reference are sent via the same channel.
• [Separate] SEP: Command and reference may be sent via different channels.In these
configurations, control via the communication bus is performed in accordance with the
DRIVECOM standard with only 5 freely assignable bits (see communication parameter manual).
The application functions cannot be accessed via the communication interface.
• [I/O profile] io: The command and the reference can come from different channels. This
configuration both simplify and extends use via the communication interface. Commands may
be sent via the digital inputs on the terminals or via the communication bus. When commands
are sent via a bus, they are available on a word, which acts as virtual terminals containing only
digital inputs. Application functions can be assigned to the bits in this word. More than one
function can be assigned to the same bit.

NOTE: Stop commands from the Plain Text Display Terminal remain active even if the terminals
are not the active command channel.

SP51105 01/2025 103

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CRP

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CrP- [Command and Reference]
Reference Channel for [Not separ.] SiM, [Separate] SEP and [I/O profile] io Configurations, PID
Not Configured

FLoC

LFr
FrI

+/-

PiF

Fr2

FLo
rFC

(1) Note: Forced local is not active in [I/O].

The black square represents the factory setting assignment.

Fr1: terminals (including I/O extension module), Plain Text Display Terminal, integrated Modbus,
and fieldbus module.
Fr2: terminals (including I/O extension module), Plain Text Display Terminal, integrated Modbus,
+/– speed, and fieldbus module.

104 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CRP

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CrP- [Command and Reference]
Reference Channel for [Not separ.] SiM, [Separate] SEP and [I/O profile] io Configurations, PID
Configured with PID References at the Terminals

FLoC

LFr
FrI

Fr2

FLo
rFC

(1) Note: Forced local is not active in [I/O Profile].

(2) Ramps not active if the PID function is active in automatic mode.

The black square represents the factory setting assignment.

Fr1: terminals (including I/O extension module), Plain Text Display Terminal, integrated Modbus,
and fieldbus module.
Fr2: terminals (including I/O extension module), Plain Text Display Terminal, integrated Modbus,
+/– speed, and fieldbus module.

SP51105 01/2025 105

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CRP

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

CrP- [Command and Reference]
Command Channel for [Not separ.] SiM configuration

Reference and command, not separate.

The command channel is determined by the reference channel. The parameters Fr1, Fr2, rFC,
FLo and FLoC are common to reference and command.
Example: If the reference is Fr1 = Ai1 (analog input at the terminals), control is via DI (digital
input at the terminals).

FrI
FLoC

FLo

rFC

CHCF

PSt

Fr2

The black square represents the factory setting assignment.

106 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CRP

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

CrP- [Command and Reference]
Command Channel for [Separate] SEP configuration

Separated Reference and command.

The parameters FLo and FLoC are common to reference and command.
Example: If the reference is in forced local mode via AI1 (analog input at the terminals), command in
forced local mode is via DI (digital input at the terminals).
The command channels Cd1 and Cd2 are independent of the reference channels Fr1 and
Fr2.

cdI

FLoC

CCS
FLo

CHCF

PSt

cd2

The black square represents the factory setting assignment.except for [Control Mode]

CHCF
[Cmd channel 1] Cd1 and [Cmd channel 2] Cd2: Terminals, Plain Text Display Terminal, fieldbus
module

SP51105 01/2025 107

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CRP

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CrP- [Command and Reference]
Command Channel for I/O profile io configuration
Separated Reference and command, as in [Separate] SEp configuration.
The command channels [Cmd channel 1] Cd1 and [Cmd channel 2] Cd2 are independent of the
reference channels Fr1 and Fr2.

cdI

FLo
CCS

CHCF

PSt
cd2

The black square represents the factory setting assignment.except for [Control Mode] CHCF.

[Cmd channel 1] Cd1 and [Cmd channel 2] Cd2: Terminals, Plain Text Display Terminal, fieldbus
module
A command or an action can be assigned:
 To a fixed channel by selecting a Digital input (Dix) or a Cxxx bit:
 By selecting, for example, LI3, this action will be triggered by the digital input DI3 regardless of
which command channel is switched.
 By selecting, for example, C114, this action will be triggered by integrated Modbus with bit 14
regardless of which command channel is switched.
 To a switchable channel by selecting a CDxx bit:
 By selecting, for example, Cd11, this action will be triggered by: LI12 if the terminals channel is
active, C111 if the integrated Modbus channel is active, C311 if the communication card
channel is active.
If the active channel is the graphic display terminal, the functions and commands assigned to CDxx
switchable internal bits are inactive.
NOTE: Several CDxx does not have equivalent digital inputs and can only be used for switching
between 2 networks.
LSP [Low Speed] 0...500 Hz 0 Hz

 Motor frequency at low speed.

HSP [High Speed] 0...500 Hz 500 Hz

 Motor frequency at high speed.

To help prevent [Motor Overspeed] SoF error, it is recommended to have [Max Frequency]
tFr equal to or higher than 110% of [High Speed] HSP.

108 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CRP

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CrP- [Command and Reference]
Fr1 [Ref Freq 1 Config]
Configuration reference frequency 1.
Settings Code/Value Settings
[Not Configured] no Not assigned
[AI1] Ai1 Analog input AI1
Factory Setting
[AI2]...[AI3] Ai2...Ai3 Analog input AI2...AI3
[AI Virtual 1] Aiv1 Virtual analogic input 1
[AI4]...[AI5] Ai4...Ai5 Analog input AI4...AI5 if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O
extension module has been inserted
[HMI] LCC Reference Frequency via remote terminal
[Ref. Freq-Modbus] Mdb Reference frequency via Modbus
[Ref. Freq-Com. Module] nEt Reference frequency via fieldbus module if a
fieldbus module has been inserted
[DI5 PulseInput Assignment] ... Pi5...Pi6 Digital input DI5...DI6 used as pulse input
[DI6 PulseInput Assignment]

rin [Reverse Disable]

Reverse directions disable.
Lock of movement in reverse direction does not apply to direction requests sent by digital inputs.
Reverse direction requests sent by digital inputs are taken into account.
Reverse direction requests sent by the Plain Text Display Terminal or sent by the line are not taken
into account.
Any reverse speed reference originating from the PID, and so on, is interpreted as a zero reference
(0 Hz).
Settings Code/Value Settings
[No] no No
[Yes] YES Yes
Factory Setting

PSt [Stop Key Enable]

Stop key enable.
Setting this function to no disables the STOP key of the Plain Text Display Terminal if the setting
of the parameter [Command Channel] CMdC is not [HMI] LCC.

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
Only set this parameter to [Stop Key No Priority] no if you have implemented appropriate alternative
stop functions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
Irrespective of the configuration of [Stop Key Enable] PSt, if the active command channel is the
Plain Text Display Terminal, the STOP/RESET key performs:
• in run, a stop according to the [Type of stop] Stt,
• in “Operating State Fault", a fault reset command.
The following table gives the behavior of the function when the Plain Text Display Terminal is not
the active command channel:
Settings Code/Value Settings
[Stop Key No Priority] no Disables the STOP/RESET key on the Plain Text
Display Terminal.
[Stop Key Priority] YES Gives priority to the STOP key on the Plain Text
Display Terminal. Only the stop function is enabled.
The stop is performed in freewheel.
Factory Setting
[Stop Key Priority All] ALL Gives priority to the STOP/RESET key on the
Graphic Display Terminal.
The fault reset function and the stop function are
enabled. The stop is performed depending on
[Type of stop] Stt setting value.

SP51105 01/2025 109

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CRP

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
Crp- [Command and Reference]
CHCF [Control Mode]
Mixed mode configuration.

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Disabling [I/O profile]io resets the drive to the factory settings.
• Verify that restoring the factory settings is compatible with the type of wiring used.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.

Settings Code/Value Settings

[Not separ.] SiM Reference and command, not separate
Factory Setting
[Separate] SEP Separate reference and command. This assignment
cannot be accessed in [I/O profile] io
[I/O profile] io I/O profile

CCS [Command Switching]

g
WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
This parameter can cause unintended movements, for example an inversion of the direction of the
rotation of the motor, a sudden acceleration or a stop.
 Verify that the setting of this parameter does not cause unintended movements.
 Verify that the setting of this parameter does not result in unsafe conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.
Control channel switch.
This parameter can be accessed if [Control Mode] CHCF is set to [Separate] SEP or to
[I/O profile] io.
If the assigned input or bit is at 0, channel [Cmd channel 1] Cd1 is active.If the assigned
input or bit is at 1, channel [Cmd channel 2] Cd2 is active.
NOTE: Activating this function from an other active command channel will also activate the
monitoring of this new channel.
Settings Code/Value Settings
[Cmd channel 1] Cd1 Command channel = channel 1 (for CCS)
Factory setting
[Cmd channel 2] Cd2 Command channel = channel 2 (for CCS)
[DI1]...[DI6] Li1...Li6 Digital input DI1...DI6
[DI11]...[DI16] Li11...Li16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O
extension module has been inserted
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with
integrated Modbus Serial in [I/O profile] io
configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with
integrated Modbus Serial regardless of
configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a
fieldbus module in [I/O profile] io configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a
fieldbus module regardless of configuration

110 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CRP

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CrP- [Command and Reference]
Cd1 [Cmd channel 1]
Command channel 1 assignment.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Control Mode] CHCF is set to [Separate] SEP or
[I/O profile] io.

Settings Code/Value Settings

[Terminal] tEr Terminal block source
Factory Setting
[HMI] LCC Command via Plain Text Display Terminal
[Ref. Freq-Modbus] Mdb Command via Modbus
[Ref. Freq-Com. Module] nEt Command via fieldbus module if a fieldbus module
has been inserted

Cd2 [Cmd channel 2]

Command channel 2 assignment.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Control Mode] CHCF is set to [Separate] SEP or
[I/O profile] io.
Identical to [Cmd channel 1] Cd1 with factory setting [Ref. Freq-Modbus] Mdb.
rFC [Freq Switch Assign]

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
This parameter can cause unintended movements, for example an inversion of the direction of the
rotation of the motor, a sudden acceleration or a stop.
• Verify that the setting of this parameter does not cause unintended movements.
• Verify that the setting of this parameter does not result in unsafe conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
frequency switching assignment.
If the assigned input or bit is at 0, channel [Ref Freq 1 Config] Fr1 is active.
If the assigned input or bit is at 1, channel [Ref Freq 2 Config] Fr2 is active.
NOTE: Activating this function from an other active command channel will also activate the
monitoring of this new channel.
Settings Code/Value Settings
[Ref Freq 1 Config] Fr1 Reference channel = channel 1 (for RFC)
[Ref Freq 2 Config] Fr2 Reference channel = channel 2 (for RFC)
[DI1]...[DI6] Li1...Li6 Digital input DI1...DI6
[DI11]...[DI16] Li11...Li16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O
extension module has been inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile]
io configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 regardless of
configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with
integrated Modbus Serial in [I/O profile] io
configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with
integrated Modbus Serial regardless of configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a
fieldbus module in [I/O profile] io configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a
fieldbus module regardless of configuration

SP51105 01/2025 111

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CRP

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CrP- [Command and Reference]
Fr2 [Ref Freq 2 Config]
Configuration reference frequency 2.
Settings Code/Value Settings
[Not Configured] no Not assigned. If [Control Mode] CHCF is set to
[Not separ.] SiM, the command is at the terminals
with a zero reference. If [Control Mode] CHCF is
set to [Separate] SEP or [I/O profile] io, the
reference is zero.
Factory Setting
[AI1]...[AI3] Ai1...Ai3 Analog input AI1...AI3
[AI4]...[AI5] Ai4...Ai5 Analog input AI4...AI5 if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O
extension module has been inserted
[Ref Frequency via DI] uPdt +/– speed command assigned to DIx
[HMI] LCC Reference frequency via Graphic Display Terminal
[Ref. Freq-Modbus] Mdb Reference frequency via Modbus
[Ref. Freq-Com. Module] nEt Reference frequency via fieldbus module if a
fieldbus module has been inserted
[DI5 PulseInput Pi5...Pi6 Digital input DI5...DI6 used as pulse input
Assignment]...[DI6 PulseInput
Assignment]

CoP [Copy Ch1-Ch2]

Copy channel 1 reference frequency to channel 2.

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
This parameter can cause unintended movements, for example an inversion of the direction of
the rotation of the motor, a sudden acceleration or a stop.
 Verify that the setting of this parameter does not cause unintended movements.
 Verify that the setting of this parameter does not result in unsafe conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.
Can be used to copy the current reference and/or the command with switching in order to
avoid speed surges, for example.
If [Control Mode] CHCF page 110 is set to [Not separ.] SiM or [Separate] SEP, copying
is possible only from channel 1 to channel 2.
If [Control Mode] CHCF is set to [I/O profile] io, copying is possible in both directions.
A reference or a command cannot be copied to a channel on the terminals. The reference
copied is [Pre-Ramp Ref Freq] FrH (before ramp) unless the destination channel
reference is set via +/– speed. In this case, the reference copied is [Motor Frequency]rFr
(after ramp).
Settings Code/Value Settings
[No] no No copy Factory Setting
[Reference Frequency] SP Copy reference
[Command] Cd Copy command
[Cmd + Ref Frequency] ALL Copy reference and command
As the Plain Text Display Terminal may be selected as the command and/or reference
channel, its action modes can be configured.
Comments:
• The Plain Text Display Terminal command/reference is only active if the command and/or
reference channels from the terminal are active except for bMP with Local/ Remote key
(command via the Plain Text Display Terminal), which takes priority over these channels.
Press Local/ Remote key again to revert control to the selected channel.
• Command and reference via the Plain Text Display Terminal are impossible if the latter is
connected to more than one drive.
• The preset PID reference functions can only be accessed if [Control Mode] CHCF is set
to [Not separ.] SiM or [Separate] SEP.
• The command via the Plain Text Display Terminal can be accessed regardless of the
[Control Mode] CHCF.

112 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CRP

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CrP- [Command and Reference]
FLoC [Forced Local Chan]
Forced Local channel assignment.

Settings Code/Value Settings

[Not Configured] no Not assigned (control via the terminals with zero
reference)
Factory Setting
[AI1]...[AI3] Ai1...Ai3 Analog input AI1...AI3
[AI4]...[AI5] Ai4...Ai5 Analog input AI4...AI5 if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O extension
module has been inserted
[HMI] LCC Graphic Display Terminal
[DI5 PulseInput Pi5...Pi6 Digital input DI5...DI6 used as pulse input
Assignment]...[DI6
PulseInput Assignment]

FLot [Time-out Forc. Local] 0.1...30.0 s 10.0 s

g Time for channel confirmation after forced local.
This parameter can be accessed if [Forced Local Assign] FLo is not set to [No] no.

FLo [Forced Local Assign]
Forced Local Assignment.
Forced local mode is active when the input is at state 1.
[Forced Local Assign] FLo is forced to [No] no if [Control Mode] CHCF is set to
[I/O profile] io.
Settings Code/Value Settings
[Not Assigned] no Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI6] Li1...Li6 Digital input DI1...DI6
[DI11]...[DI16] Li11...Li16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O
extension module has been inserted

bMP [HMI L/R cmd]

HMI command.
Settings Code/Value Settings
[Stop On Switching] StoP Stops the drive (although the controlled direction of
operation and reference of the previous channel are
copied (to be taken into account on the next RUN
command))
[Bumpless] buMP Does not stop the drive (the controlled direction of
operation and the reference of the previous channel
are copied)
[Disabled] diS Disabled
Factory Setting

SP51105 01/2025 113

Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.4
[Generic functions] - [Ramp]

[Generic functions] - [Ramp]

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSGF>RAMP

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSGF- [Generic functions]
rAMP- [Ramp]
rPt [Ramp Type]
Type of ramp.

Settings Code/Value Settings

[Linear] Lin Linear ramp
Factory setting
[S-Ramp] S S ramp
[U-Ramp] u U ramp
[Customized] CuS Customer ramp

inr [Ramp increment]

This parameter is valid for [Acceleration] ACC, [Deceleration] dEC, [Acceleration 2] AC2
 and [Deceleration 2] dE2.
This table presents the parameter settings:
Settings Code/Value Description
[0.01] 0.01 Ramp up to 99.99 seconds
[0.1] 0.1 Ramp up to 999.9 seconds
Factory setting
[1] 1 Ramp up to 6,000 seconds

ACC [Acceleration] 0.00...6,000.00 s (1) 30.0 s

Time to accelerate from 0 to the [Nominal Motor Freq] FrS.
 To have repeatability in ramps, the value of this parameter must be set according to the
possibility of the application.
(1) Range 0.01 to 99.99 s or 0.1 to 999.9 s or 1 to 6,000 according to
[Ramp increment] inr
dEC [Deceleration] 0.00...6,000.00 s (1) 30.0 s
Time to decelerate from the [Nominal Motor Freq] FrS to 0.
 To have repeatability in ramps, the value of this parameter must be set according to the
possibility of the application.
(1) Range 0.01 to 99.99 s or 0.1 to 999.9 s or 1 to 6,000 according to
[Ramp increment] inr
tAI [Begin Acc round] 0...100% 10%
Rounding of start of acceleration ramp as a % of the [Acceleration] ACC or
g [Acceleration 2] AC2 ramp time.
Can be set from 0 to 100%.
 This parameter can be accessed if the [Ramp type] rPt is set to [Customized] CuS.
tA2 [End Acc round] 0...100% 10%
Rounding of end of acceleration ramp as a % of the [Acceleration] ACC or
g [Acceleration 2] AC2 ramp time.
Can be set from 0 to (100% - [Begin Acc round] tA1).
 This parameter can be accessed if the [Ramp type] rPt is set to [Customized] CuS.
tA3 [Begin Dec round] 0...100% 10%
Rounding of begin of deceleration ramp as a % of the [Deceleration] dEC or
g [Deceleration 2] dE2 ramp time.
Can be set from 0 to 100%
 This parameter can be accessed if the [Ramp type] rPt is set to [Customized] CuS.

114 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSGF>RAMP

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

CSGF- [Generic functions]
rAMP- [Ramp]
tA4 [End Dec round] 0...100% 10%

Rounding of end of deceleration ramp as a % of the [Deceleration] dEC or [Deceleration 2]

g dE2 ramp time.
Can be set from 0 to (100% - [Begin Dec round] tA3).
 This parameter can be accessed if the [Ramp type] rPt is set to [Customized] CuS.
Frt [Ramp 2 Thd] 0.0...500.0 Hz 0.0 Hz

Ramp switching threshold.

 The second ramp is switched if the value of [Ramp 2 Thd]Frt is not 0 (0 deactivates the
function) and the output frequency is greater than [Ramp 2 Thd] Frt.
Threshold ramp switching can be combined with [Ramp switch Assign] rPS switching as
follows:
DI or Bit Frequency Ramp
0 < Frt ACC, dEC
0 > Frt ACC, dE2

1 < Frt ACC, dE2

1 > Frt ACC, dE2

rP5 [Ramp switch Assign]

Ramp switching assignment .
Settings Code/Value Description
[Not Assigned] no Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI6] Li1...Li6 Digital input DI1...DI6

[DI11]...[DI16] Li11...Li16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O

extension module has been inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile]
io configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 in [I/O profile]
io configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with
integrated Modbus Serial in [I/O profile] io
configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with
integrated Modbus Serial in [I/O profile] io
configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a
fieldbus module in [I/O profile] io configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a
fieldbus module in [I/O profile] io configuration

AC2 [Acceleration 2] 0.0...6,000 s (1) 5.0 s

Time to accelerate from 0 to the [Nominal motor freq.] FrS. To have repeatability in
g ramps, the value of this parameter must be set according to the possibility of the
application.
This parameter can be accessed if [Ramp 2 Thd]Frt is greater than 0 or if [Ramp switch
 Assign] rPS is assigned.
(1) Range 0.01 to 99.99 s or 0.1 to 999.9 s or 1...6,000 s according to [Ramp increment]
inr.

SP51105 01/2025 115

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSGF>RAMP

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

CSGF- [Generic functions]
rAMP- [Ramp]
dE2 [Deceleration 2] 0.0...6,000 s (1) 5.0 s

Time to decelerate from the [Nominal motor freq.] FrS to 0. To have repeatability in
g ramps, the value of this parameter must be set according to the possibility of the
application.
This parameter can be accessed if [Ramp 2 Thd] Frt is greater than 0 or if [Ramp switch
 Assign] rPS is assigned.
(1) Range 0.01 to 99.99 s or 0.1 to 999.9 s or 1...6,000 s according to [Ramp increment]
inr.
brA [Dec.Ramp Adapt]
Deceleration ramp adaptation.

Activating this function automatically adapts the deceleration ramp, if this has been set at a
too low value according to the inertia of the load, which can cause an overvoltage detected
error.
The function is incompatible with applications requiring:
• Positioning on a ramp
Settings Code/Value Description
[No] no Function inactive
[Yes] YES Function active, for applications that do not require
strong deceleration
Factory setting
[High Torque] dYnA Addition of a constant current flow component.
The [High Torque]dYnA selection appears
depending on the rating of the drive and [Motor
control type] Ctt. It enables stronger deceleration
to be obtained than with [Yes] YES. Use
comparative testing to determine your selection
When [Dec.Ramp Adapt] brA is configured on [High
torq. x] dYnx, the dynamic performances for
braking are improved by the addition of a current flow
component. The aim is to increase the iron loss and
magnetic energy stored in the motor.

116 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.5
[Generic functions] - [+/- speed]

[Generic functions] - [+/- speed]

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSGF>UPD

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSGF- [Generic functions]
uPd- [+/- Speed]
This function can be accessed if reference channel [Ref Freq 2 Config] Fr2 is set to
[Ref Frequency via DI] uPdt.
NOTE: This function cannot be used with some other functions.
2 types of operations are available:
• Use of single action keys: 2 digital inputs are required in addition to the operating
directions.
The input assigned to the “+ speed” command increases the speed, the input assigned to
the “– speed” command decreases the speed.
• Use of double action keys: Only one digital input assigned to “+ speed” is required.
+/– speed with double-press buttons:
Description: 1 button pressed twice (2 steps) for each direction of rotation. A contact
closes each time the button is pressed.
Settings Released First Press (Speed Second Press
(– Speed) Maintained) (Faster)
Forward button – a a and b
Reverse button – c c and d

DI1 Forward
DIx Reverse
DIy + Speed

SP51105 01/2025 117

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSGF>UPD

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt [Complete settings]
CSGF- [Generic functions]
uPd- [+/- Speed]

Do not use this +/– speed type with a 3-wire control.

Whichever type of operation is selected, the max. speed is set by [High speed] HSP.
NOTE: If the reference is switched via [Freq Switch Assign] rFC from any reference
channel to another reference channel with "+/– speed", the value of reference [Motor
Frequency] rFr (after ramp) may be copied at the same time in accordance with the
[Copy Ch1-Ch2] CoP parameter.
This helps to prevent the speed from being incorrectly reset to zero when switching takes
place.
uSP [+ Speed Assign]
Increase speed input assignment.
Function active if the assigned input or bit is at 1.
Settings Code/Value Description
[Not Assigned] no Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI6] Li1...Li6 Digital input DI1...DI6
[DI11]...[DI16] Li11...Li16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O
extension module has been inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile]
io configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 in [I/O profile]
io configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with
integrated Modbus Serial in [I/O profile] io
configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with
integrated Modbus Serial in [I/O profile] io
configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a
fieldbus module in [I/O profile] io configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a
fieldbus module in [I/O profile] io configuration

dSP [- Speed Assign]

Down speed input assignment. See the assignment conditions
Parameter settings identical to [+ Speed Assign] uSP.
Function active if the assigned input or bit is at 1

118 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSGF>UPD

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

CSGF- [Generic functions]
uPd- [+/- Speed]
Str [Ref Frequency Save]
Reference frequency saves. This parameter can be accessed if [+ Speed Assign] uSP is
g not set to [Not Assigned] no or [- Speed Assign] dSP is not set to [Not Assigned] no.
Associated with the "+/– speed" function, this parameter can be used to save the reference:
• When the run commands disappear (saved to RAM).
• When the supply mains or the run commands disappear (saved to EEPROM).
Therefore, next time the drive starts up, the speed reference is the last reference frequency
saved.
Settings Code/Value Description
[No save] no Not saved
Factory setting
[Save to RAM] rAM +/- speed with saving of the reference frequency in
RAM
[Save to EEPROM] EEP +/- speed with saving of the reference frequency in
EEPROM

SP51105 01/2025 119

Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.6
[Generic functions] - [Stop configuration]

[Generic functions] - [Stop configuration]

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSGF>STT

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

CSGF- [Generic functions]
Stt- [Stop configuration]
NOTE: This function cannot be used with some other functions.
Stt [Type of stop]
Normal stop mode.
Stop mode on disappearance of the run command or appearance of a stop command.
Settings Code/Value Description
[On Ramp] rMP Stop on ramp
Factory setting
[Fast stop] FSt Fast stop

[Freewheel] nSt Freewheel stop

[DC injection] dCi DC injection stop.

nSt [Freewheel stop]

Freewheel stop.
The stop is activated when the input or the bit changes to 0. If the input returns to state 1
and the run command is still active, the motor will only restart if [2/3-Wire Control]tCC is
set to [2-Wire Control] 2C and if [2-wire type] tCt is set to [Level] LEL or
[Level With Fwd Priority] PFo. If not, a new run command must be sent.
Settings Code/Value Description
[Not Assigned] no Not assigned
Factory setting
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile]
io configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 in [I/O profile]
io configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with
integrated Modbus Serial in [I/O profile] io
configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with
integrated Modbus Serial in [I/O profile] io
configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a
fieldbus module in [I/O profile] io configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a
fieldbus module in [I/O profile] io configuration
[DI1 (Low level)]... L1L...L6L Digital input DI1...DI6 used at low level
[DI6 (Low level)]
[DI11 (Low level)]... L11L...L16L Digital input DI11...DI16 used at low level if XDIO-
[DI16 (Low level)] EX1-V01 I/O extension module has been inserted

120 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSGF>STT

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

CSGF- [Generic functions]
Stt- [Stop configuration]
FFt [Freewheel stop Thd] 0.2...500.0 Hz 0.2 Hz

Freewheel stop threshold.

g Speed threshold below which the motor switches to freewheel stop.
 This parameter supports switching from a ramp stop or a fast stop to a freewheel stop
below a low speed threshold.
This parameter can be accessed if:
• [Type of stop] Stt is set to [Fast stop] FSt or [On Ramp] rMP, and
• [Auto DC Injection] AdC is not configured.
FSt [Fast stop Assign]
Fast stop.
The stop is activated when the input changes to 0 or the bit changes to 1 (bit in [I/O profile]
io at 0).
If the input returns to state 1 and the run command is still active, the motor will only restart
if [2/3-Wire Control] tCC is set to [2-Wire Control] 2C and if [2-wire type] tCt is set to
[Level] LEL or [Level With Fwd Priority] PFo.
If not, a new run command must be sent.
NOTE: This function cannot be used with some other functions.
Settings Code/Value Description
[Not Assigned] no Not assigned
Factory setting
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile]
io configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 in [I/O profile]
io configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with
integrated Modbus Serial in [I/O profile] io
configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with
integrated Modbus Serial in [I/O profile] io
configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a
fieldbus module in [I/O profile] io configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a
fieldbus module in [I/O profile] io configuration
[DI1 (Low level)]...[DI6 L1L...L6L Digital input DI1...DI6 used at low level
(Low level)]
[DI11 (Low level)]...[DI16 L11L...L16L Digital input DI11...DI16 used at low level if XDIO-
(Low level)] EX1-V01 I/O extension module has been inserted

dCF [Ramp Divider] 0...10 4

Fast Stop deceleration ramp reduction coefficient.

g The ramp that is enabled ([Deceleration] dEC or [Deceleration 2] dE2) is then divided by
 this coefficient when stop requests are sent.
Value 0 corresponds to a minimum ramp time.

SP51105 01/2025 121

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSGF>STT

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

CSGF- [Generic functions]
Stt- [Stop configuration]
dCi [DC Injection Assign]
DC injection brake assignment.

WARNING
UNINTENDED MOVEMENT
 Do not use DC injection to generate holding torque when the motor is at a standstill.
 Use a holding brake to keep the motor in the standstill position.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
DC injection braking is initiated when the assigned input or bit changes to state 1.
If the input returns to state 0 and the run command is still active, the motor will only restart if
[2/3-Wire Control]tCC is set to [2-Wire Control] 2C and if [2-wire type] tCt is set to [Level]
LEL or [Level With Fwd Priority] PFo. If not, a new run command must be sent.
NOTE: This function cannot be used with some other functions.
Settings Code/Value Description
[Not Assigned] no Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI6] Li1...Li6 Digital input DI1...DI6
[DI11]...[DI16] Li11...LIi6 Digital input DI11...DI16 if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O
extension module has been inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile]
io configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 in [I/O profile]
io configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with
integrated Modbus Serial in [I/O profile] io
configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with
integrated Modbus Serial in [I/O profile] io
configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a
fieldbus module in [I/O profile] io configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a
fieldbus module in [I/O profile] io configuration

idC [DC Inj Level 1] 0.1...1.41 In (1) 0.7 In (1)

DC injection current.
g
NOTICE
 OVERHEATING
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in terms
of amount and time.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

Level of DC injection braking current activated via digital input or selected as stop mode.
This parameter can be accessed if:
• [Type of stop] Stt is set to [DC Injection Assign]dCi, or
• [DC Injection Assign] dCi is not set to [Not Assigned]no.
This setting is independent of the [Auto DC Injection] AdC- function.
(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the
drive nameplate.

122 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSGF>STT

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

CSGF- [Generic functions]
Stt- [Stop configuration]
tdi [DC Inj Time 1] 0.1...30 s 0.5 s

DC injection time 1.
g
NOTICE
 OVERHEATING
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in terms
of amount and time.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
Maximum current injection time [DC inject. level 1] idC. After this time, the injection
current becomes [DC inject. level 2] idC2.
This parameter can be accessed if:
• [Type of stop] Stt is set to [DC Injection Assign]dCi, or
• [DC Injection Assign] dCi is not set to [Not Assigned]no.
This setting is independent of the [Auto DC Injection] AdC- function.
idC2 [DC Inj Level 2] 0.1 In (1)... 0.5 In (1)
[DC Inj Level 1]idC
g DC injection current 2.

 NOTICE
OVERHEATING
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in terms
of amount and time.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
Injection current activated by digital input or selected as stop mode once period
[DC injection time 1] tdi has elapsed.
This parameter can be accessed if:
• [Type of stop] Stt is set to [DC Injection Assign] dCi, or
• [DC Injection Assign] dCi is not set to [Not Assigned] no.
This setting is independent of the [Auto DC Injection] AdC- function.
(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the
drive nameplate.
tdC [DC Inj Time 2] 0.1...30 s 0.5 s

2nd DC injection time.

g
NOTICE
 OVERHEATING
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in terms
of amount and time.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
Maximum injection time [DC Inj Level 2] idC2 for injection, selected as stop mode only.
This parameter can be accessed if: [Type of stop] Stt is set to [DC Injection Assign]
dCi
This setting is independent of the [Auto DC Injection] AdC- function.

SP51105 01/2025 123

Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.7
[Generic functions] - [Auto DC injection]

[Generic functions] - [Auto DC injection]

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSGF>ADC

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSGF- [Generic functions]
AdC- [Auto DC injection]
This menu presents the automatic injection of motor current function. This is used to hold
the rotor of the motor at the end of the deceleration ramp.
The following table presents an overview of the [Auto DC injection] AdC function:
AdC SdC SdC Description Operation
1 2
[YES] X x The [Auto DC inj Level 1]
YES SdC1 is injected during
[Auto DC Inj Time 1]
tdC1 and [Auto DC inj
Level 2] SdC2 during
[Auto DC Inj Time 2]
tdC2 .
[Continuous] X ≠0 The [Auto DC inj Level 1]
Ct SdC1 is injected during
TDC1 and then [Auto DC
inj Level 2] SdC2 is
injected.

[Continuous] X =0 Injection of [Auto DC inj

Ct Level 1] SdC1
Run
command
Speed

AdC [Auto DC Injection]

DANGER
 HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION, OR ARC FLASH
If the parameter [Auto DC Injection] AoC is set to [Continuous] Ct, DC injection is always
active, even if the motor does not run.
• Verify that using this setting does not result in unsafe conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

WARNING
UNINTENDED MOVEMENT
• Do not use DC injection to generate holding torque when the motor is at a standstill.
• Use a holding brake to keep the motor in the standstill position.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.
Automatic current injection on stopping (at the end of the ramp).

124 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSGF>ADC

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSGF- [Generic functions]
AdC- [Auto DC injection]
Settings Code/Value Description
[No] no No injection
[Yes] YES Adjustable injection time
Factory setting
[Continuous] Ct Continuous standstill injection

SdC1 [Auto DC inj Level 1] 0...1.1 In (1) 0.7 In (1)

Auto DC injection level 1.
g
NOTICE
OVERHEATING
 Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in
terms of amount and time.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
Level of standstill DC injection current.
This parameter can be accessed if [Auto DC Injection] AdC is not set to [No] no.
(1) In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the
drive nameplate.
tdC1 [Auto DC Inj Time 1] 0.1...30.0 s 0.5 s
Auto DC injection time 1.
g
NOTICE
OVERHEATING
 Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in
terms of amount and time.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
This parameter can be accessed if [Auto DC Injection] AdC is not set to [No] no.
This time corresponds to the zero speed maintenance time, if [Motor control type] Ctt is
set to [SYN_U VC] SYnu or [Reluctance Motor] SrvC.
This parameter is not applicable when the [Auto DC Injection] ADC is set to [Continuous]
Ct and [Auto DC inj Level 2] SdC2 value is 0.
SdC2 [Auto DC Inj level 2] 0...1.1 In (1) 0.5 In (1)
Auto DC injection level 2.
g
NOTICE
OVERHEATING
 Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in
terms of amount and time.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
Second level of standstill DC injection current.
This parameter can be accessed if [Auto DC Injection] AdC is not set to [No] no.
(1)In corresponds to the rated drive current indicated in the Installation Manual and on the
drive nameplate.
tdC2 [Auto DC Inj Time 2] 0.0...30.0 s 0.0 s
Auto DC Injection time 2.
g
NOTICE
OVERHEATING
Verify that the connected motor is properly rated for the DC injection current to be applied in
terms of amount and time.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
 Second standstill injection time.
This parameter can be accessed if [Auto DC Injection] AdC is set to [YES] YES.

SP51105 01/2025 125

Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.8
[Generic functions] - [Jog]

[Generic functions] - [Jog]

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSGF>JOG

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSGF- [Generic functions]
JoG- [Jog]
JoG [Jog Assign]
Jog assignment.
The JOG function is only active if the command channel and the reference channels are on
the terminals.
This function can be used if:
•[PID feedback Assign] PiF is set to [Not Configured] no, and
• [Ref Freq 2 Config] Fr2 is not set to [Ref Frequency via DI] uPdt.
The function is active when the assigned input or bit is at 1.
Example: 2-wire control operation ([2/3-Wire Control] tCC = [2-Wire Control ] 2C.

MF Motor frequency
Rf Reference
Rp Ramp
Rp: 0.1 s Ramp forced to 0.1 S
Fw Forward
R Reverse

126 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSGF>JOG

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

CSGF- [Generic functions]
JoG- [Jog]

Settings Code/Value Description

[Not Assigned] no Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI6] Li1...Li6 Digital input DI1...DI6
[DI11]...[DI16] Li11...LIi6 Digital input DI11...DI16 if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O
extension module has been inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile]
io configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 in [I/O profile]
io configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with
integrated Modbus Serial in [I/O profile] io
configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with
integrated Modbus Serial in [I/O profile] io
configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a
fieldbus module in [I/O profile] io configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a
fieldbus module in [I/O profile] io configuration

JGF [Jog Frequency] 0.0...10.0 Hz 10.0 Hz

g This parameter can be accessed if [Jog Assign] JoG is not set to [Not Assigned] no.
JGt [Jog delay] 0.0...2.0 s 0.5 s
g This parameter can be accessed if [Jog Assign] JoG is not set to [Not Assigned] no.

SP51105 01/2025 127

Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.9
[Generic functions] - [Preset speeds]

[Generic functions] - [Preset speeds]

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSGF>PSS

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSGF- [Generic functions]
PSS- [Preset speeds]
NOTE: This function cannot be used with some other functions.
Combination Table for Preset Speed Inputs
2, 4, 8 or 16 speeds can be preset, requiring 1, 2, 3 or 4 digital inputs respectively.
It is necessary to configure:
• 2 and 4 speeds in order to obtain 4 speeds.
• 2, 4 and 8 speeds in order to obtain 8 speeds.
• 2, 4, 8 and 16 speeds in order to obtain 16 speeds.
16 Preset Freq 8 Preset Freq 4 Preset 2 Preset Speed Reference
(PS16) (PS8) Freq (PS4) Freq (PS2)
0 0 0 0 Reference 1 (1)
0 0 0 1 SP2
0 0 1 0 SP3
0 0 1 1 SP4
0 1 0 0 SP5
0 1 0 1 SP6
0 1 1 0 SP7
0 1 1 1 SP8
1 0 0 0 SP9
1 0 0 1 SP10
1 0 1 0 SP11
1 0 1 1 SP12
1 1 0 0 SP13
1 1 0 1 SP14
1 1 1 0 SP15
1 1 1 1 SP16
(1) Reference 1 = SP1, refer to diagram (see page 125)
PS2 [2 Preset Freq]
2 preset freq assignment.

Settings Code/Value Description

[Not Assigned] no Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI6] Li1...Li6 Digital input DI1...DI6
[DI11]...[DI16] Li11...Li16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O
extension module has been inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile]
io configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 in [I/O profile]
io configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with
integrated Modbus Serial in [I/O profile] io
configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with
integrated Modbus Serial in [I/O profile] io
configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a
fieldbus module in [I/O profile] io configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a
fieldbus module in [I/O profile] io configuration

128 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSGF>PSS

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSGF- [Generic functions]
PSS- [Preset Speeds]
PS4 [4 Preset Freq]
4 preset freq assignment.
Identical to [2 Preset Freq] PS2
To obtain 4 speeds, you must also configure 2 speeds.
PS8 [8 Preset Freq]
8 preset freq assignment.
Identical to [2 Preset Freq] PS2
To obtain 8 speeds, you must also configure 2 and 4 speeds.
PS16 [16 Preset Freq]
16 preset freq assignment.
Identical to [2 Preset Freq] PS2
To obtain 16 speeds, you must also configure 2, 4 and 8 speeds.
SP2 to [Preset speed 2] to [Preset speed 16]
SP16
Preset speed 2 to preset speed 16. See the combination table for preset speed inputs
page 128
g Settings Description
0.0...500.0 Hz Factory setting:
 • [Preset speed 2] SP2: 10.0 Hz
• [Preset speed 3] SP3: 15.0 Hz
• [Preset speed 4] SP4: 20.0 Hz
• [Preset speed 5] SP5: 25.0 Hz
• [Preset speed 6] SP6: 30.0 Hz
• [Preset speed 7] SP7: 35.0 Hz
• [Preset speed 8] SP8: 40.0 Hz
• [Preset speed 9] SP9: 45.0 Hz
• [Preset speed 10] SP10: 50.0 Hz
• [Preset speed 11] SP11: 55.0 Hz
• [Preset speed 12] SP12: 60.0 Hz
• [Preset speed 13] SP13: 70.0 Hz
• [Preset speed 14] SP14: 80.0 Hz
• [Preset speed 15] SP15: 90.0 Hz
• [Preset speed 16] SP16: 100.0 Hz

SP51105 01/2025 129

Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.10
[Generic functions] - [Jump frequency]

[Generic functions] - [Jump frequency]

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSGF>JUF

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSGF- [Generic functions]
JuF- [Jump frequency]
This function helps to prevent prolonged operation within an adjustable range around the
regulated frequency.
This function can be used to help prevent reaching a frequency, which could cause
resonance. Setting the parameter to 0 disables the function.
The following figure is an example of the jump frequency function with one skip frequency
defined by [Skip Frequency] JPF:

F Frequency
t time
JPF [Skip frequency]
JFH [Skip.Freq.Hysteresis]
FRH [Pre-Ramp Ref Freq]
FRH_out [Pre-Ramp Ref Freq] after the jump frequency function
JPF [Skip Frequency] 0.0...500.0 Hz 0.0 Hz

 Jump frequency.

JF2 [Skip Frequency 2] 0.0...500.0 Hz 0.0 Hz

 Jump frequency 2.

JF3 [Skip Frequency 3] 0.0...500.0 Hz 0.0 Hz

 Jump frequency 3.

JFH [Skip.Freq.Hysteresis] 0.1...10.0 Hz 1.0 Hz

Jump frequency bandwidth.
g This parameter can be accessed if at least one skip frequency JPF, JF2, or JF3 is
different from 0.
 Skip frequency range: between JPF – JFH and JPF + JFH for example.
This adjustment is common to the 3 frequencies JPF, JF2, JF3.

130 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.11
[Generic functions] - [Define system units] SuC- Menu

[Generic functions] - [Define system units] SuC- Menu

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSGF>SUC

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSGF- [Generic functions]
SuC- [Define system units]
In order to be easy to configure, commission, operate, and maintain, the drive uses the
application units.
The physicals that are concerned by application units are:
• Pressure values
• Flow rate values
• Temperature values
• Currency values
NOTE: Some other default system units are automatically deduced from configurable
system units or from other parameters.
System unit applies by default to all communication parameters and HMI (Plain Text
Display Terminal, Web server).
When a system unit is changed, there is no rescaling of values. Numerical values are kept,
but the meaning of these values is not the same:
• After a change, the behavior of the product will not change (the system stays numerically
the same).
• If new values are written through communication or through HMI in new unit, then the
behavior is impacted. In that case, all parameters should be reconfigured according to the
new selected unit.
• In order to avoid issues due to a modification of system unit parameters, system units
should be modified only during the installation of the product and before the
commissioning of the functions.
The precision of the physical values is selected at the same time as the unit.
By default, values are signed.
Default range of values are:
16 bits values 32 bits values
-32,768...32,767 -2,147,483,648...2,147,483,648

SuPr [P sensor unit]

Default system application unit used for pressure.
Available pressure units:
Unit Symbol Conversion
Kilo Pascal kPa 100 kPa = 1 bar
Millibar mbar
Bar bar
Pound / square inch (lb/in²) psi 14.5 psi = 1 bar
psig
Inch H2O inH2O 1 inH2O 4°C = 0.0024908891 bar (0.036127292 psi)
Inch water gauge inWG
Inch water column inWC
Feet water gauge ftWG 1 inH2O 4°C = 0.0298906692 bar (0.433527504 psi)
Feet water column ftWC
Feet ft
Meter water gauge mWG 1 mH2O(4°C) = 0.0980665 bar (1.42233433 psi)
Meter water column mWC (mCE)
Meter m
Inch of mercury inHg 1 inHg = 0.0338638864 bar (0.491154147 psi)
Percentage % –
w/o unit – –

SP51105 01/2025 131

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSGF>SUC

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSGF- [Generic functions]
SuC- [Define system units]

Settings Code/Value Description

[1 Kpa] 1kPA 1 kpa
[1 mbar] 1MbAr 1 mbar
[1 Bar] 1bAr 1 bar
[0.1 Bar] 01bAr 0.1 bar
Factory setting
[0.01 Bar] 001bAr 0.01 bar
[1 Psi] 1PSi 1 Psi
[0.1 Psi] 01PSi 0.1 psi
[1 Psig] 1PSiG 1 Psig
[0.1 Psig] 01PSiG 0.1 Psig
[1 inH20] 1inH20 1 inH20
[1 inWg] 1inWG 1 inWg
[1 inWc] 1inWC 1 inWc
[1 ftWg] 1FtWG 1 FtWg
[1 ftWc] 1FtWC 1 FtWC
[1 ft] 1Ft 1 Ft
[1 mWg] 1MWG 1 mWg
[0.1 mWg] 01MWG 0.1 mWg
[1 mWc] 1MWC 1 mWC
[0.1 mWc] 01MWC 0.1 mWC
[1 m] 1M 1m
[0.1 m] 01M 0.1 m
[1 inHg] 1inHG 1 inHg
[0.1 %] 01PC 0.1%
[0.1] 01W0 0.1 w/o

SuFr [Flow rate unit]

Default system application unit used for flow rate.
Available flow units:
Settings Code/Value Description
Liter / second l/s –
Liter / minute l/min –
Liter / hour l/h –
Cubic decimeter / minute dm3/min –
Cubic meter / second m3/s –
Cubic meter / minute m3/min –
Cubic meter / hour m3/h –
Gallon per second gal/s 1 usgal = 3,785411784 l
Gallon per minute gal/min; GPM –
Gallon per hour gal/h –
Cubic feet / second ft3/s 1 ft3 = 28.317 l
Cubic feet / minute ft3/min; CFM, SCFM –
Cubic feet / hour ft3/h –
Percentage % –
w/o unit – –

132 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSGF>SUC

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSGF- [Generic functions]
SuC- [Define system units]

Settings Code/Value Description

[1 L/s] 1LS L/s
[0.1 l/s] 01LS 0.1 L/s
[1 L/mn] 1LM L/m
[1 L/h] 1Lh L/h
[1 dm3/mn] 1dM3M d3/m
[1 m3/s] 1M3S M3/s
[0.1 m3/s] 01M3S 0.1 M3/s
[1 m3/mn] 1M3Mn M3/min
[0.1 m3/mn] 01M3Mn 0.1 M3/min
[1 m3/h] 1M3h 1 M3/h
[0.1 m3/h] 01M3h 0.1 M3/h
Factory setting
[1 gal/s] 1GPS 1 Gal/s
[1 GPM] 1GPM 1 GPM
[1 gal/h] 1GPH 1 Gal/h
[1 ft3/s] 1CFS 1 ft3/s
[1 CFM] 1CFM 1 CFM
[1 SCFM] 1SCFM 1 SCFM
[1 ft3/h] 1CFH 1 ft3/h
[1 Kg/s] 1kGS 1 kg/s
[1 Kg/mn] 1kGM 1 kg/m
[1 Kg/h] 1kGH 1 kg/h
[1 Lb/s] 1LbS 1 lb/s
[1 Lb/mn] 1LbM 1 lb/m
[1 Lb/h] 1LbH 1 lb/h
[0.1 %] 01PC 0.1%
[0.1] 01Wo 0.1 w/o

SutP [Temperature unit]

Default system application unit used for temperature.
Available temperature units:
Unit Symbol Conversion
Celsius Degree °C –
Fahrenheit Degree °F TF = 9/5*Tc+32
Percentage % –
w/o unit – –

Settings Code / Value Description

[0.1°C] 01C 0.1 °C
Factory setting
[0.1°F] 01F 0.1 °F
[0.1 %] 01PC 0.1%
[0.1] 01Wo 0.1 w/o

SP51105 01/2025 133

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSGF>SUC

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSGF- [Generic functions]
SuC- [Define system units]
SuCu [Current unit list]
Default system application unit used for currency.
Settings Code/Value Description
[Euro] Euro Euro
[$] doLLAr Dollar
[£] pound Pound
[Krone] Kr Krone
[Renminbi] rMb Renminbi
Factory setting
[Other] otHEr Other

rHo [Liquid Density] 100...10,000 kg/m3 1000 kg/m3

Density of the fluid to be pumped.
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is not set to [Expert] EPr.

134 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.12
[Generic functions] - [PID controller]

[Generic functions] - [PID controller]

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[PID controller] Pid- Overview 136
[PID Feedback] Fdb- Menu 140
[PID Reference] rF- Menu 145
[PID preset references] Pri- Menu 148
[PID Reference] rF- Menu 147
[Settings] St- Menu 149

SP51105 01/2025 135

Complete settings CSt-

[PID controller] Pid- Overview

About This Menu

NOTE: This function cannot be used with some other functions.

Block Diagram
The function is activated by assigning an analog input to the PID feedback (measurement).

Pr2
Pr4
Pii PEE
PEr

rPi
PiS
FrI(b) PrP
PiC
+SA2 rP2
+SA3 Poh PAu
rP3 rdG
-dA2
-dA3
riG
rP4 rPG
PoL ACCP

PAH PFAH
FPi
PiFi / PiF2 PAL PFAL
PiPI / PiP2

PiF
PS2
to
ACC/dEC
PiM PS16
PSr

SP2
to
SP16

The PID feedback needs to be assigned to one of the analog inputs AI1 to AI5 or a pulse input, according to
whether any I/O extension module has been inserted.
The PID reference needs to be assigned to the following parameters:
• Preset references via digital inputs ([Ref PID Preset 2] rP2, [Ref PID Preset 3] rP3,
[Ref PID Preset 4]rP4).
• In accordance with the configuration of [Intern PID Ref] Pii:
 [Internal PID ref] rPi, or
 Reference A [Ref Freq 1 Config] Fr1 .

136 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Combination Table for Preset PID References:

DI (Pr4) DI (Pr2) Pr2 = no Reference

0 0
0 1 rP2
1 0 rP3
1 1 rP4

A predictive speed reference can be used to initialize the speed on restarting the process.
Scaling of feedback and references:
• [Min PID feedback] PiF1, [Max PID feedback] PiF2 parameters can be used to scale the PID feedback
(sensor range). This scale must be maintained for all other parameters.
• [Min PID Process] PiP1, [Max PID Process] PiP2 parameters can be used to scale the adjustment
range, for example the reference. Check that the adjustment range remains within the sensor range.
The maximum value of the scaling parameters is 32,767. To facilitate the installation, it is recommended to use
values as close as possible to this maximum level, while retaining powers of 10 in relation to the actual values.
The scaling is without unit if [Type of control] toCt is set to [Not Available] nA, in % if set to [OTHER]
otHEr, in process unit if set to [PRESSURE] PrESS or [FLOW] FLoW.

Example
Adjustment of the volume in a tank, 6...15 m3.
• Probe used 4-20 mA, 4.5 m3 for 4 mA and 20 m3 for 20 mA, with the result that PiF1 = 4,500 and PiF2
= 20,000.
• Adjustment range 6 to 15 m3, with the result that PiP1 = 6,000 (min. reference) and PiP2 = 15,000
(max. reference).
• Example references:
 rP1 (internal reference) = 9,500
 rP2 (preset reference) = 6,500
 rP3 (preset reference) = 8,000
 rP4 (preset reference) = 11,200

Other parameters:
• Reversal of the direction of correction [PID Inversion] PiC. If [PID Inversion] PiC is set to [No] no, the
speed of the motor increases when the detected error is positive (for example pressure control with a
compressor). If [PID Inversion] PiC is set to [Yes] YES, the speed of the motor decreases when the
detected error is positive (for example temperature control using a cooling fan).
• The integral gain may be short-circuited by a digital input.
• A warning on the [PID feedback Assign] PiF may be configured.
• A warning on the [PID error] rPE may be configured.

SP51105 01/2025 137

Complete settings CSt-

"Manual - Automatic" Operation with PID

This function combines the PID controller, the preset speeds, and a manual reference. Depending on the state
of the digital input, the speed reference is given by the preset speeds or by a manual reference input via the PID
function.
Manual PID reference [Manual PID reference] PiM:
• Analog inputs AI1 to AI5
• Pulse inputs
Predictive speed reference [Predictive Speed Ref] FPi:
• [AI1] Ai1: analog input
• [AI2] Ai2: analog input
• [AI3] Ai3: analog input
• [AI4] Ai4: analog input if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O extension module has been inserted
• [AI5] Ai5: analog input if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O extension module has been inserted
• [DI5 PulseInput Assignment] Pi5: pulse input
• [DI6 PulseInput Assignment] Pi6: pulse input
• [HMI] LCC: Plain Text Display Terminal
• [Ref. Freq-Modbus]Mdb: integrated Modbus
• [Ref. Freq-Com. Module]nEt: fieldbus option module (if inserted)

Setting Up the PID Controller

1. Configuration in PID mode.
Refer to the Block Diagram page 136.
2. Perform a test in factory settings mode.
To optimize the drive, adjust [PID Prop.Gain] rPG or [PID Intgl.Gain] riG gradually and independently, and
observe the effect on the PID feedback in relation to the reference.
3. If the factory settings are unstable or the reference is incorrect.

Step Action
1 Perform a test with a speed reference in Manual mode (without PID controller) and with the drive on
load for the speed range of the system:
• In steady state, the speed must be stable and comply with the reference, and the PID feedback
signal must be stable.
• In transient state, the speed must follow the ramp and stabilize quickly, and the PID feedback must
follow the speed. If not, see the settings for the drive and/or sensor signal and wiring.
2 Switch to PID mode.
3 Set [PID ramp] PrP to the minimum permitted by the mechanism without triggering an
[DC Bus Overvoltage] obF.
4 Set the integral gain [PID Intgl.Gain] riG to minimum.
5 Leave the derivative gain [PID derivative gain] rdG at 0.
6 Observe the PID feedback and the reference.
7 Switch the drive ON/OFF a number of times or vary the load or reference rapidly a number of times.
8 Set the proportional gain [PID Prop.Gain] rPG in order to ascertain the compromise between
response time and stability in transient phases (slight overshoot and 1 to 2 oscillations before
stabilizing).
9 If the reference varies from the preset value in steady state, gradually increase the integral gain
[PID Intgl.Gain] riG, reduce the proportional gain [PID Prop.Gain] rPG in the event of instability
(pump applications), find a compromise between response time and static precision (see diagram).
10 Lastly, the derivative gain may permit the overshoot to be reduced and the response time to be
improved, although this is more difficult to obtain a compromise in terms of stability, as it depends on
3 gains.
11 Perform in-production tests over the whole reference range.

138 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

The oscillation frequency depends on the system kinematics:

Parameter Rise time Overshoot Stabilization time Static error

rPG + -- + = -
rIG + - ++ + --
rdG + = - - =

SP51105 01/2025 139

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSGF>PID>FDB

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSGF- [Generic functions]
Pid- [PID controller]
Fdb- [Feedback]
NOTE: This function cannot be used with some other functions.
toCt [Type of Control]
Type of control for the PID = unit choice.
Settings Code/Value Description
[Not Available] nA No units
Factory setting
[PRESSURE] PrESS Pressure control and unit
[FLOW] Flow Flow control and unit
[OTHER] othEr Other control and unit (%)

PiF [PID feedback Assign]

PID controller feedback.
Settings Code/Value Description
[Not Configured] no Not assigned
Factory setting
[AI1]...[AI3] Ai1...Ai3 Analog input AI1...AI3
[AI4]...[AI5] Ai4...Ai5 Analog input AI4...AI5 if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O extension
module has been inserted
[AI Virtual 1] Aiv1 Virtual analogic input 1
[DI5 PulseInput Pi5...Pi6 Digital input DI5...DI6 used as pulse input
Assignment]...[DI6 PulseInput
Assignment]

Ai1t [AI1 Type]

Configuration of analog input AI1.
g This parameter can be accessed if [PID feedback Assign] PiF is set to [AI1] Ai1.
Settings Code/Value Description
[Voltage] 10u 0-10 Vdc
Factory setting
[Current] 0A 0-20 mA

uiL1 [AI1 min value] 0.0...10.0 Vdc 0.0 Vdc

AI1 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.

g This parameter can be accessed if:
• [PID feedback Assign]PiF is set to [AI1] Ai1, and
• [AI1 Type] Ai1t is set to [Voltage] 10u.
uiH1 [AI1 max value] 0.0...10.0 Vdc 10.0 Vdc

AI1 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.

g This parameter can be accessed if:
• [[PID feedback Assign]PiF is set to [AI1] Ai1, and
• [AI1 Type] Ai1t is set to [Voltage] 10u.

140 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSGF>PID>FDB

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSGF- [Generic functions]
Pid- [PID controller]
Fdb- [Feedback]
CrL1 [AI1 min. value] 0.0...20.0 mA 0.0 mA

AI1 current scaling parameter of 0%.

g This parameter can be accessed if:
• [PID feedback Assign] PiF is set to [AI1] Ai1, and
• [AI1 Type] Ai1t is set to [Current] 0A.
CrH1 [AI1 max. value] 0.0...20.0 mA 20.0 mA

AI1 current scaling parameter of 100%.

g This parameter can be accessed if:
• [PID feedback Assign]PiF is set to [AI1] Ai1, and
• [AI1 Type] Ai1t is set to [Current] 0A.
Ai2t [AI2 Type]
Configuration of analog input AI2.
g This parameter can be accessed if [PID feedback Assign] PiF is set to [AI2] Ai2
Settings Code/ Value Description
[Voltage] 10u 0-10 Vdc
[Current] 0A 0-20 mA
Factory setting
[KTY] KtY 1 KTY84
This selection can be accessed if [AIx Th Monitoring]
tHxS is not set to [No] no
[PT1000] 1Pt3 1 PT1000 connected with 2 wires
This selection can be accessed if [AIx Th Monitoring]
tHxS is not set to [No] no
[PT100] 1Pt2 1 PT100 connected with 2 wires
This selection can be accessed if [AIx Th Monitoring]
tHxS is not set to [No] no
[3PT1000] 3Pt3 3 PT1000 connected with 2 wires
This selection can be accessed if [AIx Th Monitoring]
tHxS is not set to [No] no
[3PT100] 3Pt2 3 PT100 connected with 2 wires
This selection can be accessed if [AIx Th Monitoring]
tHxS is not set to [No] no

uiL2 [AI2 min value]

AI2 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
g This parameter can be accessed if:
• [PID feedback Assign] PiF is set to [AI2] Ai2, and
• [AI2 Type] Ai2t is set to [Voltage] 10u.
Identical to [AI1 min value] uiL1 page 140
uiH2 [AI2 max value]
AI1 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
g This parameter can be accessed if:
• [PID feedback Assign] PiF is set to [AI2] Ai2, and
• [AI1 Type] Ai1t is set to [Voltage] 10u.
Identical to [AI1 max value] uiH1 page 140
CrL2 [AI2 min. value]
AI2 current scaling parameter of 0%.
g This parameter can be accessed if:
• [PID feedback Assign] PiF is set to [AI2] Ai2, and
• [AI2 Type] Ai2t is set to [Current] 0u.
Identical to [AI1 min. value] CrL1 page 141 with factory setting of 4.0 mA.

SP51105 01/2025 141

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSGF>PID>FDB

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSGF- [Generic functions]
Pid- [PID controller]
Fdb- [Feedback]
CrH2 [AI2 max. value]
AI2 current scaling parameter of 100%.
g This parameter can be accessed if:
• [PID feedback Assign] PiF is set to [AI2] Ai2, and
• [AI2 Type] Ai2t is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AI1 max. value] CrH1 page 140
Ai3t [AI3 Type]
Configuration of analog input AI3.
g This parameter can be accessed if [PID feedback Assign] PiF is set to [AI3] Ai3
Identical to [AI2 Type] Ai2t page 141.
uiL3 [AI3 min value]
AI3 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
g This parameter can be accessed if:
• [PID feedback Assign] PiF is set to [AI3] Ai3, and
• [AI3 Type] Ai3t is set to [Voltage] 10u.
Identical to [AI1 min value] uiL1 page 140.
uiH3 [AI3 max value]
AI3 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
g This parameter can be accessed if:
• [PID feedback Assign]PiF is set to [AI3] Ai3, and
• [AI3 Type] Ai3t is set to [Voltage] 10u.
Identical to [AI1 max value] uiH1 page 140
CrL3 [AI3 min. value]
AI3 current scaling parameter of 0%.
g This parameter can be accessed if:
• [PID feedback Assign] PiF is set to [AI3] Ai3, and
• [AI3 Type] Ai3t is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AI1 min. value] CrL1 page 141.
CrH3 [AI3 max. value]
AI3 current scaling parameter of 100%.
g This parameter can be accessed if:
• [PID feedback Assign] PiF is set to [AI3] Ai3, and
• [AI3 Type] Ai3t is set to [Current]0A.
Identical to [AI1 max. value] CrH1 page 141.
Ai4t [AI4 Type]
Configuration of analog input AI4.
g This parameter can be accessed if:
XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O extension module has been inserted, and [PID feedback Assign] PiF is
set to [AI4] Ai4.
Settings Code/Value Description
[Voltage] 10u 0-10 Vdc
[Current] 0A 0-20 mA
Factory setting
[Voltage +/-] n10u -10/+10 Vdc

142 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSGF>PID>FDB

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSGF- [Generic functions]
Pid- [PID controller]
Fdb- [Feedback]
uiL4 [AI4 min value]

AI4 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.

g This parameter can be accessed if:
• [PID feedback Assign] PiF is set to [AI4] Ai4, and
• [AI4 Type] Ai4t is set to [Voltage] 10u.
Identical to [AI1 min value] uiL1 page 140.
uiH4 [AI4 max value]
AI4 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
g This parameter can be accessed if:
• [[PID feedback Assign] PiF is set to [AI4] Ai4, and
• [AI4 Type] Ai4t is set to [Voltage] 10u.
Identical to [AI1 max value] uiH1 page 140.
CrL4 [AI4 min. value]
AI4 current scaling parameter of 0%.
g This parameter can be accessed if:
• [PID feedback Assign] PiF is set to [AI4] Ai4, and
• [AI4 Type] Ai4t is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AI1 min. value] CrL1 page 141.
CrH4 [AI4 max. value]
AI4 current scaling parameter of 100%.
g This parameter can be accessed if:
• [[PID feedback Assign] PiF is set to [AI4] Ai4, and
• [AI4 Type] Ai4t is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AI1 max. value] CrH1 page 141.
Ai5t [AI5 Type]
Configuration of analog input AI5.
g This parameter can be accessed if:
XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O extension module has been inserted, and [PID feedback Assign] PiF is
set to [AI5 Type] Ai5t.
Identical to [AI4 Type] Ai4t.
uiL5 [AI5 min value]
AI5 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
g This parameter can be accessed if:
• [PID feedback Assign] PiF is set to [AI5] Ai5, and
• [AI4 Type] Ai5t is set to [Voltage] 10u
Identical to [AI1 min value] uiL1 page 140.
uiH5 [AI5 max value]
AI5 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
g This parameter can be accessed if:
• [PID feedback Assign] PiF is set to [AI5] Ai5, and
• [AI5 Type] Ai5t is set to [Voltage] 10u.
Identical to [AI1 max value] uiH1 page 140

SP51105 01/2025 143

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSGF>PID>FDB

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSGF- [Generic functions]
Pid- [PID controller]
Fdb- [Feedback]
CrL5 [AI5 min. value]
g AI5 current scaling parameter of 0%.
This parameter can be accessed if:
• [PID feedback Assign] PiF is set to [AI5] Ai5, and
• [AI5 Type] Ai5t is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AI1 min. value] CrL1 page 141.
CrH5 [AI5 max. value]
AI5 current scaling parameter of 100%.
g This parameter can be accessed if:
• [PID feedback Assign] PiF is set to [AI5] Ai5, and
• [AI5 Type] Ai5t is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AI1 max. value] CrH1 page 141.
PiFI [Min PID feedback] 0...[Max PID feedback] 100
g PiF2
Minimum PID feedback.
 This parameter can be accessed if [PID feedback Assign] PiF is not set to
[Not Configured] no.
PiF2 [Max PID feedback] [Min PID feedback] 1,000
g PiF1...32,767
Maximum PID feedback.
 This parameter can be accessed if [PID feedback Assign] PiF is not set to
[Not Configured] no.
rPF [PID feedback] 0...65,535 0
g Value for PID feedback, display only.
This parameter can be accessed if [PID feedback Assign] PiF is not set to
 [Not Configured] no.
PAL [Min Fbk Warning] 0...65,535 100
g Minimum feedback level warning (for [PID Low Fdbck Warn] PFAL warning).
 This parameter can be accessed if [PID feedback Assign] PiF is not set to
[Not Configured] no.
PAH [Max Fbk Warning] 0...65,535 1,000
g Maximum feedback level warning (for [PID High Fdbck Warn] PFAH warning).
 This parameter can be accessed if [PID feedback Assign] PiF is not set to
[Not Configured] no.

144 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSGF>PID>FDB

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSGF- [Generic functions]
Pid- [PID controller]
rF- [PID Reference]
NOTE: This function cannot be used with some other functions.
Pii [Intern PID Ref]
Internal PID reference.
g This parameter can be accessed if [PID feedback Assign] PiF is not set to
[Not Configured] No.
Settings Code/Value Description
[No] no The PID controller reference is given by
[Ref Freq 1 Config] Fr1.
Factory setting
[Yes] YES The PID controller reference is internal via
[Internal PID ref] rPi.

Fr1 [Ref Freq 1 Config]

g Configuration reference frequency 1.
This parameter can be accessed if:
• [PID feedback Assign] PiF is not set to [Not Configured] no.
• [Intern PID Ref] Pii is set to [No] no.
Settings Code/Value Description
[Not Configured] no Not assigned
[AI1] Ai1 Analog input AI1
Factory Setting
[AI2]...[AI3] Ai2...Ai3 Analog input AI2...AI3
[AI Virtual 1] Aiv1 Virtual analogic input 1
[AI4]...[AI5] Ai4...Ai5 Analog input AI4...AI5 if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O extension
module has been inserted
[HMI] LCC Reference Frequency via remote terminal
[Ref. Freq-Modbus] Mdb Reference frequency via Modbus
[Ref. Freq-Com. Module] nEt Reference frequency via fieldbus module if a fieldbus
module has been inserted
[DI5 PulseInput Assignment]... Pi5...Pi6 Digital input DI5...DI6 used as pulse input
[DI6 PulseInput Assignment]

PiP1 [Min PID Process] [Min PID feedback] 150

g PiF1...[Max PID Process]
PiP2
 Minimum PID reference.
This parameter can be accessed if [PID feedback Assign] PiF is not set to
[Not Configured] no.
PiP2 [Max PID Process] [Min PID Process] PiP1... 900
g [Max PID feedback] PiP2
Maximum PID reference.
 This parameter can be accessed if [PID feedback Assign] PiF is not set to
[Not Configured] no.
rPi [Internal PID ref] [Min PID Process] PiP1... 150
[Max PID Process] PiP2
g Internal PID reference.
This parameter can be accessed if:
• [PID feedback Assign] PiF is not set to [Not Configured] no, and
 • [Intern PID Ref] Pii is set to [Yes] YES.

SP51105 01/2025 145

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSGF>PID>RF

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSGF- [Generic functions]
Pid- [PID controller]
rF- [PID Reference]
PAu [Auto/Manual assign.]
Auto/Manual select input.
g This parameter can be accessed if [PID feedback Assign] PiF is not set to
[Not Configured] no.
Settings Code/Value Description
[Not Assigned] no Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI6] Li1...Li6 Digital input DI1...DI6
[DI11]...[DI16] Li11...Li16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O
extension module has been inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile]
io configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 in [I/O profile]
io configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with
integrated Modbus Serial in [I/O profile] io
configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with
integrated Modbus Serial in [I/O profile] io
configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a
fieldbus module in [I/O profile] io configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a
fieldbus module in [I/O profile] io configuration

PiM [Manual PID Reference]

Manual PID reference.
g Reference input in manual mode.
This parameter can be accessed if:
• [PID feedback Assign] PiF is not set to [Not Configured] no, and
• [Auto/Manual assign.] PAu is not set to [Not Assigned]no.
The preset speeds are active on the manual reference if they have been configured.
Settings Code/Value Description
[Not Configured] no Not assigned
Factory setting
[AI1]...[AI3] Ai1...Ai3 Analog input AI1...AI3
[AI4]...[AI5] Ai4...Ai5 Analog input AI4...AI5 if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O extension
module has been inserted
[DI5 PulseInput Pi5...Pi6 Digital input DI5...DI6 used as pulse input
Assignment]...[DI6
PulseInput Assignment]

146 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSGF>PID>RF>PRI

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSGF- [Generic functions]
Pid- [PID controller]
rF- [PID Reference]
Pri- [PID preset references]
The function can be accessed if [PID feedback Assign] PiF is assigned.
Pr2 [2 PID Preset Assign]
2 PID Preset assignment.
If the assigned input or bit is at 0, the function is inactive.
If the assigned input or bit is at 1, the function is active.
Settings Code/Value Description
[Not Assigned] no Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI6] Li1...Li6 Digital input DI1...DI6
[DI11]...[DI16] Li11...Li16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O
extension module has been inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile]
io configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 in [I/O profile]
io configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with
integrated Modbus Serial in [I/O profile] io
configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with
integrated Modbus Serial in [I/O profile] io
configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a
fieldbus module in [I/O profile] io configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a
fieldbus module in [I/O profile] io configuration

Pr4 [4 PID Preset Assign]

4 PID Preset assignment.
Identical to [2 PID Preset Assign] Pr2 page 146
Verify that [2 PID Preset Assign] Pr2 has been assigned before assigning this function.
rP2 [Ref PID Preset 2] [Min PID Process] PiP1 300
g ...[Max PID Process]
PiP2
 Second PID preset reference.
This parameter can be accessed only if [2 PID Preset Assign] Pr2 is assigned.
rP3 [Ref PID Preset 3] [Min PID Process] PiP1 600
g ...[Max PID Process]
PiP2
 Third PID preset reference.
This parameter can be accessed only if [4 PID Preset Assign] Pr4 is assigned.
rP4 [Ref PID Preset 4] [Min PID Process] PiP1 900
...[Max PID Process]
g PiP2
Fourth PID preset reference.
 This parameter can be accessed only if [4 PID Preset Assign] Pr4 and
[2 PID Preset Assign] Pr2 are assigned.

SP51105 01/2025 147

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSGF>PID>RF

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSGF- [Generic functions]
Pid- [PID controller]
rF- [PID Reference]
FPi [Predictive Speed Ref]
Predictive speed reference.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert]EPr.
Settings Code/Value Description
[Not Configured] no Not assigned
Factory setting
[AI1]...[AI3] Ai1...Ai3 Analog input AI1...AI3
[AI4]...[AI5] Ai4...Ai5 Analog input AI4...AI5 if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O extension
module has been inserted
[HMI] LCC Reference frequency via remote terminal
[Ref. Freq-Modbus] Mdb Reference frequency via Modbus
[Ref. Freq-Com. Module] nEt Reference frequency via communication module
[DI5 PulseInput Pi5...Pi6 Digital input DI5...DI6 used as pulse input
Assignment]...[DI6
PulseInput Assignment]

PSr [Speed Input %] 1...100% 100%

g PID speed input % reference.
 This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert]EPr.

148 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSGF>PID>ST

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSGF- [Generic functions]
Pid- [PID controller]
St- [Settings]
Following parameters can be accessed if [PID feedback Assign] PiF is not set to
[Not Configured] no.
NOTE: This function cannot be used with some other functions.
rPG [PID Prop.Gain] 0.01...100.00 1.00
g PID controller Proportional gain.

riG [PI Intgl.Gain] 0.01...100.00 1.00
g PID controller Integral gain.

rdG [PID derivative gain] 0.00...100.00 0.00
g PID controller Derivative gain.

PrP [PID ramp] 0.0...99.9 s 0.0 s
g PID acceleration/deceleration ramp, defined to go from [Min PID Process] PiP1 to
[Max PID Process] PiP2 and conversely.

PiC [PID Inversion]
PID inversion.
g Settings Code/Value Description
[No] no No
Factory setting
[Yes] YES Yes

PoL [PID Min Output] -500.0...500.0 Hz 0.0 Hz

g PID controller minimum output in Hz.

PoH [PID Max Output] 0.0...500.0 Hz 60.0 Hz
g PID controller maximum output in Hz.

PEr [PID Error Warning] 0...65,535 100
g PID Error Warning


SP51105 01/2025 149

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSGF>PID>ST

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSGF- [Generic functions]
Pid- [PID controller]
St- [Settings]
PiS [PID Integral OFF]
g Integral shunt.
If the assigned input or bit is at 0, the function is inactive (the PID integral is enabled).
 If the assigned input or bit is at 1, the function is active (the PID integral is disabled).
Settings Code/Value Description
[Not Assigned] no Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI6] Li1...Li6 Digital input DI1...DI6
[DI11]...[DI16] Li11...Li16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O
extension module has been inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile]
io configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 in [I/O profile]
io configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with
integrated Modbus Serial in [I/O profile] io
configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with
integrated Modbus Serial in [I/O profile] io
configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a
fieldbus module in [I/O profile] io configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a
fieldbus module in [I/O profile] io configuration

ACCP [PID acceleration time] 0.01...99,99 s (1) 5.00 s

PID: acceleration during start-up.

g PID start ramp can be applied before starting the PID controller to allow reaching quickly
the PID reference without increasing PID gains.


(1) Range 0.01 to 99.99 s or 0.1 to 999.9 s or 1 to 6,000 according to [Ramp increment]
inr
SFS [PID Start Ref Freq] 0.0...500.0 Hz 0.0 Hz
g PID start reference frequency.
 If [PID Start Ref Freq] SFS is lower than [Low speed] LSP, this function has no effect.

150 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.13
[Generic functions] - [Sleep/wakeup] SPW- Menu

[Generic functions] - [Sleep/wakeup] SPW- Menu

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[Sleep/Wakeup] SPW- Overview 152
[Sleep menu] SLP- Menu 156
[AI1 Sensor config.] SiF1- Menu 158
[AI2 Sensor config.] SiF2- Menu 159
[AI3 Sensor config.] SiF3- Menu 160
[AI4 Sensor config.] SiF4- Menu 161
[AI5 Sensor config.] SiF5- Menu 162
[PI5 Sensor Configuration] SiF8- Menu 163
[PI6 Sensor Configuration] SiF9- Menu 164
[AIV1 Sensor config.] SiV1- Menu 165
[Sleep menu] SLP- Menu 166
[Boost] Sbt- Menu 168
[Advanced sleep check] AdS- Menu 168
[Wake up menu] wKP- Menu 170

SP51105 01/2025 151

Complete settings CSt-

[Sleep/Wakeup] SPW- Overview

About This Menu

Following parameters can be accessed if [PID feedback Assign] PiF is not set to [Not Configured] no.

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Verify that activating this function does not result in unsafe conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

The purpose of the "Sleep / Wake-Up" function is to stop the motor in process standstill situations.
It allows you to save energy and helps to prevent premature aging of some equipment that cannot run for a long
time at low speed because the greasing or cooling depends on the machine speed.
In a pressure-controlled pumping application:
• The purpose of the Sleep / Wake-Up function is to manage periods of the application where the water
demand is low and where it is not needed to keep the main pumps running.
• It allows you to save energy in low demand periods. Then, when the demand is increasing, the application
needs to wake up in order to meet the demand.
• Optionally, during a sleep period, a Jockey pump can be started to maintain an emergency service pressure
or meet a low water demand.
Depending on user-defined wakeup conditions, the motor is restarted automatically.

152 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Sleep/Wake-Up in PID Control Mode

When the drive is used in PID control, one of the following conditions is used to switch the application to the
sleep state:
• Sleep on low speed (when all fixed pumps are Off in case of a multi-pump application).
• Sleep on low sleep sensor value (using flow sensor for monitoring).
• Sleep on low motor power (when all fixed pumps are Off in case of a multi-pump application).
• Sleep on external condition (using drive input).
The drive is in "PID control mode" when PID is active. Typically when:
• PID is configured, and
• Channel 1 is selected, and
• PID is in automatic mode.
When the drive is in a sleep state, a wake-up condition is used to restart the application:
• Wake-up on PID Feedback level
• Wake-up on PID Error level
• Wake-up on low-pressure condition

SP51105 01/2025 153

Complete settings CSt-

Sleep Conditions in PID Control Mode

If there is no valid wake-up condition, then the system switches to the sleep mode after one of the configured
sleep conditions remains longer than [Sleep Delay] SLPd.
The sleep detection mode is selected by configuring [Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM. Then the system switches
to sleep mode if the selected condition is met:

Configuration Condition
LF sleep on flow sensor value Sensor value is below the sleep level
SW sleep on switch or external The switch input becomes active
condition
SPd sleep on speed The output frequency is below the sleep speed
PWr sleep on power level The output power is below the sleep power
or multiple conditions At least 1 of the configured condition to enter in sleep mode is met

Wake-Up Conditions in PID Control Mode

The system wakes up according to [Wake Up Mode] WuPM configuration:
• On PID Feedback level
• On PID Error level.
The system wakes up if the wake up conditions are valid for a time longer than the [Wake Up Delay] WuPd.
If [Feedback] FbK is selected, then the system wakes up and goes back in ID control mode:
• When PID feedback drops below configured [Wake Up Process Level] WuPF if PID is configured in Direct
mode, ([PID Inversion] PiC is set to [No] no).
• When PID feedback raises above configured [Wake Up Process Level] WuPF, if PID is configured in Reverse
mode ([PID Inversion] PiC is set to [Yes] YES).
If [Error] Err is selected, then the system wakes up and goes back in PID control mode:
• When PID feedback drops below ([PID reference] rPC - [Wake Up Process Error] WuPE), if PID is
configured in Direct mode ([PID Inversion] PiC is set to [No] no).
• When PID feedback raises above ([PID reference] rPC + [Wake Up Process Error] WuPE), if PID is
configured in Reverse mode ([PID Inversion] PiC is set to [Yes]YES).

Boosting Phase in PID Control Mode

When entering the sleep mode, the motor accelerates to [Sleep Boost Speed] SLbS during [Sleep Boost Time]
SLbt and then stops.
If [Sleep Boost Time] SLbt is set to 0, then the boost phase is ignored.

Initial State in PID Control Mode

Just after the system starts in automatic mode (a run order appears while in automatic mode - channel 1
already selected and PID auto):
• If a wake-up condition is met, the drive goes in PID control mode (PID started).
• If a wake-up condition is not met, the drive goes in sleep mode (PID stays stopped and motor is kept halted),
and Boosting phase is ignored.
When the control is switched to automatic mode while the motor is running (switch to channel 1 or switch to
PID auto mode for example), the drive stays in running state and switches to PID automatic mode.

Configuration of Sleep External Condition (Usage of a No Flow Switch for Example)

Sleep switch allows you to select the source of sleep external condition:
• no: no input selected for the sleep external condition.
• Lix: the sleep external condition (switch for example) is connected to DIx (the assignment is also possible
on a control bit in I/O profile).

Configuration of Sleep Sensor (Flow Sensor)

The assignment of a sleep sensor, the configuration of the selected physical input and the configuration of
scaling to process value are performed.
A sleep sensor source is selected by [Inst. Flow Assign.] FS1A which allows to select the analog or pulse
input on which the sensor is connected:
• no: no input selected for sleep sensor value.
• Aix: sleep sensor is connected to AIx.
• Aiux:: sleep sensor is connected to virtual AIUx.
• Pix: sleep sensor is connected to pulse input PIx.
The configuration of an analog input is performed.

154 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

The configuration of a pulse input is performed.

Depending on the selected source, the process range of the sensor is configured by:
• [AIx Lowest Process] AixJ, [AIx Highest Process] Aixk (without unit), when connected on an analog
input.
• [AIv1 Lowest Process] AViJ, [AIv1 Highest Process] AVik (without unit), when using the virtual analog
input.
• [DIx PulseInput Low Freq] PiLx, [DIx PulseInput High Freq] PiHx (without unit), when connected on a
pulse input configured in frequency.

SP51105 01/2025 155

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSGF>SPW>SLP

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSGF- [Generic functions]
SPW- [Sleep/Wakeup]
SLP- [Sleep menu]
SLPM [Sleep Detect Mode]
Sleep detection mode.
Settings Code/Value Description
[No] no Not configured
Factory setting
[Switch] SW System enters in sleep mode on switch condition
[Flow] LF System enters in sleep mode on low flow condition
[Speed] SPd System enters in sleep mode on speed condition
[Power] PWr System enters in sleep mode on power condition
[Multiple] or System enters in sleep mode on multiple-OR
condition

SLPW [Sleep Switch Assign]

Sleep Switch Assignment.
This parameter can be accessed if [Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM is set to [Switch] Sw or
[Multiple] or.
Select an external condition to enter in sleep mode (for example, flow switch).
Settings Code/Value Description
[Not Assigned] no Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI6] Li1...Li6 Digital input DI1...DI6
[DI11]...[DI16] Li11...Li16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O
extension module has been inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile]
io configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 in [I/O profile]
io configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with
integrated Modbus Serial in [I/O profile] io
configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with
integrated Modbus Serial in [I/O profile] io
configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a
fieldbus module in [I/O profile] io configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a
fieldbus module in [I/O profile] io configuration
[DI1 (Low level)]... [DI6 L1L...L6L Digital input DI1...DI6 used at low level
(Low level)]

156 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSGF>SPW>SLP

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSGF- [Generic functions]
SPW- [Sleep/Wakeup]
SLP- [Sleep menu]
FSIA [Inst. Flow Assign.]
Installation flow sensor assignment.
This parameter can be accessed if [Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM is set to [Flow] LF, or
g [Multiple] or.
Settings Code/Value Description
[Not Configured] no Not assigned
Factory setting
[AI1]...[AI3] Ai1...Ai3 Analog input AI1...AI3
[AI4]...[AI5] Ai4...Ai5 Analog input AI4...AI5 if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O
extension module has been inserted
[AI Virtual 1] Aiv1 Virtual analogic input 1
[DI5 PulseInput Pi5...Pi6 Digital input DI5...DI6 used as pulse input
Assignment]...[DI6 PulseInput
Assignment]

SP51105 01/2025 157

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSGF>SPW>SLP>SIF1

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSGF- [Generic functions]
SPW- [Sleep/wakeup]
SLP- [Sleep menu]
SiF1- [AI1 Sensor config.]
This menu can be accessed if:
• [Inst. Flow Assign.] FSIA is set to [AI1] Ai1, and
• [Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM is set to
• [Flow] LF, or
• [Multiple] or.
Ai1t [AI1 Type]
Configuration of analog input AI1.
Settings Code/Value Description
[Voltage] 10u 0-10 Vdc
Factory setting
[Current] 0A 0-20 mA

uiL1 [AI1 min value] 0.0...10.0 Vdc 0.0 Vdc

AI1 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.

g This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Type] Ai1t is set to [Voltage] 10u.
uiH1 [AI1 max value] 0.0...10.0 Vdc 10.0 Vdc

AI1 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.

g This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Type] Ai1t is set to [Voltage] 10u.
CrL1 [AI1 min. value] 0.0...20.0 mA 0.0 mA

AI1 current scaling parameter of 0%.

g This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Type] Ai1t is set to [Current] 0A.
CrH1 [AI1 max. value] 0.0...20.0 mA 20.0 mA

AI1 current scaling parameter of 100%.

g This parameter can be accessed if [AI1 Type] Ai1t is set to [Current] 0A.
Ai1J [AI1 Lowest Process] -32,768...32,767 0

AI1 Lowest Process.

g Value in application customer unit.
Ai1K [AI1 Highest Process] -32,768...32,767 0

AI1 Highest Process.

g Value in application customer unit.

158 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSFG>SPW>SLP>SIF2

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSGF- [Generic functions]
SPW- [Sleep/wakeup]
SLP- [Sleep menu]
SiF2- [AI2 Sensor config.]
This menu can be accessed if:
• [Inst. Flow Assign.] FS1A is set to [AI2] Ai2, and
• [Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM is set to
• [Flow] LF, or
• [Multiple] or.
AI2t [AI2 Type]
Configuration of analog input AI2.
Settings Code/ Value Description
[Voltage] 10u 0-10 Vdc
[Current] 0A 0-20 mA
Factory setting
[KTY] KtY 1 KTY84
This selection can be accessed if [AIx Th Monitoring]
tHxS is not set to [No] no
[PT1000] 1Pt3 1 PT1000 connected with 2 wires
This selection can be accessed if [AIx Th Monitoring]
tHxS is not set to [No] no
[PT100] 1Pt2 1 PT100 connected with 2 wires
This selection can be accessed if [AIx Th Monitoring]
tHxS is not set to [No] no
[3PT1000] 3Pt3 3 PT1000 connected with 2 wires
This selection can be accessed if [AIx Th Monitoring]
tHxS is not set to [No] no
[3PT100] 3Pt2 3 PT1000 connected with 2 wires
This selection can be accessed if [AIx Th Monitoring]
tHxS is not set to [No] no

uiL2 [AI2 min value]

AI2 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
g This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Type] Ai2t is set to [Voltage] 10u.
Identical to [AI1 min value] uiL1 page 158
uiH2 [AI2 max value]
AI2 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
g This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Type] Ai2t is set to [Voltage] 10u.
Identical to [AI1 max value] uiH1 page 158
CrL2 [AI2 min. value]
AI2 current scaling parameter of 0%.
g This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Type] Ai2t is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AI1 min. value] CrL1 page 158 with factory setting: 4.0 mA.
CrH2 [AI2 max. value]
AI2 current scaling parameter of 100%.
g This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Type] Ai2t is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AI1 max. value] CrH1 page 158
Ai2J [AI2 Lowest Process]
AI2 Lowest Process.
Identical to [AI1 Lowest Process] Ai1J page 158
Ai2K [AI2 Highest Process]
AI2 Highest Process.
Identical to [AI1 Highest Process] Ai1K page 158

SP51105 01/2025 159

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSFG>SPW>SLP>SIF3

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSFG- [Generic functions]
SPW- [Sleep/wakeup]
SLP- [Sleep menu]
SiF3- [AI3 Sensor config.]
This menu can be accessed if:
• [Inst. Flow Assign.] FS1A is set to [AI3] Ai3, and
• [Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM is set to
• [Flow] LF, or
• [Multiple] or.
Ai3t [AI3 Type]
Configuration of analog input AI3.
Identical to [AI2 Type] Ai2t page 158
uiL3 [AI3 min value]
AI3 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
g This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Type] Ai3t is set to [Voltage] 10u.
Identical to [AI1 min value] uiL1 page 158
uiH3 [AI3 max value]
AI3 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
g This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Type] Ai3t is set to [Voltage] 10u.
Identical to [AI1 max value] uiH1 page 158
CrL3 [AI3 min. value]
AI3 current scaling parameter of 0%.
g This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Type] Ai3t is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AI1 min. value] CrL1 page 158 with factory setting: 4.0 mA..
CrH3 [AI3 max. value]
AI3 current scaling parameter of 100%.
g This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Type] Ai3t is set to [Current] 0A.
Identical to [AI1 max. value] CrH1 page 158
Ai3J [AI3 Lowest Process]
AI3 Lowest Process.
Identical to [AI1 Lowest Process] Ai1J page 158
Ai3K [AI3 Highest Process]
AI3 Highest Process.
Identical to [AI1 Highest Process] Ai1K page 158

160 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSFG>SPW>SLP>SIF4

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSFG- [Generic functions]
SPW- [Sleep/wakeup]
SLP- [Sleep menu]
SiF4- [AI4 Sensor config.]
This menu can be accessed if:
• [Inst. Flow Assign.] FS1A is set to [AI4] Ai4, and
• [Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM is set to
• [Flow] LF, or
• [Multiple] or.
Ai4t [AI4 Type]
Configuration of analog input AI4.
g This parameter can be accessed if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O extension module has been inserted.
Settings Code/Value Description
[Voltage] 10u 0-10 Vdc
[Current] 0A 0-20 mA
Factory setting
[Voltage +/-] n10u -10/+10 Vdc

uiL4 [AI4 min value]

AI4 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
g Identical to [AI1 min value] uiL1 page 158
uiH4 [AI4 max value]
AI4 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
g Identical to [AI1 max value] uiH1 page 158
CrL4 [AI4 min. value]
AI4 current scaling parameter of 0%.
g Identical to [AI1 min. value] CrL1 page 158.
CrH4 [AI4 max. value]
AI4 current scaling parameter of 100%.
g Identical to [AI1 max. value] CrH1 page 158
Ai4J [AI4 Lowest Process]
AI4 Lowest Process.
Identical to [AI1 Lowest Process] Ai1J page 158
Ai4K [AI4 Highest Process]
AI4 Highest Process.
Identical to [AI1 Highest Process] Ai1K page 158

SP51105 01/2025 161

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSFG>SPW>SLP>SIF5

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSFG- [Generic functions]
SPW- [Sleep/wakeup]
SLP- [Sleep menu]
SiF5- [AI5 Sensor config.]
This menu can be accessed if:
• [Inst. Flow Assign.] FS1A is set to [AI5] Ai5, and
• [Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM is set to
• [Flow] LF, or
• [Multiple] or.
Ai5t [AI5 Type]
Configuration of analog input AI5.
g This parameter can be accessed if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O extension module has been inserted.
Identical to [AI4 Type] Ai4t page 161
uiL5 [AI5 min value]
AI5 voltage scaling parameter of 0%.
g Identical to [AI1 min value] uiL1 page 158
uiH5 [AI5 max value]
AI5 voltage scaling parameter of 100%.
g Identical to [AI1 max value] uiH1 page 158
CrL5 [AI5 min. value]
AI5 current scaling parameter of 0%.
g Identical to [AI1 min. value] CrL1 page 158.
CrH5 [AI5 max. value]
AI5 current scaling parameter of 100%.
g Identical to [AI1 max. value] CrH1 page 158
Ai45 [AI5 Lowest Process]
AI5 Lowest Process.
Identical to [AI1 Lowest Process] Ai1J page 158
Ai5K [AI5 Highest Process]
AI5 Highest Process.
Identical to [AI1 Highest Process] Ai1K page 158

162 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSFG>SPW>SLP>SIF8

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSFG- [Generic functions]
SPW- [Sleep/wakeup]
SLP- [Sleep menu]
SiF8- [PI5 Sensor Config]
This menu can be accessed if:
• [Inst. Flow Assign.] FS1A is set to [DI5 PulseInput Assignment] Pi5, and
• [Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM is set to
• [Flow] LF, or
• [Multiple] or.
PiL5 [DI5 PulseInput Low Freq] 0.00...30,000.00 Hz 0.00 Hz

DI5 pulse input low frequency.

PiH5 [DI5 PulseInput High Freq] 0.00...30.00 kHz 30.00 kHz

DI5 pulse input high frequency.

Pi5J [DI5 Min Process] -32,767...32,767 0

Minimum process value for selected input.

Pi5K [DI5 Max Process] -32,767...32,767 0

Maximum process value for selected input.

SP51105 01/2025 163

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSFG>SPW>SLP>SIF9

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

CSFG- [Generic functions]
SPW- [Sleep/wakeup]
SLP- [Sleep menu]
SiF9- [PI6 Sensor Config]
Identical to [DI5 Sensor Configuration] SiF8- Menu page 163
This menu can be accessed if:
• [Inst. Flow Assign.] FS1A is set to [DI6 PulseInput Assignment] Pi6, and
• [Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM is set to
• [Flow] LF, or
• [Multiple] or.
PiL6 [DI6 PulseInput Low Freq]
DI6 pulse input low frequency.
PiH6 [DI6 PulseInput High Freq]
DI6 pulse input high frequency.
Pi6J [DI6 Min Process]
Minimum process value for selected input.
Pi6K [DI5 Max Process]
Maximum process value for selected input.

164 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSFG>SPW>SLP>SIV1

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

CSFG- [Generic functions]
SPW- [Sleep/wakeup]
SLP- [Sleep menu]
SiV1- [AIV1 Sensor config.]
This menu can be accessed if:
• [Inst. Flow Assign.] FS1A is set to [AI Virtual 1] Aiu1, and
• [Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM is set to
• [Flow] LF, or
• [Multiple] or.
AiC1 [AIV1 Channel Assign]
Channel assignment for virtual analog input AIV1.
Settings Code/Value Description

[Not Configured] no Not assigned

Factory setting
[Ref. Freq-Modbus] Mdb Reference frequency via Modbus

[Ref. Freq-Com. Module] nEt Reference frequency via fieldbus module if a fieldbus
module has been inserted

Au1J [AIV1 Lowest Process] -32,767...32,767 0

AI virtual x: minimum process value.

Au1K [AIV1 Highest Process] -32,767...32,767 0

AI virtual x: maximum process value.

SP51105 01/2025 165

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSFG>SPW>SLP

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

CSFG- [Generic functions]
SPW- [Sleep/wakeup]
SLP- [Sleep menu]
SLnL [Sleep Flow Level] [No] no to 32,767 [No] no

Sleep flow level.

g
Sensor level under which the system should enter the sleep mode (Zero value to
 deactivate).
This menu can be accessed if:
• [Inst. Flow Assign.] FS1A is not set to [Not Configured] no, and
• [Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM is set to
• [Flow] LF, or
• [Multiple] or.
Unit: [Flow rate unit] SuFr (for example, %, l/s; m3/h)
SLSL [Sleep Min Speed] 0...500.0 Hz [No] no

Sleep flow level.

g Speed level under which the system should enter the sleep mode.
 This parameter can be accessed if:
• [Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM is set to [Speed] Spd, or
• [Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM is set to [Multiple] or.
SLPr [Sleep Power Level] 0...[Nominal Motor [No] no
Power] nPr
g Sleep power level.
 Power level under which the system should enter the sleep mode.
This parameter can be accessed if:
• [Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM is set to [Power] pwr, or
• [Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM is set to [Multiple] or.
SLPd [Sleep delay] 0...3,600 s 20 s

Sleep delay.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM is not set to
 [Not Configured] no.

166 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSFG>SPW>SLP>SBT

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

CSFG- [Generic functions]
SPW- [Sleep/wakeup]
SLP- [Sleep menu]
Sbt- [Boost]
Following parameters can be accessed if [Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM is not set to
[No] no.
SLbS [Sleep Boost Speed] 0...599.0 Hz [No] no
g Sleep boost speed.

SLbt [Sleep Boost Time] 0...3,600 s [No] no
g Sleep boost time.


SP51105 01/2025 167

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSFG>SPW>SLP>ADS

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

CSFG- [Generic functions]
SPW- [Sleep/wakeup]
SLP- [Sleep menu]
AdS- [Advanced sleep check]
This function can be activated if:
[Type of control] toCt is set to [PRESSURE] PrESS and,
[Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM is not set to [No] no.

168 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSFG>SPW>SLP>ADS

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSFG- [Generic functions]
SPW- [Sleep/wakeup]
SLP- [Sleep menu]
AdS- [Advanced sleep check]

ASLM [Sleep Mode]

Advanced sleep mode.
 Settings Code/Value Description

[No] no No
Factory setting
[YES] YES Yes

ASLC [Sleep Condition] 0...[High Speed] HSP 0.0 Hz

g
Advanced sleep verifies speed condition.
 This parameter can be accessed if [Sleep Mode] ASLM is not set to [No] no.
ASLd [Sleep Check Delay] 0...9,999 s 20 s
g Advanced sleep verifies delay.
This parameter can be accessed if [Sleep Mode] ASLM is not set to [No] no.

ASLr [Check Sleep Ref Spd] 0...[High Speed] HSP 0.0 Hz
g Advanced sleep verifies speed reference.
This parameter can be accessed if [Sleep Mode] ASLM is not set to [No] no.


SP51105 01/2025 169

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSGF>SPW>WKP

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSFG- [Generic functions]
SPW- [Sleep/wakeup]
WKP- [Wake up menu]
This menu can be accessed if [Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM is not set to [Not Configured]
no.
WuPM [Wake Up Mode]
Wake-up mode.
g Settings Code/Value Description

[Feedback] FbK Wake-up on PID feedback level

Factory setting
[Error] Err Wake-up on PID error level

WuPF [Wake Up Process Level] [Min PID feedback] 0

g PiF1...[Max PID
feedback] PiF2
 Wake-up process value level.
This parameter can be accessed if [Wake Up Mode] WuPM is set to [FeedBack] Fbk.
WuPE [Wake Up Process Error] 0...[Max PID feedback] 0.0 Hz
g PiF2

Wake-up process value error level.

 This parameter can be accessed if [Wake Up Mode] WuPM is set to [Error] Err.
WuPd [Wake Up Delay] 0...3,600 s 0s
g Wake-up delay.
 This parameter can be accessed if [Wake Up Mode] WuPM is set to [Error] Err.

170 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.14
[Generic functions] - [Threshold reached]

[Generic functions] - [Threshold reached]

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSFG>THRE

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSFG- [Generic functions]
tHrE- [Threshold reached]
CtdL [Low I Threshold] 0...1.5 in 0.2 A

 Current low threshold value (for [Low Current Reached] CtAL warning).
Ctd [High Current Thd] 0...1.5 in Drive nominal current

 Current high threshold value (for [Current Thd Reached] CtA warning).
FtdL [Low Freq. Threshold] 0.0...500.0 Hz 0,0 Hz

 Motor low frequency threshold (for [Mot Freq Low Thd] FtAL warning).
Ftd [Motor Freq Thd] 0.0...500.0 Hz 50.0 Hz

 Motor frequency threshold (for [Mot Freq High Thd] FtA warning).
F2dL [2 Freq. Threshold] 0.0...500.0 Hz 0.0 Hz

 Motor low frequency second threshold (for [Mot Freq Low Thd 2] F2AL warning).
F2d [Freq. threshold 2] 0.0...500.0 Hz 50.0 Hz

 Motor frequency threshold 2 (for [Mot Freq High Thd 2] F2A warning).
ttd [Motor Thermal Thd] 0...118% 100%

 Motor thermal state threshold (for [Motor Therm Thd reached] tSA warning).
rtd [Reference high Thd] 0.0...500.0 Hz 0.0 Hz

 Reference frequency high threshold (for [Ref Freq High Thd reached] rtAH warning).
rtdL [Reference low Thd] 0.0...500.0 Hz 0.0 Hz

 Reference frequency low threshold (for [Ref Freq Low Thd reached] rtAL warning).

SP51105 01/2025 171

Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.15
[Generic functions] - [Mains contactor command]

[Generic functions] - [Mains contactor command]

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSFG>LLC

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSFG- [Generic functions]
LLC- [Mains contactor command]
The line contactor closes every time a run command (forward or reverse) is sent and opens
after every stop, as soon as the drive is locked. For example, if the stop mode is stop on
ramp, the contactor opens when the motor reaches zero speed.
NOTE: The drive control power supply must be provided via an external 24 Vdc source.

NOTICE
DAMAGE TO THE DRIVE
Do not use this function at intervals of less than 60 s.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.
Example circuit (24 Vdc power supply):

DI• = Run command [Forward] Frd or [Reverse Assign]rrS

R•A/R•C = [Mains Contactor] LLC
DIn = [Device Lock] LES
NOTE: The Run/Reset key must be pressed once the emergency stop key has been
released.

172 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSGF>LLC

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

CSFG- [Generic functions]
LLC- [Mains contactor command]
LLC [Mains Contactor]
Mains contactor control.
Settings Code/Value Description

[No] no Not assigned

Factory setting
[R1]...[R3] r1...r3 Relay output R1...R3

[R4]...[R6] r4...r6 Relay output R4...R6 if XDIO-EX2-V01 relay output

option module has been inserted
[DQ11 Digital Output]... do11...do12 Digital output DQ11...DQ12 if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O
[DQ12 Digital Output] extension module has been inserted

LES [Device Lock]

Drive lock assignment.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Mains Contactor] LLC is not set to
[Not Assigned] no.
The drive locks when the assigned input or bit changes to 0.
Settings Code/Value Description

[Not Assigned] no Not assigned

Factory setting
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile]
io configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 in [I/O profile]
io configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with
integrated Modbus Serial in [I/O profile] io
configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with
integrated Modbus Serial in [I/O profile] io
configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a
fieldbus module in [I/O profile] io configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a
fieldbus module in [I/O profile] io configuration
[DI1 (Low level)]... L1L...L6L Digital input DI1...DI6 used at low level
[DI6 (Low level)]
[DI11 (Low level)]... L11L...L16L Digital input DI11...DI16 used at low level if XDIO-
[DI16 (Low level)] EX1-V01 I/O extension module has been inserted

LCt [Mains V. time out] 1...999 s 5s

g Monitoring time for closing of line contactor.

SP51105 01/2025 173

Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.16
[Generic functions] - [Parameters switching]

[Generic functions] - [Parameters switching]

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSFG>MLP

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSFG- [Generic functions]
MLP- [Parameters switching]
A set of 1 to 15 parameters from the [Parameter Selection] SPS list page 175 can be selected
and 2 or 3 different values assigned. These 2 or 3 sets of values can then be switched using 1
or 2 digital inputs or control word bits. This switching can be performed during operation
(motor running). It can also be controlled based on 1 or 2 frequency thresholds, whereby each
threshold acts as a digital input (0 = threshold not reached, 1 = threshold reached).
Values 1 Values 2 Values 3
Parameter 1 Parameter 1 Parameter 1 Parameter 1
... ... ... ...
Parameter 15 Parameter 15 Parameter 15 Parameter 15
Input DI or bit or frequency 0 1 0 or 1
threshold 2 values
Input DI or bit or frequency 0 0 1
threshold 3 values
NOTE: Do not modify the parameters in [Parameter Selection] SPS page 175, because any
modifications made in this menu will be lost on the next power-up. The parameters can be
adjusted during operation in the [Parameters switching] MLP- menu, on the active
configuration.
CHA1 [2 Parameter sets]
Parameter switching assignment 1.
Switching 2 parameter sets.
Settings Code/Value Description
[Not Assigned] no Not assigned
Factory setting
[Mot Freq High Thd] FtA Motor frequency high threshold reached
[Mot Freq High Thd 2] F2A Second frequency threshold reached
[DI1]...[DI6] Li1...Li6 Digital input DI1...DI6
[DI11]...[DI16] Li11...Li16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O extension
module has been inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile] io
configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 regardless of
configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with integrated
Modbus Serial in [I/O profile] io configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with integrated
Modbus Serial regardless of configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a fieldbus
module in [I/O profile] io configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a fieldbus
module regardless of configuration

CHA2 [3 Parameter sets]

Parameter switching assignment 2.
Identical to [2 Parameter sets] CHA1.
Switching 3 parameter sets.
NOTE: In order to obtain 3 parameter sets, it is necessary to configure first
[2 Parameter sets] CHA1.

174 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSFG>MLP

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSFG- [Generic functions]
MLP- [Parameters switching]
SPS [Parameter Selection]
This parameter can be accessed if [2 Parameter sets] CHA1 is not set to
[Not Assigned] no.
Making an entry in this parameter opens a window containing all the adjustment
parameters that can be accessed. Select 1 to 15 parameters using OK key. Parameter(s)
can also be deselected using OK key.
Available parameters for parameters switching function are:
Parameter Code
[Ramp increment] inr
[Acceleration] ACC
[Deceleration] dEC
[Acceleration 2] AC2
[Deceleration 2] dE2
[Begin Acc round] tA1
[End Acc round] tA2
[Begin Dec round] tA3
[End Dec round] tA4
[Low Speed] LSP
[High Speed] HSP
[Motor Th Current] itH
[Inertia Factor] SPGu
[IR compensation] uFr
[Ramp Divider] dCF
[DC Inj Level 1] idC
[DC Inj Time 1] tdi
[DC Inj Level 2] idC2
[DC Inj Time 2] tdC
[Auto DC inj Level 1] SdC1
[Auto DC Inj Time 1] tdC1
[Auto DC inj Level 2] SdC2
[Auto DC Inj Time 2] tdC2
[Switching frequency] SFr
[Current Limitation] CLi
[Low Speed Timeout] tLS
[Preset speed 2]... SP2... SP16
[Preset speed 16]
[Ref PID Preset 2] rP2
[Ref PID Preset 3] rP3
[Freq. threshold 2] F2d
[2 Freq. Threshold] F2dL

SP51105 01/2025 175

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSFG>MLP

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSFG- [Generic functions]
MLP- [Parameters switching]

Parameter Code
[Skip Frequency] JPF
[Skip Frequency 2] JF2
[3rd Skip Frequency] JF3
[Skip Freq.Hysteresis] JFH

PS1 [Set 1] to [Set 3]

to
pS3 3 possible sets of values.
Making an entry in this menu opens a settings window containing the selected parameters
in the order in which they were selected.
Access to each menu in order to configure their own set of values.

176 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.17
[Generic functions] - [S top after speed timeout]

[Generic functions] - [Stop after speed timeout]

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSFG>PRSP

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSFG- [Generic functions]
PrSP- [Stop after speed timeout]
Sleep/Wake-Up in Speed Control Mode
The drive is in Speed control mode, when PID is not active, typically when:
• PID is not configured (the motor speed setpoint is controlled by an external PLC, for
example).
• PID is in manual mode (manual application mode, for example).
• PID is not active because Channel 1 is not selected (forced local mode enabled, for
example).
When the drive is used in Speed Control (PID not used or not active), a speed condition is
used to switch the application to the sleep state. When the drive is in sleep state, the motor
is restarted if the sleep condition disappears.
This function avoids prolonged operation at low speeds when neither useful nor compliant
with the system constraints. It stops the motor after a period of operation at reduced
speed. This time and speed can be adjusted.
In Speed control mode, Sleep/Wake-up is managed according to the following rules:
• The motor is stopped when [Pre-Ramp Ref Freq] FrH and [Motor Frequency] rFr
become and stay lower than [Low speed] LSP + [Sleep Offset Thres.] SLE during
[Low Speed Timeout] tLS.
• The motor is restarted when [Pre-Ramp Ref Freq] FrH > [Low speed] LSP + [Sleep
Offset Thres.] SLE.

1 Nominal [Low Speed Timeout] tLS function action: after [Low Speed Timeout] tLS
time, the motor is stopped according to the current deceleration ramp
2 [Pre-Ramp Ref Freq] FrH becomes greater than [Low speed] LSP + [Sleep Offset
Thres.] SLE and run order still present [Low Speed Timeout] tLS function is
deactivated
3 [Low Speed Timeout] tLS function is not activated because [Pre-Ramp Ref Freq] FrH
becomes greater than [Low speed] LSP + [Sleep Offset Thres.] SLE before [Low Speed
Timeout] tLS has expired
4 [Low Speed Timeout] tLS function is not activated because [Motor Frequency] rFr
becomes greater than [Low speed] LSP + [Sleep Offset Thres.] SLE before [Low Speed
Timeout] tLS has expired
5 [Low Speed Timeout] tLS function is not activated because [Pre-Ramp Ref Freq] FrH
stays greater than [Low speed] LSP + [Sleep Offset Thres.] SLE

SP51105 01/2025 177

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSFG>PRSP

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSFG- [Generic functions]
PrSP- [Stop after speed timeout]
tLS [Low Speed Timeout] 0.0...999.9 s 0.0 s

 Low speed timeout

SLE [Sleep Offset Thres.] 1.0...[Max Frequency] 1.0 Hz
tFr
g Sleep offset threshold.
This parameter can be accessed if [Low Speed Timeout] tLS is not set to 0.
 Adjustable restart threshold (offset) following a stop after prolonged operation at [Low
speed] LSP + [Sleep Offset Thres.] SLE, in Hz. The motor restarts if the reference rises
above (LSP + SLE) and if a run command is still present.

178 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.18
[Generic functions] - [Advanced sleep check] AdS- Menu

[Generic functions] - [Advanced sleep check] AdS- Menu

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSGF>ADS

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSFG- [Generic functions]
AdS- [Advanced sleep check]
This function can be activated if:
[Type of control] toCt is set to [PRESSURE]PrESS and,
[Sleep Detect Mode] SLPM is not set to [No] no.

SP51105 01/2025 179

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSGF>ADS

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

CSFG- [Generic functions]
AdS- [Advanced sleep check]

180 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSFG>ADS

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

CSFG- [Generic functions]
AdS- [Advanced sleep check]
ASLN [Sleep Mode]
Advanced sleep mode.
 Settings Code/Value Description

[No] no Not assigned

Factory setting
[Yes] YES Yes

ASLC [Sleep Condition] 0...[High Speed] HSP 0.0 Hz

g Advanced sleep verifies speed condition.
 This parameter can be accessed if [Sleep Mode] ASLM is not set to [No] no.

ASLd [Sleep Check Delay] 0...9,999 s 20 s

g Advanced sleep verifies delay.
 This parameter can be accessed if [Sleep Mode] ASLM is not set to [No] no.

ASLr [Check Sleep Ref Spd] 0...599.0 Hz 0.0 Hz

g Advanced sleep verifies speed reference.
 This parameter can be accessed if [Sleep Mode] ASLM is not set to [No] no.

SP51105 01/2025 181

Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.19
[Generic functions] - [Booster control]

[Generic functions] - [Booster control]

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[System Architecture] Mpq- Menu 183
[Pumps configuration] puMp- Menu 187
[Booster control] bSC- Menu 211
[Stage/Destage condition] SdCM- Menu 212

Introduction
The aim of the booster control function is to maintain the desired pressure or flow at the outlet of the pumps
according to the demand by:
• Managing the velocity of the variable speed pump connected to the drive.
• Staging/De-staging the auxiliary fixed speed pumps.

182 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSFG>BST>MPQ

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSFG- [Generic functions]
bSt- [Booster control]
MPq- [System architecture]
This menu is used to define the equipment architecture.
The architecture is chosen by setting [Pump System Archi] MPSA to [Single Drive]
undoL: one variable speed pump and up to five fixed speed pumps.
In single drive architecture, the total number of pumps is set with [Nb Of Pumps] MPPn:
• With lead pump alternation, using interlocked switching relays for all pumps to connect
them on mains or on the drive.
• Without lead pump alternation, using digital outputs to command the auxiliary pumps
(with soft starters for example). The lead pump is always connected to the drive.
In multiple drives architecture, the number of pumps is set with [Nb of Devices] MPGn.
Lead pump alternation is not possible in this case.
Pump Cycling Mode
This functionality allows changing the start order of all available pumps in order to manage
their wear. There are several ways to perform the pump cycling strategy by setting [Pump
Cycling Mode] MPPC:
Cycling based on pump order:
• [FIFO] FiFo mode: pumps are started and stopped in ascending order
• [LIFO] LiFo mode: pumps are started in ascending order while they are
stopped in descending order
Cycling based on running time:
• [Runtime] rtiME: the available pump with the lowest running time is started
first and the running pump with the highest running time is stopped first.
Lead Pump Alternation
The lead pump alternation function allows permuting the available pumps in order that
each pump can become the lead pump (variable speed pump) instead of an auxiliary pump
(fixed speed pump).
The lead pump is the first pump to be started and the last pump to be stopped. It is always
associated to the variable speed drive.
The function can be activated by setting [Lead Pump Altern.] MPLA:
[No] no: no lead pump alternation, the pump 1 is always the lead pump. The pump cycling
is applied only on auxiliary pumps.
[Stage] StAGE: The lead pump is permuted between all available pumps at each stage.
In this mode a pump cycling strategy is followed to stage or destage a pump.
• When the needed pressure exceeds the already running pumps capability, the
next pump is staged as lead pump and previous pumps becomes fixed speed
pumps.
• The time delay needed to switch between pumps can be adjust using [Altern
Wait Time] MPAt.
• When the needed pressure becomes lower than the lead pump capability, the fixed
speed pumps are destaged following the [Pump Cycling Mode] MPPC.
When lead pump alternation is activated, catch on fly function should be configured to
reduce over current when a pump is started as the lead pump while it was running as
auxiliary pump before. It is also possible to set [Pump Ready Delay] MPid to delay the
availability of an auxiliary pump for a new start after it has been stopped.
Automatic Period Cycling
This function is used to balance the duty sharing of all the pumps of the MultiPump
architecture.
It forces the pump alternation based on the time defined by [Pump Auto Cycling] MPCP.
The goal is to extend the life time of each pump.

SP51105 01/2025 183

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSFG>BST>MPQ

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSFG- [Generic functions]
bSt- [Booster control]
MPq- [System architecture]
Display Parameters
A set of parameters to display the system is available in [Application Parameters] APr-,
[Variable Speed Pump] MPP-:
• The quantity of pumps available [Available Pumps] MPAn and the quantity of pump
already staged [Nb of Staged Pumps] MPSn.
• The number of the pump selected to be the lead pump [Lead Pump] PLid.
• The number of the next pump to be staged [Next Staged Pump] PntS and de-staged
[Next Destaged Pump] Pntd.
• For each pump (pump 1 in the example):
• The state [Pump 1 State] P1S
• The type [Pump 1 Type] P1t
• The cumulated run time [Pump 1 Runtime] P1ot
• The cumulated number of starts [Pump 1 Nb Starts] P1nS
Example of Architecture Without Lead Pump Alternation and Two Fixed Speed Pumps

184 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSFG>BST>MPQ

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSFG- [Generic functions]
bSt- [Booster control]
MPq- [System architecture]
Pump 2 and pump 3 are controlled by relay outputs R2 and R3.
The state of each pump is provided to the drive via digital inputs DI2 and DI3:
• 1 = the pump is ready to operate.
• 0 = the pump is not available.
KM1 is switched ON when CP1 is activated. CP1 is controlled via the relay output R2.
KM2 is switched ON when CP2 is activated. CP2 is controlled via the relay output R3.
Q1 and Q2 must be switched ON to have both pump 2 and pump 3 ready to operate.
Example of Architecture with Lead Pump Alternation on Three Pumps

SP51105 01/2025 185

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSFG>BST>MPQ

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSFG- [Generic functions]
bSt- [Booster control]
MPq- [System architecture]
Each pump is controlled by a relay output:
• Pump 1 control via relay output R2.
• Pump 2 control via relay output R3.
• Pump 3 control via relay output R4.
The state of each pump is provided to the drive via digital inputs DI2, DI3, and DI4:
• 1 = the pump is ready to operate.
• 0 = the pump is not available.
If the relay output R2 is the first activated, the pump 1 becomes the lead pump. CP1 is
switched ON via relay output R2, KD1 is switched ON and the pump 1 is connected to the
drive.
The other pumps cannot be connected to the drive thanks to KD1 (switched OFF) which
prevent KD2 and KD3 to be activated when CP2 and CP3 are switched ON. The other pumps
become auxiliary pumps and they are connected to the supply mains trough KM2 and KM3
which are activated when, respectively, CP2 and CP3 are switched ON, that is, when R3 and
R4 are activated.
When relay output R3 is the first activated, the pump 2 becomes the lead pump. The other
pumps become auxiliary pumps which are connected to the supply mains via KM1 and
KM3.
When relay output R4 is the first activated, the pump 3 becomes the lead pump. The other
pumps become auxiliary pumps which are connected to the supply mains via KM1 and
KM2.
Q1, Q2, and Q3 must be switched ON to have all pumps ready to operate.
To change the lead pump, it is necessary to deactivate all relay outputs which means that
all pumps must be already stopped. It is then possible to decide which relay output to be
activated first and so defining the new lead pump.
MPSA [Pump System Archi]
Pump system architecture selection.
Settings Code/Value Description
[Mono-Pump] no Multi-pump control deactivated
Factory setting
[Single Drive] vndoL Single drive with or without auxiliary pumps

MPPn [Nb Of Pumps] 1...6 1

g Number of pumps.
This parameter can be accessed if [Pump System Archi] MPSA is set to [Single Drive]
vndoL.

186 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSFG>BST>MPQ>PUMP

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSFG- [Generic functions]
bSt- [Booster control]
MPq- [System architecture]
PUMP- [Pumps Configuration]
Input and Output Configuration for Each Pump
For each pump (pump 1 in the example), it is possible to set:

• The drive digital output for the command: [Pump 1 Cmd Assign] MPo1 if [Lead Pump
Alternation] MpLA is not set to [No] no.
• The drive digital input for the pump availability information: [Pump 1 Ready Assign
MPi1. If not configured, the pump is considered as always available.

An internal configurable delay [Pump Ready Delay] MPid is available. When the digital
input assigned to [Pump 1 Ready Assign] MPi1 switches to the active state or after de-
staging, the related pump is considered as not available during [Pump Ready Delay]
MPid.
This is used to wait that the auxiliary pumps are stopped and that all contactors between
the drive and the motor (if existing) are closed before staging.
Warnings and Errors Handling
If the available capacity of the system is exceeded:

• [MP Capacity Warn] MPCA warning is active if the number of pumps to be started is
higher than the number of available pumps.
NOTE: If the number of available pump is equal to 0, the warning is active.
If the selected lead pump is not available:

• A [Lead Pump Warn] MPLA warning is active if the lead pump becomes not available
while in run or if there is no lead pump available at run command.
• A [Lead Pump Error] MPLF error is active if the lead pump becomes not available
while in run. If configured, the delay [Pump Ready Delay] MPid is applied on the error
triggering if there is no lead pump available at run command.
This error is handled whatever the active command channel if booster control or level
control function is configured.
The drive response to a [Lead Pump Error] MPLF is set with [MultiPump ErrorResp]
MPFb parameter.
MPo1 [Pump 1 Cmd Assign]
g Command assignment for pump 1.
This parameter can be accessed if:
[Pump System Archi] MPSA is set to [Multi Drives] nVSd or [Multi Masters] nVSdr or,
[Pump System Archi] MPSA is set to [Single Drive] VndoL and [Nb Of Pumps] Mppn
is set to [1] 1 or above.
This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] Mppn is set to [1] 1 or above.
Settings Code/Value Description
[No] no Not assigned
Factory setting
[R1]...[R3] r1...r3 Relay output R1...R3
[R4]...[R6] r4...r6 Relay output R4...R6 if XDIO-EX2-V01 relay output
option module has been inserted
[DQ11 Digital Output]... do11...do1 Digital output DQ11...DQ12 if XDIO-EX1 V01 I/O
[DQ12 Digital Output] 2 extension module has been inserted

SP51105 01/2025 187

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSFG>BST>MPQ>PUMP

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSFG- [Generic functions]
bSt- [Booster control]
MPq- [System architecture]
PUMP- [Pumps Configuration]
MPi1 [Pump 1 Ready Assign]
g Pump 1 ready to operate assignment.
This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] Mppn is set to [1] 1 or above.
Settings Code/Value Description
[Not Assigned] no Not assigned
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI6] Li1...Li6 Digital input DI1...DI6
[DI11]...[DI16] Li11...Li16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O
extension module has been inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile]
io configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 regardless of
configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with
integrated Modbus Serial in [I/O profile] io
configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with
integrated Modbus Serial regardless of configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a
fieldbus module in [I/O profile] io configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a
fieldbus module regardless of configuration
[DI1 (Low level)] ...[DI6 L1L...L6L Digital input DI1...DI6 used at low level
(Low level)]

MPo2 [Pump 2 Cmd Assign]

Command assignment for pump 2.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] Mppn is set to [2] 2 or above.
Identical to [Pump 1 Cmd Assign] Mpo1 page 187
MPi2 [Pump 2 Ready Assign]
Pump 2 ready to operate assignment.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] Mppn is set to [2] 2 or above.
Identical to [Pump 1 Ready Assign] Mpi1 page 188
MPo3 [Pump 3 Cmd Assign]
Command assignment for pump 3.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] Mppn is set to [3] 3 or above.
Identical to [Pump 1 Cmd Assign] Mpo1 page 187
MPi3 [Pump 3 Ready Assign]
Pump 3 ready to operate assignment.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] Mppn is set to [3] 3 or above.
Identical to [Pump 1 Ready Assign] Mpi1 page 188
MPo4 [Pump 4 Cmd Assign]
Command assignment for pump 4.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] Mppn is set to [4] 4 or above.
Identical to [Pump 1 Cmd Assign] Mpo1 page 187
MPi4 [Pump 4 Ready Assign]
Pump 4 ready to operate assignment.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] Mppn is set to [4] 4 or above.
Identical to [Pump 1 Ready Assign] Mpi1 page 188

188 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSFG>BST>MPQ>PUMP

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSFG- [Generic functions]
bSt- [Booster control]
MPq- [System architecture]
PUMP- [Pumps Configuration]
MPo5 [Pump 5 Cmd Assign]

Command assignment for pump 5.

g This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] Mppn is set to [5] 5 or above.
Identical to [Pump 1 Cmd Assign] Mpo1 page 187
MPi5 [Pump 5 Ready Assign]
Pump 5 ready to operate assignment.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] Mppn is set to [5] 5 or above.
Identical to [Pump 1 Ready Assign] Mpi1 page 188
MPo6 [Pump 6 Cmd Assign]
Command assignment for pump 6.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] Mppn is set to [6] 6 or above.
Identical to [Pump 1 Cmd Assign] Mpo1 page 187
MPi6 [Pump 6 Ready Assign]
Pump 6 ready to operate assignment.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Nb Of Pumps] Mppn is set to [6] 6 or above.
Identical to [Pump 1 Ready Assign] Mpi1 page 188

SP51105 01/2025 189

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSFG>PRSP>MPQ

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSFG- [Generic functions]
bSt- [Booster control]
MPq- [System architecture]
MPPC [Pump Cycling Mode]
Pump cycling mode.
Settings Code/Value Description
[FIFO] FiFo First in first out
[LIFO] LiFo Last in first out
Factory setting
[Runtime] rtiME Pump runtime

MPLA [Lead Pump Alternation]

Lead pump alternation.
This parameter can be accessed if [Pump System Archi] MPSA is set to [Single Drive]
VndoL.
NOTE: If [Lead Pump Alternation] MPLA is not set to [No] no, the [Pump 1 Cmd Assign]
Mpo1 and [Pump 1 Ready Assign] Mpi1 have to be configured.
Settings Code/Value Description
[No] no Last in first out
Factory setting
[Stage] StAGE Lead pump permutation at each stage

MPAt [Altern Wait Time] 0...999 ms 500 ms

Alternation wait time.

MPCP [Pump Auto Cycling] 0.0...24.0 h 0.0 h

Pump auto cycling.

This parameter can be accessed if [Pump System Archi] MPSA is set to [Single Drive]
VndoL.
MPid [Pump Ready Delay] 0...3600 s 0s

Pump ready delay.

It corresponds to the stop time of the pumps. The pumps are considered as in running state
and can not be staged during this delay, whatever the active command channel.
MPFb [MultiPump ErrorResp]
Response to multipump error.
This parameter can be accessed if [Pump System Archi] MPSA is set to [Single Drive]
VndoL
Settings Code/Value Description
[Ignore] no Detected error ignored
[Freewheel Stop] YES Freewheel stop
Factory setting
[Per STT] Stt Stop according to [Type of stop] Stt parameter
but without an error triggered after stop
[Ramp stop] rMP Stop on ramp

190 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSFG>BST>BSC

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSFG- [Generic functions]
bSt- [Booster control]
bSC- [Booster control]
This menu is used to set the booster control parameters.
bCM [Booster Control]
Booster control activation.
Settings Code / Value Descriptions
[No] no Booster control function disabled
Factory setting
[Yes] YES Booster control function enabled

SP51105 01/2025 191

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSFG>BST>BSC>SDCM

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSFG- [Generic functions]
bSt- [Booster control]
bSC- [Booster control]
SdCM- [Stage/Destage Cond.]
Staging/Destaging on Pressure Feedback Condition
The working area [Boost Working range] bCWA is expressed in a % of the reference value
for the pressure.
Staging occurs if PID error (taking into account [PID Inversion] PiC) stays below the
working area while PID controller is at high limit speed for longer than [Booster Stg Delay]
bSd.
High limit speed corresponds to limitation speed of PID (minimum between [High Speed]
HSP & [PID Max Output] PoH).
De-staging occurs if PID error (taking into account [PID Inversion] PiC) stays above
working area while PID controller is at low limit speed, for longer than [Booster Dstg Delay]
bdd.
Low limit speed corresponds to speed at which PID controller has no effect (maximum
between [Low Speed] LSP & [PID Min Output] PoL).
Staging/Destaging on Override
The override area is used whatever the configuration of the system and the strategy used.If
the pressure feedback is out of the [Booster Override Range] bCoA range, expressed in %
of the reference value for the pressure, a staging/de-staging is immediate. This increases
the reactivity of the system in case of an important and rapid variation of the demand. It
allows suppressing the staging/de-staging delay.
bCWA [Booster Working Range] 1.0...100.0% 2.0%
g Booster working area in % of the reference value for the pressure.
 Setting range in % of the reference value for the pressure.

bSd [Booster Stg Delay] 0.0..999.9 s 10.0 s

 Booster stage delay.

bdd [Booster Dstg Delay] 0.0...999.9 s 10.0 s

 Booster de-stage delay.

bCoA [Booster Override Range]
 Booster override range.
Settings Code / Value Descriptions
[No] no Booster control function disabled
Factory setting
0.1...100.0% Setting range

bSdt [Booster S/D Interval] 0.0...999.9 s 15.0 s

 Booster stage/de-stage time interval.

192 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.20
[Generic monitoring]

[Generic monitoring]

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>GPR>STPR

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
GPr- [Generic monitoring]
StPr- [Stall Monitoring]
This function helps to prevent a motor overload by monitoring the motor current and the
speed rise time.
A stalling condition is when:
• An output frequency is smaller than the stalling frequency [Stall Frequency] StP3
• And an output current is higher than the stalling current [Stall Current] StP2
• During a time longer than the stalling time [Stall Max Time] StP1
When a stalling condition occurs, a [Motor Stall Error] StF error is triggered.
StPC [Stall Monitoring]
Stall monitoring activation.
Settings Code / Value Descriptions
[No] no Function disabled
Factory setting
[Yes] YES Function denabled

StPI [Stall Max Time] 0.0...200 s 60.0 s

g Motor stall maximum time.
 This parameter can be accessed if [Stall Monitoring] StPC is not set to [No] no.

StP2 [Stall Current] 0.0...120.0% 110.0%

Stall monitoring current level, as a % of the rated motor current [Nom Motor Current] nCr.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Stall Monitoring] StPC is not set to [No] no.
 The factory setting changes to 150.0 % if [Dual rating] drt is set to [Heavy Duty] HiGh.
The setting range changes to 0.0...150.0 % if [Dual rating] drt is set to [Heavy Duty]
HiGh.
StP3 [Stall Frequency] 0.0...20.0 Hz 0.0 Hz
g Stall monitoring frequency level.
 This parameter can be accessed if [Stall Monitoring] StPC is not set to [No] no.

SP51105 01/2025 193

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>GPR>MTSP

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
GPr- [Generic Monitoring]
MtSP- [Therm sensor monit]
The thermal monitoring function helps to prevent against high temperature by monitoring
the real temperature by the drive.
PTC, PT100, PT1000, and KTY84 thermal probes are supported by this function.
The function gives the possibility to manage 2 levels of monitoring:
• A Warning level: the drive triggers an event without stopping the application.
• An Error level: the drive triggers an event and stops the application.
The thermal probe is monitored for the following detected error:
• Overheating
• Probe break (loss of signal)
• Probe short-circuit
PTC State

Short Cold Hot Open

circuit circuit

Short TH1A - 10% Open PTC Value

circuit TH1F - 10% circuit
Hysteresis
level level

Activation
[AIx Th Monitoring] tHxS allows you to activate the thermal monitoring on the related
analog input:
• [No] no: the function is disabled
• [Yes] YES: the thermal monitoring is enabled on the related AIx.

Type of Thermal Probe Selection

[AIx Type] Aixt allows you to select the type of thermal sensor(s) connected on the
related analog input:
• [No] no: no sensor
• [PTC] ptc: one to six PTC (in serial) is used
• [KTY] KtY: 1 KTY84 is used
• [PT100] 1Pt2: 1 PT100 connected with two wires is used
• [PT1000] 1Pt3: 1 PT1000 connected with two wires is used
• [PT100 in 3 wires] 1Pt23: 1 PT100 connected with three wires is used (AI4 & AI5 only)
• [PT1000 in 3 wires] 1Pt33: 1 PT1000 connected with three wires is used (AI4 & AI5
only)
• [3 PT100] 3Pt2: 3 PT100 connected with two wires is used
• [3 PT1000] 3Pt3: 3 PT1000 connected with two wires is used
• [3 PT100 in 3 wires] 3Pt23: 3 PT100 connected with three wires is used (AI4 & AI5
only)
• [3 PT1000 in 3 wires] 3Pt33: 3 PT1000 connected with three wires is used (AI4 & AI5
only)
2-wire thermal probes are supported on analog input 2 to analog input 5.
3-wire thermal probes are supported on analog input 4 and analog input 5. These inputs
are available with the I/O extension option module.
If the probe is far from the drive, the 3-wire connection is recommended as compared to a
2-wire connection.
NOTE: In case of 3 serial probes, the drive monitors the average probe values.

194 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>GPR>MTSP

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
GPr- [Generic monitoring]
MtSP- [Therm sensor monit]
Wiring for PT100 and PT1000 Probes
For 2-wire probes, the following wirings are possible:

For 3-wire probes, the following wirings are possible:

tH25 [AI2 Th Monitoring]

Activation of the thermal monitoring on AI2.
Settings Code / Value Descriptions
[No] no No
Factory setting
[Yes] YES Yes

Ai2t [AI2 Type]

AI2 assignment.
g This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Th Monitoring] tH2S is not set to [No] no.
Settings Code / Value Descriptions
[Voltage] 10u 0-10 Vdc
[Current] 0A 0-20 mA
Factory setting
[KTY] KtY 1 KTY84
This selection can be accessed if [AIx Th Monitoring]
tHxS is not set to [No] no
[PT1000] 1Pt3 1 PT1000 connected with 2 wires
This selection can be accessed if [AIx Th Monitoring]
tHxS is not set to [No] no
[PT100] 1Pt2 1 PT100 connected with 2 wires
This selection can be accessed if [AIx Th Monitoring]
tHxS is not set to [No] no
[3PT1000] 3Pt3 3 PT1000 connected with 2 wires
This selection can be accessed if [AIx Th Monitoring]
tHxS is not set to [No] no
[3PT100] 3Pt2 3 PT100 connected with 2 wires
This selection can be accessed if [AIx Th Monitoring]
tHxS is not set to [No] no

SP51105 01/2025 195

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>GPR>MTSP

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
GPr- [Generic Monitoring]
MtSP- [Therm sensor monit]
tH2b [AI2 Th Error Resp]
Thermal monitoring response to a detected error for AI2.
g This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Type] Ai2t is not set to
[Voltage] 10u, or
[Current] 0A.
Settings Code / Value Descriptions
[Ignore] no Detected error ignored
[Freewheel Stop] YES Freewheel stop
[Per STT] Stt Stop according to [Type of stop] Stt parameter
but without an error triggered after stop
[Fallback Speed] LFF Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the
detected error persists and the command has not
been removed (1)
[Ramp stop] rMP Stop on ramp
Factory setting
(1) In this case, the detected error does not trigger a stop, it is recommended to assign a relay or logic
output to its indication.

tH2F [AI2 Th Error Level] -15.0...200.0°C 110.0°C

Error detection level for AI2.

g
This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Type] Ai2t is not set to:
 • [Voltage] 10u, or
• [Current] 0A, or
• [PTC] PtC.
tH2A [AI2 Th Warn Level] -15.0...200.0°C 90.0°C

Warning level for AI2.

g
This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Type] Ai2t is not set to:
 • [Voltage] 10u, or
• [Current] 0A, or
• [PTC] PtC.
tH2v [AI2 Th Value] -15.0...200.0°C _

AI2 thermal value.

g
This parameter can be accessed if [AI2 Type] Ai2t is not set to:
• [Voltage] 10u, or
• [Current] 0A, or
• [PTC] PtC.
tH3S [AI3 Th Monitoring]
Activation of the thermal monitoring on AI3.
g Settings Code / Value Descriptions
[No] no No
Factory setting
[YES] YES Yes

196 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>GPR>MTSP

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
GPr- [Generic Monitoring]
MtSP- [Therm sensor monit]
Ai3t [AI3 Type]

AI3 assignment.
g This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Th Monitoring] tH3S is not set to [No] no.
Identical to [AI2 Type] Ai2t page 195.
tH3b [AI3 Th Error Resp]
Thermal monitoring response to a detected error for AI3.
g This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Type] Ai3t is not set to
[Voltage] 10u, or
[Current] 0A.
Settings Code / Value Descriptions
[Ignore] no Detected error ignored
[Freewheel Stop] YES Freewheel stop
[Per STT] Stt Stop according to [Type of stop] Stt parameter
but without an error triggered after stop
[Fallback Speed] LFF Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the
detected error persists and the command has not
been removed (1)
[Ramp stop] rMP Stop on ramp
Factory setting
(1) In this case, the detected error does not trigger a stop, it is recommended to assign a relay or logic
output to its indication.

tH3F [AI3 Th Error Level] -15.0...200.0°C 110.0°C

Error detection level for AI3.

g
This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Type] Ai3t is not set to:
 • [Voltage] 10u, or
• [Current] 0A, or
• [PTC] PtC.
tH3A [AI3 Th Warn Level] -15.0...200.0°C 90.0°C

Warning level for AI3.

g
This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Type] Ai3t is not set to:
 • [Voltage] 10u, or
• [Current] 0A, or
• [PTC] PtC.
tH3v [AI3 Th Value] -15.0...200.0°C _

AI23thermal value.
g
This parameter can be accessed if [AI3 Type] Ai3t is not set to:
• [Voltage] 10u, or
• [Current] 0A, or
• [PTC] PtC.

SP51105 01/2025 197

Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.21
[Error/Warning handling]

[Error/Warning handling]

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[Fault reset] rSt- Menu 199
[Auto fault reset] Atr- Menu 201
[Catch on the fly] FLr- Menu 202
[Motor thermal monit] tHt- Menu 203
[Output phase loss] oPL- Menu 205
[Input phase loss] iPL- Menu 206
[External error] EtF- Menu 207
[Undervoltage handling] uSb- Menu 210
[Ground Fault] GrFL- Menu 211
[4-20mA loss] LFL- Menu 212
[Fallback Speed] LFF- Menu 213
[Error detection disable] inH- Menu 214
[Fieldbus monitoring] CLL- Menu 216
[Communication module] CoMo- Menu 217
[Error/Warning handling] CSWM- Menu 218
[Process underload] uLd- Menu 219
[Process overload] oLd- Menu 221
[Warn grp 1 definition] A1C- Menu 222
[Warn grp 2 definition] A2C- Menu 222
[Warn grp 3 definition] A3C- Menu 222
[Warn grp 4 definition] A4C- Menu 222
[Warn grp 5 definition] A5C- Menu 222

198 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSWM>RST

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

CSWM- [Error/Warning handling]
rSt- [Fault reset]
rSF [Fault Reset Assign]
Fault reset input assignment.
g Detected errors are cleared manually when the assigned input or bit changes to 1 if the
cause of the detected error has been removed.
All errors cannot be cleared via a Fault Reset. Refer to the table in the part Diagnostics and
Troubleshooting to have the full list page 247
The STOP/RESET key on the Plain Text Display Terminal performs the same function.
Settings Code / Value Descriptions

[Not Assigned] no Not assigned

[DI1]...[DI6] Li1...Li6 Digital input DI1...DI6

Factory setting: [DI2] Li2. The setting of this
parameter may be modified depending on [Macro
Config] CFG
[DI11]...[DI16] Li11...Li16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O
extension module has been inserted
[CD00]...[CD15] Cd00...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile]
io configuration
[C101]...[C115] C101...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.15 with
integrated Modbus Serial in [I/O profile] io
configuration
[C301]...[C315] C301...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.15 with a
fieldbus module in [I/O profile] io configuration

SP51105 01/2025 199

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSWM>RST

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSWM- [Error/Warning handling]
rSt- [Fault reset]
rP [Prod Restart]
The Restart function performs a Fault Reset and then restarts the drive. During this Restart
g procedure, the drive goes through the same steps as if it had been switched off and on
again. Depending on the wiring and the configuration of the drive, this may result in
 immediate and unanticipated operation.

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
The Restart function performs a Fault Reset and restarts the drive
 Verify that activating this function does not result in unsafe conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.
Product restart.
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr mode.
This parameter can be used to reset all detected errors without having to disconnect the
drive from the supply mains.
Settings Code / Value Descriptions
[Not Assigned] no Not assigned
Factory setting
[Yes] YES Reinitialization. Press and hold down the OK key for
2 s. The parameter changes back to [No] no
automatically as soon as the operation is complete.
The drive can only be reinitialized when locked.

rPA [Prod Restart Assign]

Product restart assignment.
g The Restart function performs a Fault Reset and then restarts the drive. During this Restart
procedure, the drive goes through the same steps as if it had been switched off and on
again. Depending on the wiring and the configuration of the drive, this may result in
immediate and unanticipated operation.

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
The Restart function performs a Fault Reset and restarts the drive
 Verify that activating this function does not result in unsafe conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr mode.
Settings Code / Value Descriptions
[Not Assigned] no Function inactive
Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI6] Li1...Li6 Digital input DI1...DI6
[DI11]...[DI16] Li11...Li16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O
extension module has been inserted

200 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSWM>ATR

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSWM- [Error/Warning handling]
Atr- [Auto fault reset]
Atr [Auto Fault Reset]
Automatic fault reset.
This function can be used to automatically perform individual or multiple Fault Resets. If
the cause of the error that has triggered the transition to the operating state Fault
disappears while this function is active, the drive resumes normal operation. While the
Fault Reset attempts are performed automatically, the output signal [Operating state Fault]
is not available. If the attempts to perform the Fault Reset are not successful, the drive
remains in the operating state Fault and the output signal [Operating state Fault] becomes
active.

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
 Verify that activating this function does not result in unsafe conditions.
 Verify that the fact that the output signal "Operating state Fault" is not available while this
function is active does not result in unsafe conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.
The drive fault relay remains activated if this function is active. The speed reference and
the operating direction must be maintained.
It is recommended to use 2-wire control [2/3-Wire Control] tCC is set to [2 wire] 2C and
[2-wire type] tCt is set to [Level] LEL, refer to [2/3-Wire Control] tCC.
If the restart has not taken place once the configurable time [Fault Reset Time] tAr has
elapsed, the procedure is aborted and the response to external error. remains locked until it
is turned off and then on again.
The detected error codes, which permit this function, are listed in the Diagnostics part of
the manual.
Settings Code / Value Descriptions
[No] no Function inactive
Factory setting
[Yes] YES Automatic restart, after locking in error state, if the
detected error has disappeared and the other
operating conditions permit the restart. The restart
is performed by a series of automatic attempts
separated by increasingly longer waiting periods:
1 s, 5 s, 10 s, then 1 minute for the following
attempts.

tAr [Fault Reset Time]

Maximum time for automatic restart function
g This parameter appears if [Auto Fault Reset] Atr is set to [Yes] YES. It can be used to
limit the number of consecutive restarts on a recurrent detected error.
Settings Code / Value Descriptions
[5 minutes] 5 5 minutes
Factory setting
[10 minutes] 10 10 minutes
[30 minutes] 30 30 minutes
[1 hour] 1h 1 hour
[2 hours] 2h 2 hours
[3 hours] 3h 3 hours
[Unlimited] Ct Continuous

SP51105 01/2025 201

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSWM>FLR

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

CSWN- [Error/Warning handling]
FLr- [Catch on the fly]
FLr [Catch On Fly]
Catch on the fly.
Used to enable a smooth restart if the run command is maintained after the following
events:
• Loss of line supply or disconnection.
• Clearing clearance of current detected error or automatic restart.
• Freewheel stop.
The speed given by the drive resumes from the estimated or measured speed of the motor
at the time of the restart, then follows the ramp to the reference speed.
This function requires 2-wire level control.
When the function is operational, it activates at each run command, resulting in a slight
delay of the current (0.5 s max).
[Catch On Fly] FLr is forced to [Not Configured] no if [Auto DC Injection] AdC is set to
[Continuous] Ct.
Settings Code / Value Descriptions
[Not Configured] no Function inactive.
Factory setting
[Yes On Freewheel] YES Function active only after freewheel stop.

VCb [Catch on Fly Sensitivity] 0.10...100.00 V 0.20 V

Catch on fly sensitivity.

g Setting the value of parameter [Catch on Fly Sensitivity] VCb too low may cause a wrong
estimation of the speed of the motor.

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
 Only reduce gradually the value of parameter [Catch on Fly Sensitivity] VCb.
 During commissioning, verify that the drive and the system operate as intended by performing
tests and simulations in a controlled environment under controlled conditions
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.

202 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSWM>THT

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSWM- [Error/Warning handling]
tHt- [Motor thermal monit]
Motor thermal protection by calculating the I2t.
NOTE: The motor thermal state is memorized when the drive is switched off. The power-off
time is used to calculate the motor thermal state at the next startup.
• Self-cooled motors: The trigger curves depend on the motor frequency.
• Forced-cooled motors: Only the 50 Hz trigger curves needs to be considered, regardless of
the motor frequency.
Below a curve for 50Hz motor.

Below a curve for 60Hz motor.

SP51105 01/2025 203

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSWM>THT

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

CSWM- [Error/Warning handling]
tHt- [Motor thermal monit]
tHt [Motor Thermal Mode]
Motor thermal monitoring mode.
NOTE: An error is detected when the thermal state reaches 118% of the rated state and
reactivation occurs when the state falls back below 100%.
Settings Code / Value Descriptions

[No] no No thermal protection

[Self cooled] ACL Self ventilated motor

Factory setting
[Force-cool] FCL Fan-cooled motor

ttd [Motor Thermal Thd] 0...118% 100%

 Motor thermal state threshold.

oLL [MotorTemp ErrorResp]
Overload error response.
Settings Code / Value Descriptions

[Ignore] no Detected error ignored

[Freewheel Stop] YES Free wheel

Factory setting

204 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSWM>OPL

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

CSWM- [Error/Warning handling]
oPL- [Output phase loss]
oPL [OutPhaseLoss Assign]
Output phase loss assignment.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
If output phase CStitoring is disabled, phase loss and, by implication, accidental disconnection of
cables, are not detected.
 Verify that the setting of this parameter does not result in unsafe conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.

Settings Code / Value Descriptions

[Function Inactive] no Function inactive

[OPF Error Triggered] YES Tripping on [OutPhaseLoss Assign] oPL with

freewheel stop
Factory setting
[No Error Triggered] oAC No detected error triggered, but management of the
output voltage in order to avoid an overcurrent when
the link with the motor is re-established and catch on
the fly performed (even if this function has not been
configured).The drive switches to [Output cut ]SoC
state after [OutPhaseLoss Delay] odt time. Catch
on fly is possible as soon as the drive is in stand by
output cut [Output cut] SoC state.

odt [OutPhaseLoss Delay] 0.5...10 s 0.5 s

 Output (motor) phase loss detection time.

Time delay for taking the [OutPhaseLoss Assign] oPL detected error into account.

SP51105 01/2025 205

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSWM>IPL

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

CSWM- [Error/Warning handling]
iPL- [Input phase loss]
iPL [InPhaseLoss Assign]
Loss of input phase error response.
g If one supply mains phase is missing and if this leads to performance decrease,
an [Input phase loss] PHF error is triggered.
If 2 or 3 supply mains phases are missing, the drive operate until an [Supply Mains UnderV]
uSF error is triggered.

Settings Code / Value Descriptions

[Ignore] no The input phase loss monitoring function is

disabled to be used when the drive is supplied via a
single-phase supply or by the DC bus
[Freewheel Stop] YES The drive stops in freewheel in case of a supply
mains phase loss has been detected
Factory setting

206 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSWM>ETF

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

CSWM- [Error/Warning handling]
EtF- [External error]
EtF [Ext Error Assign]
External error assignment.
If the assigned bit state is:
• 0: there is no external error.
• 1: there is an external error.

Settings Code / Value Descriptions

[Not Assigned] no Not assigned

Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI6] Li1...Li6 Digital input DI1...DI6

[DI11]...[DI16] Li11...Li16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O

extension module has been inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile]
io configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 regardless of
configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with
integrated Modbus Serial in [I/O profile] io
configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with
integrated Modbus Serial regardless of
configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a
fieldbus module in [I/O profile] io configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a
fieldbus module regardless of configuration
[DI1 (Low level)]... L1L...L6L Digital input DI1...DI6 used at low level
[DI6 (Low level)]

SP51105 01/2025 207

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSWM>ETF

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

CSWM- [Error/Warning handling]
EtF- [External error]
EPL [Ext Error Resp]
Drive response to external error.
Type of stop in the event of an external detected error.
Settings Code / Value Descriptions

[Ignore] no External detected error ignored

[Freewheel Stop] YES Freewheel stop

Factory setting
[Per STT] Stt Stop according to configuration of [Type of stop]
Stt Page120, without tripping. In this case, the
detected error relay does not open and the drive is
ready to restart as soon as the detected error
disappears, according to the restart conditions of
the active command channel (for example,
according to [2/3-Wire Control] tCC and [2-wire
type] tCt if control is via the terminals).
Configuring a warning for this detected error is
recommended (assigned to a digital output, for
example) in order to indicate the cause of the stop.
[Fallback speed] LFF Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the
detected error persists and the run command has
not been removed(1)
[Speed maintained] rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when
the detected error occurred, as long as the detected
error is active and the run command has not been
removed(1)
[Ramp stop] rMP Stop on ramp

[Fast stop] FSt Fast stop

[DC Injection] dCi DC injection stop. This type of stop cannot be used
with some other functions.
(1) In this case, the detected error does not trigger a stop, it is advisable to assign a relay or digital
output to its indication.

208 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSWM>USB

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSWM- [Error/Warning handling]
u5b- [Undervoltage handling]
uSb [Undervoltage Resp]
Response to undervoltage.
Settings Code / Value Descriptions
[Error Triggered] 0 The drive triggers an error (the detected error relay
assigned to [Operating State Fault] FLt will be
opened)
Factory setting
[Error Triggered w/o 1 The drive triggers an error (the detected error relay
Relay] assigned to [Operating State Fault] FLt remains
closed)
[Warning Triggered] 2 The warning and detected error relay remain closed.
The warning can be assigned to a digital output or a
relay

urES [Mains Voltage]

Rated voltage of the mains supply in Vac.
The factory setting value of this parameter depends of drive rating.
Settings Code / Value Descriptions
[380 Vac] 380 380 Vac
[400 Vac] 400 400 Vac
[415 Vac] 415 415 Vac
Factory setting
[460 Vac] 460 460 Vac

uSL [Undervoltage Level] 190...240 Vac(1) 240 V

Undervoltage Level.
The factory setting is determined by the drive voltage rating.
(1): The minimum value depends on [Mains Voltage] urES setting.
• 190 V if urES equals 380,
• 202 V if urES equals 400,
• 212 V if urES equals 415,
• 240 V if urES equals 460.
uSt [UnderVolt Timeout] 0.2...999.9 s 0.2 s

Undervoltage timeout.
StP [Stop Type PLoss]
Controlled stop on power loss.
Behavior in the event of the undervoltage prevention level being reached.
Settings Code / Value Descriptions
[Inactive] no No action
Factory setting
[Maintain DC Bus] MMS This stop mode uses the inertia of the application to
maintain the control block powered, and thus to
keep operational I/O state and fieldbus link as long
as possible.
[Ramp stop] rMP Stop following an adjustable deceleration ramp
[Max stop time] StM in order to help to prevent
from uncontrolled stop of the application.
[Freewheel Stop] LnF Lock (freewheel stop) without triggering an error

SP51105 01/2025 209

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSWM>USB

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

CSWM- [Error/Warning handling]
u5b- [Undervoltage handling]
tSM [UnderV. Restart Tm] 1.0...999.9 s 1.0 s

Undervoltage restart time.

g This parameter can be accessed if [Stop Type PLoss] StP is set to [Ramp stop] rMP.
 The time delay before authorizing the restart after a complete stop for [Stop Type PLoss]
StP is set to [Ramp stop] rMP if the voltage has returned to normal.
uPL [Prevention Level] 240...283 V 283 V

Undervoltage prevention level.

g This parameter can be accessed if [Stop Type PLoss] StP is set to [Inactive] no.
The adjustment range and factory setting are determined by the drive voltage rating and
the [Mains Voltage] urES value.
StN [Max Stop Time] 0.01...60.00 s 1.00 s

Maximum stop time.

g This parameter can be accessed if [Stop Type PLoss] StP is set to [Ramp stop] rMP.
 This parameter defines the deceleration ramp time in case of mains loss. During
this controlled stop, the drive is powered thanks to the inertia of the application,
the motor is in generator mode. It is recommended to verify that the deceleration
set is compatible with the application inertia.
tbS [DC Bus Maintain Time] 1...9999 s 9999 s
g DC bus maintain time.
 This parameter can be accessed if [Stop Type PLoss]StP is set to [Maintain DC Bus]
MMS.

210 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSWM>GRFL

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

CSWM- [Error/Warning handling]
GrFL- [Ground Fault]
This menu can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr
If the internal ground fault detection [Ground Fault Activation] GrFL causes unwanted
results in your application, it is possible to substitute the internal ground fault detection by
an approriate external ground fault monitoring system. Setting the parameter [Ground Fault
Activation] GrFL to [NO] inH or to a percentage value of the nominal current of the
drive disables the internal ground fault detection of the drive or reduces its effectiveness.
Therefore, you must install an external ground fault detection system that is able to reliably
detect ground faults.

DANGER
GROUND FAULT MONITORING DISABLED
 Only set the parameter [Ground Fault Activation] GrFL to [NO] inH or to a percentage
value of the nominal current of the drive after a thorough risk assessment in compliance with
all regulations and standards that apply to the device and to the application.
 Implement an alternative, external ground fault monitoring function that allows for an
adequate, equivalent response to a ground fault of the drive in compliance with all applicable
regulations and standards as well as the risk assessment.
 Commission and test the system with all monitoring functions enabled.
 During commissioning, verify that the alternative, external ground fault detection system
properly detects any type of ground faults by performing tests and simulations in a controlled
environment under controlled conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.

GrFL [Ground Fault Activation]

Ground fault error response.
NOTE: The setting of this parameter is taken into account after a product restart.
Settings Code / Value Descriptions

[No] inH Disables error detection

[Yes] YES Use product internal value.

Factory setting
0.0...100.0% _ Setting range, in % of the drive nominal current

SP51105 01/2025 211

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSWM>LFL

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSWM- [Error/Warning handling]
LFL- [4-20mA Loss]
LFL1 [AI1 4-20mA Loss]
Response to 4-20mA loss on AI1.
Drive behavior on AI1 4-20 event.
Settings Code / Value Descriptions
[Ignore] no Detected error ignored. This is the only possible
configuration if [AI1 min. value] CrL1 is not greater
than 3 mA
Factory setting
[Freewheel] YES Freewheel stop
[Per STT] Stt Stop according to configuration of [Type of stop]
Stt, without tripping. In this case, the error relay
does not open and the drive is ready to restart as soon
as the detected error disappears, according to the
restart conditions of the active command channel (for
example, according to [2/3-Wire Control] tCC and
[2-wire type] tCt if control is via the terminals).
Configuring a warning for this detected error is
recommended (assigned to a digital output, for
example) in order to indicate the cause of the stop
[Fallback Speed] LFF Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the
detected error persists and the run command has not
been removed (1)
[Speed maintained] rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when the
detected error occurred, as long as the detected error
is active and the run command has not been removed
(1)
[Ramp stop] rMP Stop on ramp
[Fast stop] FSt Fast stop
[DC injection] dCi DC injection stop. This type of stop cannot be used
with some other functions
(1) In this case, the detected error does not trigger a stop, it is advisable to assign a relay or digital
output to its indication.

LFL2 [AI2 4-20mA loss]

Response to 4-20mA loss on AI2.
Drive behavior on AI2 4-20 event.
Identical to [AI1 4-20mA Loss] LFL1
LFL3 [AI3 4-20mA loss]
Response to 4-20mA loss on AI3.
Drive behavior on AI3 4-20 event.
Identical to [AI1 4-20mA Loss] LFL1
LFL4 [AI4 4-20mA loss]
Response to 4-20mA loss on AI4.
Drive behavior on AI4 4-20 event.
Identical to [AI1 4-20mA Loss] LFL1
This parameter can be accessed if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O extension module has been inserted.
LFL5 [AI5 4-20mA loss]
Response to 4-20mA loss on AI5.
Drive behavior on AI5 4-20 event.
Identical to [AI1 4-20mA Loss] LFL1
This parameter can be accessed if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O extension module has been inserted.

212 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSWM>LFF

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

CSWM- [Error/Warning handling]
LFF- [Fallback Speed]
This menu allows you to set the fallback speed.
Depending on the configuration, the fallback speed is used as:
• A response to a thermal detected error on analog input Page 194
• A response to 4-20mA loss on Aix Page 212
• A response to an external detected error Page 207
• A response to a modbus interruption Page 216
• A response to a fieldbus module interruption Page 216
LFF [Fallback Speed] 0.0...500.0 Hz 0.0 Hz

Fall back speed.

g

SP51105 01/2025 213

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSWM>INH

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

CSWM- [Error/Warning handling]
inH- [Error detect disabling]
inH [Disable Error Detect]
Disable error detection.
In rare cases, the monitoring functions of the drive may be unwanted because they impede
the purpose of the application. A typical example is a smoke extractor fan operating as a
part of a fire protection system. If a fire occurs, the smoke extractor fan should operate as
long as possible, even if, for example, the permissible ambient temperature of the drive is
exceeded. In such applications, damage to or destruction of the device may be acceptable
as collateral damage, for example, to keep other damage from occurring whose hazard
potential is assessed to be more severe.
A parameter is provided to disable certain monitoring functions in such applications so that
automatic error detection and automatic error responses of the device are no longer active.
You must implement alternative monitoring functions for disabled monitoring functions
that allow operators and/or master control systems to adequately respond to conditions
which correspond to detected errors. For example, if overtemperature monitoring of the
drive is disabled, the drive of a smoke extractor fan may itself cause a fire if errors go
undetected. An overtemperature condition can be, for example, signaled in a control room
without the drive being stopped immediately and automatically by its internal monitoring
functions.

DANGER
ERROR DETECTION FUNCTIONS DISABLED, NO ERROR DETECTION
• Only use this parameter after a thorough risk assessment in compliance with all regulations
and standards that apply to the device and to the application.
• Implement an alternative, external ground fault monitoring function that allows for an
adequate, equivalent response to a ground fault of the drive in compliance with all applicable
regulations and standards as well as the risk assessment.
• Commission and test the system with all monitoring functions enabled.
• During commissioning, verify that the alternative, external ground fault detection system
properly detects any type of ground faults by performing tests and simulations in a controlled
environment under controlled conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.
This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert]EPr.
If the assigned input or bit state is:
• 0: error detection is enabled.
• 1: error detection is disabled.
Current errors are cleared on a rising edge from 0 to 1 of the assigned input or bit.
Detection of following errors can be disabled: CNF, EPF1, EPF2, FWER, INFB, INFD, INFK,
INFP, INFR, INFU, LFF1, LFF2, LFF3, LFF4, LFF5, MPLF, OBF, OHF, OLC, OLF, OPF1, OPF2,
OSF, PFMF, PGLF, PHF, SLF1, SLF3, SOF, STF, T2CF, T3CF, T4CF, T5CF, TH2F, TH3F, TH4F,
TH5F, TJF, TNF, ULF, USF.

214 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSWM>INH

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

CSWM- [Error/Warning handling]
inH- [Error detection disable]
inH [Disable Error Detect] continue...

Settings Code / Value Descriptions

[Not Assigned] no Not assigned

Factory setting
[DI1]...[DI6] Li1...Li6 Digital input DI1...DI6

[DI11]...[DI16] Li11...Li16 Digital input DI11...DI16 if XDIO-EX1-V01 I/O

extension module has been inserted
[CD00]...[CD10] Cd00...Cd10 Virtual digital input CMD.0...CMD.10 in [I/O profile]
io configuration
[CD11]...[CD15] Cd11...Cd15 Virtual digital input CMD.11...CMD.15 in [I/O profile]
io configuration
[C101]...[C110] C101...C110 Virtual digital input CMD1.01...CMD1.10 with
integrated Modbus Serial in [I/O profile] io
configuration
[C111]...[C115] C111...C115 Virtual digital input CMD1.11...CMD1.15 with
integrated Modbus Serial in [I/O profile] io
configuration
[C301]...[C310] C301...C310 Virtual digital input CMD3.01...CMD3.10 with a
fieldbus module in [I/O profile] io configuration
[C311]...[C315] C311...C315 Virtual digital input CMD3.11...CMD3.15 with a
fieldbus module in [I/O profile] io configuration

SP51105 01/2025 215

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSWM>CLL

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

CSWM- [Error/Warning handling]
CLL- [Fieldbus Monitoring]
SLL [Modbus Error Resp]
Response to Modbus interruption.

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
If this parameter is set to [Ignore] no, Modbus communication monitoring is disabled.
 Only use this setting after a thorough risk assessment in compliance with all regulations and
standards that apply to the device and to the application.
 Only use this setting for tests during commissioning.
 Verify that communication monitoring has been re-enabled before completing the
commissioning procedure and performing the final commissioning test.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.

Behavior of the drive in the event of a communication interruption with integrated Modbus.
Settings Code / Value Descriptions

[Ignore] no Detected error ignored

[Freewheel Stop] YES Freewheel stop

Factory setting
[Per STT] Stt Stop according to configuration of [Type of stop]
Stt, without tripping. In this case, the error relay
does not open and the drive is ready to restart as
soon as the detected error disappears, according to
the restart conditions of the active command channel
(for example, according to [2/3-Wire Control] tCC
and [2-wire type] tCt if control is via the
terminals)(1)
[Fallback Speed] LFF Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the
detected error persists and the run command has not
been removed(1)
[Speed maintained] rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when
the detected error occurred, as long as the detected
error is active and the run command has not been
removed(1).
[Ramp stop] rMP Stop on ramp

[Fast stop] FSt Fast stop

[DC injection] DCI DC injection stop. This type of stop cannot be used
with some other functions
(1) In this case, the detected error does not trigger a stop, it is advisable to assign a relay
or digital output to its indication..

216 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSWM>COMO

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

CSWM- [Error/Warning handling]
CoMo- [Communication module]
CLL [Fieldbus Interrupt Resp]

WARNING
LOSS OF CONTROL
If this parameter is set to [Ignore] no, fieldbus module communication monitoring is disabled.
 Only use this setting after a thorough risk assessment in compliance with all regulations and
standards that apply to the device and to the application.
 Only use this setting for tests during commissioning.
 Verify that communication monitoring has been re-enabled before completing the
commissioning procedure and performing the final commissioning test.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment
damage.

Response to fieldbus module communication interruption.

Settings Code / Value Descriptions

[Ignore] no Detected error ignored

[Freewheel Stop] YES Freewheel stop

Factory setting
[Per STT] Stt Stop according to configuration of [Type of stop]
Stt, without tripping. In this case, the error relay
does not open and the drive is ready to restart as
soon as the detected error disappears, according to
the restart conditions of the active command
channel (for example, according to [2/3-Wire
Control] tCC and [2-wire type] tCt if control is
via the terminals)(1)
[Fallback Speed] LFF Change to fallback speed, maintained as long as the
detected error persists and the run command has not
been removed(1)
[Speed maintained] rLS The drive maintains the speed being applied when
the detected error occurred, as long as the detected
error is active and the run command has not been
removed(1)
[Ramp stop] rMP Stop on ramp

[Fast stop] FSt Fast stop

[DC injection] dCi DC injection stop. This type of stop cannot be used
with some other functions
(1) In this case, the detected error does not trigger a stop, it is advisable to assign a relay or digital
output to its indication.

SP51105 01/2025 217

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CSt>CSWM>TNL

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

CSWM- [Error/Warning handling]
tnL [Tuning Error Resp]
Response to autotune error.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr.
Settings Code / Value Descriptions

[Ignore] no Detected error ignored

[Freewheel Stop] YES Freewheel stop

Factory setting

218 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSWM>ULD

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

CSWM- [Error/Warning handling]
uLd- [Process underload]
Process Underload Detected Error

A process underload is detected when the next event occurs and remains pending for a
minimum time [Unld Detect Delay] uLt, which is configurable:
• The motor is in steady state and the torque is below the set underload limit
([Unld.Thr.0.Speed] LuL, [Unld.Thr.Nom.Speed] Lun, [Unld. FreqThr. Det.] rMud
parameters).
• The motor is in steady state when the offset between the frequency reference and motor
frequency falls below the configurable threshold [Hysteresis Freq] Srb.
Between zero frequency and the rated frequency, the curve reflects the following equation:
torque = LuL + (Lun - LuL) x (frequency)2 / (rated frequency)2
The underload function is not active for frequencies below rMud.

1 Underload zone.

A relay or a digital output can be assigned to the signaling of this detected error in the
[Input/Output] io-, [I/O assignment] ioAS- menus.
uLt [Unld Detect Delay] 0...100 s 0s

Underload detection time delay.

A value of 0 deactivates the function and makes the other parameters inaccessible.
Lun [Unld.Thr.Nom.Speed] 20...100% 60%

Underload threshold at nominal motor speed [Nominal Motor Freq] FrS, as a % of the
g rated motor torque.
 This parameter can be accessed if [Unld Detect Delay] uLt is not set to 0.

LuL [Unld.Thr.0.Speed] 0...[Unld.Thr.Nom.Speed] 0%

g Lun

 Underload threshold at zero frequency as a % of the rated motor torque.

This parameter can be accessed if [Unld Detect Delay] uLt is not set to 0.
rMud [Unld. FreqThr. Det.] 0.0...500.0 Hz 0.0 Hz
g Minimum frequency underload detection threshold.
 This parameter can be accessed if [Unld Detect Delay] uLt is not set to 0.

SP51105 01/2025 219

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSWM>ULD

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

CSWM- [Error/Warning handling]
uLd- [Process underload]
Srb [Hysteresis Freq] 0.3...500.0 Hz 0.3 Hz

Maximum deviation between the frequency reference and the motor frequency, which
g defines a steady state operation.
 This parameter can be accessed if [Unld Detect Delay] uLt or [Ovld Time Detect.] toLis
not set to 0.
udL [Underload ErrorResp]
Underload management.
g Behavior on switching to underload detection.
This parameter can be accessed if [Unld Detect Delay] uLt is not set to 0.
Settings Code / Value Descriptions

[Ignore] no Detected error ignored

[Freewheel stop] YES Freewheel stop

Factory setting
[Ramp stop] rMP Stop on ramp

[Fast stop] FSt Fast stop

Ftu [Underload T.B.Rest.] 0...6 min 0 min

Minimum time permitted between an underload being detected and any automatic restart.
g To allow an automatic restart, the value of [Fault Reset Time] tAr must exceed this
 parameter by at least 1 minute.
This parameter can be accessed if [Unld Detect Delay] udL is not set to [Ignore] no.

220 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSWM>OLD

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]
CSWM- [Error/Warning handling]
oLd- [Process overload]
A process overload error is detected when the next event occurs and remains pending for a
minimum time [Ovld Detection Delay] toL, which is configurable:
• The drive is in [Current limitation] CLi mode during acceleration, deceleration, or,
• The motor is in steady state and the [Motor Current] LCr is above the set overload
threshold [Overload Threshold] LoC.
The motor is in steady state when the offset difference between [Pre-Ramp Ref Freq] FrH
and [Motor Frequency] rFr is less than the configurable threshold [Hysteresis Freq]
Srb.

NOTE: Process overload monitoring is always active in [Current limitation] CLi state.

toL [Ovld Detection Delay] 0...100 s 0s

Overload reaction time.

A value of 0 deactivates the function and makes the other parameters inaccessible.
LoC [Overload Threshold] 70...150% 110%

Overload threshold.
g Overload detection threshold, as a % of the rated motor current [Nom Motor Current] nCr.
 This value must be less than the limit current in order for the function to work.
This parameter can be accessed if [Ovld Detection Delay] toL is not set to 0.
Srb [Hysteresis Freq] 0.3...500.0 Hz 0.3 Hz

Hysteresis for steady state.

g Maximum deviation between the frequency reference and the motor frequency, which
defines a steady state operation.
 This parameter can be accessed if [Ovld Detection Delay] toL or [Unld T. Del. Detect.]
uLt is not set to 0.
odL [Overload ErrorResp]
Behavior on switching to overload detection.
g This parameter can be accessed if [Ovld Detection Delay] toL is not set to 0.
Settings Code / Value Descriptions
[Ignore] no Detected error ignored
[Freewheel stop] YES Freewheel stop
Factory setting
[Ramp stop] rMP Stop on ramp
[Fast stop] FSt Fast stop

Fto [Overload T.B.Rest.] 0...6 min 0 min

g Minimum time permitted between an overload being detected and any automatic restart.
 In order to allow an automatic restart, the value of [Fault Reset Time] tAr must exceed
this parameter by at least 1 minute.
This parameter can be accessed if [Ovld Detection Delay] toL or [Overload ErrorResp]
odL is not set to 0.

SP51105 01/2025 221

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CSt>CSWM>AGCF

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

CSWM- [Error/Warning handling]
AGFC- [Warning groups config]
A1C to [Warn grp 1 definition] to [Warn grp 5 definition]
A5C
The following submenus group the warnings into 1 to 5 groups, each of which can be
assigned to a relay or a digital output for remote signaling.
When one or a number of warnings selected in a group occur, this warning group is
activated.
List of Warnings

The list of warning codes is available in the chapter "Diagnostics and Troubleshooting"
Page 222.

222 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Section 6.22
[Maintenance]

[Maintenance]

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[Diagnostics] dAU- Menu 224
[Fan management] FAMA- Menu 225
[Time Counter Reset] rpr Menu 226
[Overmodul. Activation] ovMA Menu 226

SP51105 01/2025 223

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSMA>DAU

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

CSMA- [Maintenance]
dAu- [Diagnostics]
This menu allows you to make simple test sequences for diagnostics.
Fnt [Fan Diagnostics]
Diagnostics of internal fan(s).
This starts a test sequence.
NOTE: This diagnostic is not accessible on XD2000-02P2-4B112 frame size 0.
NOTE: Fan diagnostics of internal fan(s) will be not-successful if the DC bus is not fully
charged. This will be the case on separate control (e.g. the control block is only supplied on
24V).
HLt [HMI LED Diagnostics]
Diagnostics of product LED(s).
This starts a test sequence.
iWt [IGBT Diag w motor]
Diagnostics of product IGBT(s).
This will start a test sequence with the connected motor (open circuit/short-circuit).
iWot [IGBT Diag w/o motor]
Diagnostics of product IGBT(s).
This starts a test sequence without the motor (short-circuit).

224 SP51105 01/2025

 Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSMA>FAMA

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

CSMA- [Maintenance]
FAMA- [Fan management]
Fan speed and [Fan Operation Time] FPbt are monitored values.
An abnormal low speed or the fan trigger a warning [Fan Feedback Warning] FFdA. As
soon as [Fan Operation Time] FPbt reach the predefined value of 45,000 hours, a
warning [Fan Counter Warning] FCtA is triggered.
[Fan Operation Time] FPbt counter can be set to 0 by using the [Counter Reset] rPr
parameter.
FFM [Fan Mode]
 Fan activation mode.
NOTE: For XD2000-02P2-4B1121 frame size 0, this parameter is forced to [Never] StP
Settings Code / Value Descriptions

[Standard] Std The operation of the fan is enabled when the motor is
running. According to the drive rating, this could be
the only available setting
Factory setting
[Always] run The fan is always activated

[Economy] Eco The fan is activated only if necessary, according to

the internal thermal state of the drive

If [Fan Mode] FFM is set to [Never] Stp, the fan of the drive is disabled.

NOTICE
OVERHEATING
Verify that the ambient temperature does not exceed 40 °C (104° F) if the fan is disabled.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

SP51105 01/2025 225

Complete settings CSt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: CST>CSMA

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CSt- [Complete settings]

CSMA- [Maintenance]
rPr [Counter Reset]
 Time counter reset.
NOTE: The list of possible values depends on the product size.
Settings Code / Value Descriptions

[No] no No
Factory setting
[Reset Run Time] rtH Run time reset

[Reset Power On Time] PtH Power ON time reset

[Reset Fan Counter] FtH Reset fan counter

[Reset Start Count] nSM Clear number of motor starts

oVMA [Overmodul. Activation]

This parameter can be accessed if [Access Level] LAC is set to [Expert] EPr.
The purpose of the Overmodulation is to compensate the loss of output voltage due to the
load.
Settings Code / Value Descriptions

[Default] dEFAuLt Overmodulation is not configured

Factory setting
[Full] FuLL Over modulation is active

226 SP51105 01/2025

 Easy xD Series xD2000
Communication COM-
EAV64387 12/2019

Chapter 7
[Communication] CoM-

[Communication] CoM-

What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[Modbus Fieldbus] MdI- Menu 228
[Com. scanner input] iCS- Menu 229
[Com. scanner output] oCS- Menu 230
[Profibus] PbC- Menu 230

This chapter contains the following topics inside [Comm parameters] CMP– submenu:

Menu Description Related manual

[Modbus SL] MSL– This menu is related to the Modbus serial communication port at the SP51106
[Modbus Fieldbus] MD1– bottom of the control block.
[Profibus] PBC– This menu is related to the Profibus DP fieldbus module SP51107
(XDCI-PDP-V01).

NOTE:
•Access to the communication parameters to carry out searches (example: parameter address and format) and
sort operations (SP51105).
•The drive needs to be restarted to apply the modification of a communication parameters.

Introduction

[Communication] CoM- menu presents the fieldbus submenus.

SP51105 01/2025 227

Communication COM-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: COM>MDI

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CoM- [Communication]
MdI- [Modbus Fieldbus]
This menu is related to the Modbus serial communication port on the bottom of the control
block.
Refer to the Modbus serial manual (SP51106).
Add [Modbus Address] [OFF] oFF ...247 [OFF]oFF

Drive Modbus Address (Slave ID).

tbr [Bd.RateModbus]
Baud rate Modbus.
Settings Code / Value Descriptions

[4800 bps] 4k8 4,800 Bauds

[9600 bps] 9k6 9,600 Bauds

[19200 bps] 19k2 19,200 Bauds

Factory setting
[38.4 Kbps] 38k4 38,400 Bauds

tFo [Modbus Format]

Modbus communication format.
Settings Code / Value Descriptions

[8-O-1] 8o1 8 bits odd parity 1 stop bit

[8-E-1] 8E1 8 bits even parity 1 stop bit

Factory setting
[8-N-1] 8n1 8 bits no parity 1 stop bit

[8-N-2] 8n2 8 bits no parity 2 stop bits

tto [Modbus Timeout] 0.1 ...30.0 s 10.s

Modbus timeout.

228 SP51105 01/2025

 Communication COM-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: COM>ICS

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CoM- [Communication]
iCS- [Com. scanner input]
nMA1 [Scan. IN1 address] 0...65535 3201 (EtA)

Address of the first input word.

nMA2 [Scan. IN2 address] 0...65535 8604 (rFrd)

Address of the second input word.

nMA3 [Scan. IN3 address] 0...65535 0

Address of the third input word.

nMA4 [Scan. IN4 address]
Address of the fourth input word.
Identical to [Scan. IN3 address] nMA3.
nMA5 [Scan. IN5 address]
Address of the fifth input word.
Identical to [Scan. IN3 address] nMA3.
nMA6 [Scan. IN6 address]
Address of the sixth input word.
Identical to [Scan. IN3 address] nMA3.
nMA7 [Scan. IN7 address]
Address of the seventh input word.
Identical to [Scan. IN3 address] nMA3.
nMA8 [Scan. IN8 address]
Address of the eighth input word.
Identical to [Scan. IN3 address] nMA3.

SP51105 01/2025 229

Communication COM-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: COM>OCS

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CoM- [Communication]
oCS- [Com. scanner output]
nCA1 [Scan.Out1 address] 0...65535 8501 (CMd)

Address of the first output word.

nCA2 [Scan.Out2 address] 0...65535 8602(LFrd)

Address of the second output word.

nCA3 [Scan.Out3 address] 0...65535 0

Address of the third output word.

nCA4 [Scan.Out4 address]
Address of the fourth output word.
Identical to [Scan.Out3 address] nCA3.
nCA5 [Scan.Out5 address]
Address of the fifth output word.
Identical to [Scan.Out3 address] nCA3.
nCA6 [Scan.Out6 address]
Address of the sixth output word.
Identical to [Scan.Out3 address] nCA3.
nCA7 [Scan.Out7 address]
Address of the seventh output word.
Identical to [Scan.Out3 address] nCA3.
nCA8 [Scan.Out8 address]
Address of the eighth output word.
Identical to [Scan.Out3 address] nCA3.

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: COM>PBC

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

CoM- [Communication]
PbC- [Profibus]
Refer to the Profibus DP fieldbus module manual (SP51107).

230 SP51105 01/2025

 Easy xD Series xD2000
File management FMt-
EAV64387 12/2019

Chapter 8
[File management] FMt-

[File management] FMt-

What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains the following topics:
Topic Page
[Transfer config file] tCF- Menu 232
[Factory settings] FCS- Menu 233
[Parameter group list] FrY- Menu 233
[Factory settings] FCS- Menu 234
[Firmware update diag] FWuP- Menu 234

Introduction

[File management] FMt- menu presents the management of drive configuration files.

SP51105 01/2025 231

File management FMt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: FMT>TCF

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

FMt- [File management]

tCF- [Transfer config file]
oPF [Copy to The Device]
This allows to select a previously saved configuration from the Plain Text Display Terminal
memory and transfer it to the .
The needs to be restarted after a configuration file transfer.
SAF [Copy From Device]
This allows to save the actual configuration into the Plain Text Display Terminal memory.
NOTE: The Graphic Display Terminal can store up to 16 configuration files.

232 SP51105 01/2025

 File management FMt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: FMT>FCS

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

FMt- [File management]

FCS- [Factory settings]
This allows to save the actual configuration into the Plain Text Display Terminal memory.

NOTE: The Graphic Display Terminal can store up to 16 configuration files.

FCSi [Config. Source]
Source configuration.
g This parameter allows to select the configuration to restore in case of factory setting
operation.

NOTE: Before selecting with this parameter the customer parameter set used to restore
a configuration, customer parameters must have been saved on this set (using [Save
Configuration] SCSi).
Settings Code / Value Descriptions

[Macro-Conf] ini Factory setting parameter set

Factory setting
[Config 1] CFG1 Customer parameter set 1

[Config 2] CFG2 Customer parameter set 2

[Config 3] CFG3 Customer parameter set 3

FrY- [Parameter group list]

Selection of menus to be restored when Go to Factory setting function is activated
NOTE: In factory configuration and after a return to "factory settings", [Parameter group list]
FrY will be empty.
ALL [All]
All parameters in all menus.

NOTE: The following parameter list is not impacted by this selection: [Motor Standard] bFr,
[Dual rating] drt, [Password] Pwd menu.
drM [Device Configuration]
All menus, except for [My preferences] MYP- menu, [Communication] CoM- menu.
Mot [Motor Param]
[Motor control] drC- menu parameters and [Motor Th Current] itH parameter in [Motor
thermal monit] tHt-.
CoM [Comm. Menu]
Restores [Comm. menu] CoM- menu. It can only be selected if [Config. Source] FCSi is
g set to [Macro Config] ini
diS [Display Config.]
Restores [Customization] CuS-menu and [Visibility] viS- menu. It can only be selected
g if [Config. Source] FCSi is set to [Macro Config] ini.

SP51105 01/2025 233

File management FMt-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: FMT>FCS

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

FMt- [File management]

FCS- [Factory settings]
GFS [Go to Factory settings]
This function allows to perform a factory setting or to restore a previously saved
configuration

WARNING
UNANTICIPATED EQUIPMENT OPERATION
Verify that restoring the factory settings is compatible with the type of wiring used.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

It is only possible to revert to the factory settings if at least one group of parameters has
previously been selected ([Parameter group list] FrY displayed above)
SCSi [Save Configuration]
This parameter allows to save configurations to be restored later
g The active configuration to be saved does not appear for selection. For example, if it is
[Config 0] Str0, only [ Config 1] Str1, [Config 2] Str2 and [ Config 3] Str3
appear. The parameter changes back to [No] no as soon as the operation is complete.
Settings Code / Value Descriptions

[No] no No
Factory setting
[Config 0] Str0 Store customer parameter set 0

[Config 1] Str1 Store customer parameter set 1

[Config 2] Str2 Store customer parameter set 2

[Config 3] Str3 Store customer parameter set 3

FwuP- [Firmware update]

This function is used to update the software of the drive and can only be used by Lauritz
Knudsen Electrical & Automation Services.
For more information contact your local Lauritz Knudsen Electrical & Automation Services.

234 SP51105 01/2025

 Easy xD Series xD2000
My preferences MYP-
EAV64387 12/2019

Chapter 9
[My preferences] MYP-

[My preferences] MYP-

What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains the following sections:
Section Topic Page
9.1 [LANGUAGE] 236
9.2 [Password] 237
9.3 [Customization] 239
9.4 [Access level] 240
9.5 [LCD settings] 241

Introduction

[My preferences] MYP- menu presents the possible settings for the user-defined HMI and parameter
access.

SP51105 01/2025 235

My preferences MYP-

Section 9.1
[Language]

[LANGUAGE]

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: MYP>LNG

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

MYP- [My preferences]

LnG [LANGUAGE]
This menu allows to select the Plain Text Display Terminal language.
The following languages can be selected:
• English,
• Chinese,
• German,
• Spanish,
• French,
• Italian,
• Russian,
• Turkish.

236 SP51105 01/2025

 My preferences MYP-

Section 9.2
[Passw ord]

[Password]

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: MYP>COD

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

MYP- [My preferences]

Cod- [Password]
Enables the configuration to be protected with an access code or a password to be entered
in order to access a protected configuration:

• The is unlocked when the password is set to [No password defined] no or when the
correct password has been entered. All menus can be accessed.
• Before protecting the configuration with a password, you must:
 Define the [Upload rights] uLr and [Download rights] dLr.
 Make a careful note of the password and keep it in a place where you are able to find
it.
PSSt [Password status]
Password status.
Read only parameter.
Settings Code / Value Descriptions

[No password defined] no No password defined

Factory setting
[Password is uL Password is unlocked
unlocked]
[Password is locked] LoC Password is locked

PWd [Password]
6-characters password.To lock the drive, define and enter your password. [Password
status] PSSt value switches to [Password is locked] LoC.
To unlock the drive, the password must be entered. Once the correct code has been
entered, the is unlocked and [Password status] PSSt value switches to [Password is
unlocked] uL. Access will be locked again the next time the is switched on.
To modify the password, unlock the drive then enter the new password. Entering a new
password locks the drive.
To remove the password, the drive must be unlocked and the password 000000 must be
entered. [[Password status] PSSt value switches to [No password defined] no. At next
switch-on, the remains unlocked.
uLr [Upload rights]
 Upload rights.
Settings Code / Value Descriptions

[Permitted] uLro Commissioning tools or the Plain Text Display

Terminal can save the whole configuration
(password, monitoring, configuration)
Factory setting
[Not allowed] uLr1 Commissioning tools or the Plain Text Display
Terminal cannot save the configuration if the is not
protected by a password or if the in-correct
password has been entered

SP51105 01/2025 237

My preferences MYP-

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: MYP>COD

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

MYP- [My preferences]

Cod- [Password]
dLr [Download rights]
 Download rights.
Settings Code / Value Descriptions

[Locked drv] dLr0 Lock : the configuration can be downloaded to the

only if the is protected by a password, which is the
same as the password of the configuration to be
downloaded
[Unlock. drv] dLr1 Unlock : the configuration can be downloaded to the
or a configuration can be modified if the is unlocked
or is not protected by a password
Factory setting
[Not allowed] dLr2 The configuration cannot be downloaded

[Lock/unlock] dLr3 Combination of [Locked drv] dLr0 and

[Unlock. drv] dLr1

238 SP51105 01/2025

 My preferences MYP-

Section 9.3
[Customization]

[Customization]

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: MYP>CUS>MSC

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

MYP- [My preferences]

CuS- [Customization]
nSC- [Display screen type]
Ndt [Display value type]
HMI displayed value type.
Settings Code / Value Descriptions

[Digital] dEC Digital value

Factory setting
[Bar graph] bAr Bar graph

MPC [Parameter Selection]

Customized selection.
This view allows to select the parameters to display on the default screen.

SP51105 01/2025 239

My preferences MYP-

Section 9.4
[Access level]

[Access level]

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: MYP>LAC

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

MYP- [My preferences]

LAC- [Access level]
LAC [Access Level]
Access level: to define the level of access control.
Settings Code / Value Descriptions

[Basic] bAS Access to all menus.

Factory setting
[Expert] EPr Access to all menus and to additional parameters.

240 SP51105 01/2025

 My preferences MYP-

Section 9.5
[LCD settings]

[LCD settings]

Parameters described in this page can be accessed by: MYP>CNL

Code Name/Description Adjustment Range Factory Settings

MYP- [My preferences]

CnL- [LCD settings]
This menu allows to set the Plain Text Display Terminal related parameters.
CSt [Screen Contrast] 0...100% 50%

Screen contrast setting.

SbY [Standby] no...10 min 10 min

Stand-by delay.
Automatic backlight OFF time
NOTE: Disabling the automatic standby function of the display terminal backlight will
reduce the backlight service time.
KLCK [Display Terminal locked] no...10 min 5 min

 Plain Text Display Terminal key locked. Press ESC and Home keys to Lock manually &
unlock the Plain Text Display Terminal keys. The Stop key remains active when the Plain
Text Display Terminal is locked.

SP51105 01/2025 241

My preferences MYP-

242 SP51105 01/2025

 Easy xD Series xD2000
Maintenance and Diagnostics
EAV64387 12/2019

Part III
Maintenance and diagnostics

Maintenance and diagnostics

What Is in This Part?

This part contains the following chapters:
Chapter Chapter Name Page
10 Maintenance 245
11 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting 247

SP51105 01/2025 243

Maintenance and Diagnostics

244 SP51105 01/2025

 Easy xD SeriesxD Series xD2000
Maintenance
EAV64387 12/2019

Chapter 10
Maintenance

Maintenance

Maintenance

Limitation of Warranty
The warranty does not apply if the product has been opened, except by Lauritz Knudsen Electrical & Automation
services.

Servicing

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Read and understand the instructions in Safety Information chapter before performing any procedure in this
chapter.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

The temperature of the products described in this manual may exceed 80 °C (176 °F) during operation.

WARNING
HOT SURFACES
 Ensure that any contact with hot surfaces is avoided.
 Do not allow flammable or heat-sensitive parts in the immediate vicinity of hot surfaces.
 Verify that the product has sufficiently cooled down before handling it.
 Verify that the heat dissipation is sufficient by performing a test run under maximum load conditions.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

WARNING
INSUFFICIENT MAINTENANCE
Verify that the maintenance activities described below are performed at the specified intervals.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in death, serious injury, or equipment damage.

Adherence to the environmental conditions must be ensured during operation of the drive. In addition, during
maintenance, verify and, if appropriate, correct all factors that may have an impact on the environmental
conditions.

Part concerned Activity Interval (1)

Overall All parts such as housing, HMI, control Perform a visual inspection At least every year
condition block, connections, etc.
Corrosion Terminals, connectors, screws, EMC Inspect and clean if required
plate
Dust Terminals, fans, enclosures air inlets Inspect and clean if required
and air outlets, air filters of cabinet
Cooling Wall mounting drives fan Verify the fan operation At least every year
Replace the fan After 3 to 5 years,
depending on the
operating conditions
Fastening All screws for electrical and Verify tightening torques At least every year
mechanical connections
(1) Maximum maintenance intervals from the date of commissioning. Reduce the intervals between maintenance to
adapt maintenance to the environmental conditions, the operating conditions of the drive, and to any other factor that
may influence the operation and/ or maintenance requirements of the drive.

SP51105 01/2025 245

Maintenance

Spares and Repairs

Serviceable product. Please contact Customer Interaction Center (CIC) on:https://www.lk-ea.com.

Long Time Storage

If the drive was not connected to mains for an extended period of time, the capacitors must be restored to their
full performance before the motor is started.

NOTICE
REDUCED CAPACITOR PERFORMANCE
 Apply mains voltage to the drive for one hour before starting the motor if the drive has not been connected
to mains for the specified periods of time. (1)
 Verify that no Run command can be applied before the period of one hour has elapsed.
 Verify the date of manufacture if the drive is commissioned for the first time and run the specified
procedure if the date of manufacture is more than 12 months in the past.
Failure to follow these instructions can result in equipment damage.

(1) Period of time:

• 12 months at a maximum storage temperature of +50°C (+122°F)
• 24 months at a maximum storage temperature of +45°C (+113°F)
• 36 months at a maximum storage temperature of +40°C (+104°F)
If the specified procedure cannot be performed without a Run command because of internal mains contactor
control, perform this procedure with the power stage enabled, but the motor being at a standstill so that there
is no appreciable mains current in the capacitors.

Fan Replacement
It is possible to order a new fan for the drive maintenance. Please contact Customer Interaction Center (CIC)
on: https://www.lk-ea.com.

Customer Care Center

For additional support, you can contact our Customer Interaction Center (CIC) on:
https://www.lk-ea.com/about/contact-us

246 SP51105 01/2025

 Easy xD Series xD2000
Diagnostics and Troubleshooting
EAV64387 12/2019

Chapter 11
Diagnostics and Troubl eshooting

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Introduction
This chapter describes the various types of diagnostics and provides troubleshooting assistance.

DANGER
HAZARD OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, EXPLOSION OR ARC FLASH
Read and understand the instructions in Safety Information chapter before performing any procedure in this
chapter.
Failure to follow these instructions will result in death or serious injury.

What Is in This Chapter?

This chapter contains the following sections:
Section Topic Page
11.1 Warning Codes 248
11.2 Error Codes 249
11.3 FAQ 292
11.4 Glossary 293

SP51105 01/2025 247

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Section 11.1
Warning Codes

Warning Codes

Warning Codes

List of Available Warnings Messages

Setting Code Description

[No Warning stored] noA No warning stored
[Fallback Frequency] FrF Reaction on event: Fallback frequency
[Speed Maintained] rLS Reaction on event: Speed maintained
[Type of stop] Stt Reaction on event: Stop following [Type of stop] Stt
without triggering an error
[Ref Frequency Warning] SrA Frequency reference reached
[PID error Warning] PEE PID error warning
[PID Feedback Warn] PFA PID feedback warning
[AI3 Th Warning] tP3A AI3 Thermal warning
[AI4 Th Warning] tP4A AI4 Thermal warning
[AI5 Th Warning] tP5A AI5 Thermal warning
[AI1 4-20 Warning] AP1 AI1 4-20 mA loss warning
[AI3 4-20 Warning] AP3 AI3 4-20 mA loss warning
[AI4 4-20 Warning] AP4 AI4 4-20 mA loss warning
[AI5 4-20 Warning] AP5 AI5 4-20 mA loss warning
[Fan Counter Warning] FCtA Fan counter speed warning
[Fan Feedback Warning] FFdA Fan feedback warning
[BR Thermal Warning] boA Braking resistor thermal warning
[Ext. Error Warning] EFA External error warning
[Undervoltage Warning] uSA Undervoltage warning
[Preventive UnderV Active] Page 210 uPA Controlled stop threshold is reached
[Mot Freq High Thd] FtA Motor frequency high threshold 1 reached
[Mot Freq Low Thd] FtAL Motor frequency low threshold 1 reached
[Mot Freq Low Thd 2] F2AL Motor frequency low threshold 2 reached
[High Speed Reached] FLA High speed reached warning
[Ref Freq High Thd reached] rtAH Reference frequency high threshold reached
[Ref Freq Low Thd reached] rtAL Reference frequency low threshold reached
[2nd Freq Thd Reached] F2A Motor frequency high threshold 2 reached
[Current Thd Reached] CtA Motor current high threshold reached
[Low Current Reached] CtAL Motor current low threshold reached
[Process Undld Warning] uLA Process underload warning
[Process Overload Warning] oLA Overload warning
[Dev Thermal reached] tAd Drive thermal threshold reached
[Motor Therm Thd reached] tSA Motor thermal threshold reached
[Pos. Following Warn] PFES Position following warning
[Temp Sens AI2 Warn] tS2A Temperature sensor AI2 warning (open circuit)
[Temp Sens AI3 Warn] tS3A Temperature sensor AI3 warning (open circuit)
[Temp Sens AI4 Warn] tS4A Temperature sensor AI4 warning (open circuit)
[Temp Sens AI5 Warn] tS5A Temperature sensor AI5 warning (open circuit)
[DC Bus Ripple Warn] dCrW DC Bus Ripple Warning
[Fallback Channel] AFFL Automatic fallback behavior activated after a fieldbus
communication interruption

248 SP51105 01/2025

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Section 11.2
Error Codes

Error Codes

What Is in This Section?

This section contains the following topics:
Topic Page
Overview 251
[Circuit Breaker Error] CbF 252
[Incorrect Config] CFF 252
[Invalid Configuration] CFi 253
[Conf Transfer Error] CFi2 253
[Pre-settings Transfer Error] CFi3 254
[Fieldbus Com Interrupt] CnF 254
[Precharge Capacitor] CrF1 255
[Channel Switch Error] CSF 255
[DC Bus Ripple Error] dCrE 256
[Control Memory Error] EEF1 256
[Power Memory Error] EEF2 257
[External Error] EPF1 257
[Fieldbus Error] EPF2 258
[Firmware Update Error] FWEr 258
[Boards Compatibility] HCF 259
[High Flow Error] HFPF 259
[Internal Link Error] iLF 260
[Internal Error 0] inF0 260
[Internal Error 1] inF1 261
[Internal Error 2] inF2 261
[Internal Error 3] inF3 262
[Internal Error 4] inF4 262
[Internal Error 6] inF6 263
[Internal Error 7] inF7 263
[Internal Error 8] inF8 264
[Internal Error 9] inF9 264
[Internal Error 10] inFA 265
[Internal Error 11] inFb 265
[Internal Error 12] inFC 266
[Internal Error 13] inFd 266
[Internal Error 14] inFE 267
[Internal Error 15] inFF 267
[Internal Error 16] inFG 268
[Internal Error 17] inFH 268
[Internal Error 20] inFk 269
[Internal Error 21] inFL 269
[Internal Error 22] inFM 270
[Internal Error 25] inFP 270
[Internal Error 27] inFr 271
[Internal Error 30] inFu 271
[Input Contactor] LCF 272
[AI1 4-20mA loss] LFF1 272

SP51105 01/2025 249

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Topic Page
[AI2 4-20mA loss] LFF2 273
[AI3 4-20mA loss] LFF3 273
[AI4 4-20mA loss] LFF4 274
[AI5 4-20mA loss] LFF5 274
[Lead Pump Error] MpLF 275
[DC Bus Overvoltage] obF 275
[Overcurrent] oCF 276
[Device Overheating] oHF 276
[Process Overload] oLC 277
[Motor Overload] oLF 277
[Single Output Phase Loss] oPF1 278
[Output Phase Loss] oPF2 278
[Supply Mains Overvoltage] oSF 279
[PID Feedback Error] PFMF 279
[Program Loading Error] PGLF 280
[Program Running Error] PGrF 280
[Input phase loss] PHF 281
[Motor short circuit] SCF1 281
[Ground Short Circuit] SCF3 282
[IGBT Short Circuit] SCF4 282
[Motor Short Circuit] SCF5 283
[Modbus Com Interruption] SLF1 283
[HMI Com Interruption] SLF3 284
[Motor Overspeed] SoF 284
[Motor Stall Error] StF 285
[AI2 Thermal Sensor Error] t2CF 285
[AI3 Thermal Sensor Error] t3CF 286
[AI4 Thermal Sensor Error] t4CF 286
[AI5 Thermal Sensor Error] t5CF 287
[AI2 Th Level Error] tH2F 287
[AI3 Th Level Error] tH3F 288
[AI4 Th Level Error] tH4F 288
[AI5 Th Level Error] tH5F 289
[IGBT Overheating] tJF 289
[Autotuning Error] tnF 290
[Process Underload] uLF 291
[Supply Mains UnderV] uSF 291

250 SP51105 01/2025

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Overview

Clearing the Detected Error

This table presents the steps to follow if intervention on the drive system is required:

Step Action
1 Disconnect all power, including external control power that may be present.
2 Lock all power disconnects in the open position.
3 Wait 15 minutes to allow the DC bus capacitors to discharge (the drive LEDs are not indicators of the
absence of DC bus voltage).
4 Measure the voltage of the DC bus between the PA/+ and PC/- terminals to ensure that the voltage is less
than 42 Vdc.
5 If the DC bus capacitors do not discharge completely, contact your local Lauritz Knudsen Electrical &
Automation representative.
Do not repair or operate the drive.
6 Find and correct the cause of the detected error.
7 Restore power to the drive to confirm that the detected error has been rectified.

After the cause has been removed, the detected error can be cleared by:
• Switching off the drive.
• Using the [Product Restart] rP parameter.
• Using the digital input or the control bit assigned to [Prod Restart Assign] rPA.
• Using the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr- function.
• A digital input or control bit set to the [Fault reset] rSt- function.
•For [Fault Reset Assign] rSF and [Extended Fault Reset] HrCF refer to [Fault reset] rSt- Menu.
• Pressing the STOP/RESET key on the Plain Text Display Terminal depending on the setting of [Stop Key
Enable] PSt.

How To Clear the Error Code?

The following table summarizes the possibilities to clear a detected error after the cause has been removed:

How to clear the error code after the cause has been List of the cleared error
removed
Power reset: All detected error.
• Switch off the drive.
• Use the [Product restart] rP parameter.
• Use the digital input or the control bit assigned to [Prod
Restart Assign] rPA.
Transient: CFF, CFI, CFI2, CFI3, CSF, FWER, HCF, PGLF, PHF, USF
• As soon as its cause has been removed.
Manual reset: SOF, TNF

• Use the digital input or the control bit assigned to [Fault

Reset Assign] rSF.
• Pressing the RESET button on the HMI panel.
Automatic restart: CNF, EPF1, EPF2, HFPF, INF9, INFB, INFD, LCF, LFF1,
LFF2, LFF3, LFF4, LFF5, MPLF, OBF, OHF, OLC, OLF,
• Use the digital input or the control bit assigned to [Fault OPF1, OPF2, OSF, PFMF, SCF4, SCF5, SLF1, SLF3, STF,
Reset Assign] rSF. T2CF, T3CF, T4CF, T5CF, TH2F, TH3F, TH4F, TH5F, TJF,
• Pressing the RESET button on the HMI panel ULF
• Use the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr- function.

SP51105 01/2025 251

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Circuit Breaker Error] CbF

Circuit breaker error

Probable Cause
The DC bus voltage level is incorrect compared to the circuit breaker logic control (start or stop pulse) after the
configured timeout [Mains V. time out] LCt
• Defect of the motor circuit breaker.

Remedy
• Verify the circuit breaker logic control (pulse time for start and stop).
• Verify the mechanical state of the circuit breaker.
• Verify the measured values of [DC bus voltage] vbuS and [Mains Voltage] uLn parameters.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Incorrect Configuration] CFF

Incorrect configuration

Probable Cause
At power on, the device proceeds to a self-test and checks its configuration. If the configuration is not
correct, the error [Incorrect Config] CFF is triggered.
• Option module changed or removed.

Remedy
• Verify that all option modules are inserted correctly into the option module slot.
• In the event of the control block being changed deliberately, see the remarks below.
• Return to factory settings or retrieve the backup configuration if it is valid.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error is cleared as soon as its cause has been removed.

252 SP51105 01/2025

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Invalid Configuration] CFi

Invalid configuration

Probable Cause
Invalid configuration. The configuration loaded in the device via the commissioning tool or fieldbus is
inconsistent.
• Invalid parameter value.

Remedy
• Verify the loaded configuration.
• Load a valid configuration.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error is cleared as soon as its cause has been removed.

[Conf Transfer Error] CFi2

Configuration transfer error

Probable Cause
• The configuration transfer to the device was not successful or interrupted.
• The configuration loaded is not compatible with the device.

Remedy
• Verify the configuration loaded previously.
• Load a compatible configuration.
• Use PC software commissioning tool to transfer a compatible configuration
• Perform a factory setting

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error is cleared as soon as its cause has been removed.

SP51105 01/2025 253

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Pre-settings Transfer Error] CFi3

Pre-settings transfer error

Probable Cause
The configuration transfer to the device was not successful or interrupted.

Remedy
Contact your local Lauritz Knudsen Electrical & Automation representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error is cleared as soon as its cause has been removed.

[Fieldbus Com Interrupt] CnF

Fieldbus communication interruption

Probable Cause
Communication interruption on fieldbus module.
This error is triggered when the communication between the fieldbus module and the master (PLC) is
interrupted.

Remedy
• Verify the communication settings on the devices (Drive, PLC, switches, repeater..).
• Check for duplicate communication addresses.
• Verify the environment (electromagnetic compatibility).
• Verify the fieldbus wiring (continuity, cable type, grounding, and shielding).
• Verify the terminating resistor.
• Verify the timeout setting.
• Refer to the fieldbus user manual
• Replace the option module.
• Contact your local Lauritz Knudsen Electrical & Automation representative

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset Assign]
rSF parameter after its cause has been removed.

254 SP51105 01/2025

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Precharge Capacitor] CrF1

Precharge capacitor

Probable Cause
• Charging circuit control detected error.
• Charging circuit damaged.
• Supply Mains unstable or too low.

Remedy
• Turn off the device and then turn on again.
• Verify the setting of [DC Bus Source Type] dCbS.
• Verify the mains supply voltage and stability.
• Verify the parameters of [Undervoltage handling] uSb– menu.
• Contact your local Lauritz Knudsen Electrical & Automation representative.

Clearing the Error Code

.This detected error requires a power reset.

[Channel Switch Error] CSF

Channel switching detected error

Probable Cause
An invalid channel has been selected.
This error may be triggered if the device has been switched to a configuration which implies an invalid channel.

Remedy
Verify the function parameters.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error is cleared as soon as its cause has been removed.

SP51105 01/2025 255

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[DC Bus Ripple Error] dCrE

DC Bus ripple error

Probable Cause
Persistent ripple detected on the DC bus or DC bus capacitors damaged.

Remedy
• Turn off the device and then turn on again.
• Verify the correct behavior of the input filter.
• Verify the supply mains wirings.
• Verify the internal connections.
• Contact your local Lauritz Knudsen Electrical & Automation representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Control Memory Error] EEF1

Control memory error

Probable Cause
An error of the internal memory of the control electronics block has been detected.

Remedy
• Verify the environment (electromagnetic compatibility).
• Turn off the device and then turn on again.
• Return to factory settings.
• Contact your local Lauritz Knudsen Electrical & Automation representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

256 SP51105 01/2025

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Power Memory Error] EEF2

Power memory error

Probable Cause
An error of the internal memory of the power board has been detected.

Remedy
• Verify the environment (electromagnetic compatibility).
• Turn off the device and then turn on again
• Return to factory settings.
• Contact your local Lauritz Knudsen Electrical & Automation representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[External Error] EPF1

External detected error

Probable Cause
The error message is displayed if a digital input that has been configured as [Ext Error assign] EtF is at
active state.
• An external error has been triggered by an external device, depending on user.
• An external error has been triggered via Embedded Ethernet.

Remedy
• Remove the cause of the external error.
• Verify the setting of [Ext Error assign] EtF parameter.
• Perform a factory setting of the Ethernet configuration.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset Assign]
rSF parameter after its cause has been removed.

SP51105 01/2025 257

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Fieldbus Error] EPF2

External error detected by Fieldbus

Probable Cause
External detected error from fieldbus module.
• Event triggered by an external device, depending on user.
• The error is caused by the fieldbus or an application program.

Remedy
• Remove the cause of the external error.
• Verify the external circuit in the system which has triggered the error message.
• Verify the PLC program which has caused the error message.
• Verify the communication parameters.
• Monitor with the commissioning software [Fieldbus Error] EPF2 parameter.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset Assign]
rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[Firmware Update Error] FWEr

Firmware Update error

Probable Cause
Firmware update function has detected an error.

Remedy
Contact your local Lauritz Knudsen Electrical & Automation representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error is cleared as soon as its cause has been removed.

258 SP51105 01/2025

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Boards Compatibility]HCF

Boards compatibility

Probable Cause
Hardware configuration error.
The [Pairing password] PP1 parameter has been enabled and an option module has been
changed.

Remedy
• Refit the original option module.
• Confirm the configuration by entering the [Pairing password] PPI if the module was changed deliberately.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error is cleared as soon as its cause has been removed.

[High Flow Error] HFPF

High flow error

Probable Cause
The high flow monitoring function has detected an error.

Remedy
• Verify that the system works in its flow capabilities.
• Verify that there is no pipe burst at the outlet of the system.
• Verify the settings of the monitoring function.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atror manually with the [Fault Reset Assign]
rSF parameter after its cause has been removed.

SP51105 01/2025 259

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Internal Link Error] iLF

Internal communication interruption with option module

Probable Cause
Communication interruption between option module and the drive.

Remedy
• Verify the environment (electromagnetic compatibility).
• Verify the connections.
• Replace the option module.
• Contact your local Lauritz Knudsen Electrical & Automation representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Internal Error 0] iNF0

Internal error 0 (IPC)

Probable Cause
Internal control electronics CPU error.
• Communication interruption between microprocessors of the control board.
• The power board rating is not valid.

Remedy
• Turn off the device and then turn on again.
• Contact your local Lauritz Knudsen Electrical & Automation representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

260 SP51105 01/2025

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Internal Error 1] iNF1

Internal error 1 (Rating)

Probable Cause
If a component is not compatible with the hardware configuration, the error [Internal Error 1] iNF1
is triggered.
•The power board rating is not valid.

Remedy
Contact your local Lauritz Knudsen Electrical & Automation representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Internal Error 2] iNF2

Internal error 2 (Soft)

Probable Cause
The power board is incompatible with the control electronics software.
• The Power board was replaced by a spare part and is not set to the correct power rating.

Remedy
• Turn off the device and then turn on again.
• Contact your local Lauritz Knudsen Electrical & Automation representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

SP51105 01/2025 261

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Internal Error 3] iNF3

Internal error 3 (Intern Comm)

Probable Cause
Internal communication detected error.

Remedy
• Verify the wiring on device control terminals (internal 10V supply for analog inputs overloaded).
• Contact your local Lauritz Knudsen Electrical & Automation representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Internal Error 4] iNF4

Internal error 4 (Manufacturing)

Probable Cause
Internal data inconsistent.

Remedy
Contact your local Lauritz Knudsen Electrical & AutomationLauritz Knudsen Electrical & Automation
representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

262 SP51105 01/2025

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Internal Error 6] iNF6

Internal error 6 (Option)

Probable Cause
• The option module installed in the device is not recognized.
• The removable control terminal modules (if existing) are not present or not recognized.
• The embedded Ethernet adapter is not recognized.
• The device firmware is not compatible with the option module.
• Option module corrupted due to multiple firmware updates.

Remedy
• Verify the catalog number and compatibility of the option module.
• Plug the removable control terminal modules after the device has been switched off.
• Update the device firmware.
• Contact your local Lauritz Knudsen Electrical & Automation representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Internal Error 7] iNF7

Internal error 7 (Init)

Probable Cause
Communication interruption with CPLD component of the Control board.

Remedy
Contact your local Lauritz Knudsen Electrical & Automation representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

SP51105 01/2025 263

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Internal Error 8] iNF8

Internal error 8 (Switching Supply)

Probable Cause
The internal power supplies of the control electronics are monitored, if one is out of range the INF8 error is
triggered.

Remedy
Contact your local Lauritz Knudsen Electrical & Automation representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Internal Error 9] iNF9

Internal error 9 (Measure)

Probable Cause
An error on the current circuit measurement has been detected.

Remedy
Contact your local Lauritz Knudsen Electrical & Automation representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset Assign]
rSF parameter after its cause has been removed.

264 SP51105 01/2025

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Internal Error 10] iNFA

Internal error 10 (Mains)

Probable Cause
• The input stage is not operating correctly.
• The external 24 Vdc supply voltage is too high.

Remedy
• Verify the external 24 Vdc supply.
• Contact your local Lauritz Knudsen Electrical & Automation representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Internal Error 11] iNFb

Internal error 11 (Temperature)

Probable Cause
Internal temperature sensors are monitored for short circuit or open circuit.
If a short circuit / open circuit is detected, the iNFb error is triggered.
The internal device thermal sensor is not operating correctly.

Remedy
Contact your local Lauritz Knudsen Electrical & Automation representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset Assign]
rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

SP51105 01/2025 265

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Internal Error 12] iNFC

Internal error 12 (Internal current supply)

Probable Cause
The iNFC error is triggered when the current sensor supply monitoring has detected a low level on the
current sensor supply.

Remedy
Contact your local Lauritz Knudsen Electrical & Automation representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Internal Error 13] iNFd

Internal error 13 (Diff current)

Probable Cause
Differential current deviation on parallel inverter bricks/power modules.

Remedy
Verify connections between inverter brick/power module outputs and device output terminals.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

266 SP51105 01/2025

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Internal Error 14] iNFE

Internal error 14 (CPU)

Probable Cause
Internal microprocessor detected error.

Remedy
• Verify that the error code can be cleared.
• Contact your local Lauritz Knudsen Electrical & Automation representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Internal Error 15] iNFF

Internal error 15 (Flash)

Probable Cause
Serial memory flash format error.

Remedy
Contact your local Lauritz Knudsen Electrical & Automation representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

SP51105 01/2025 267

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Internal Error 16] iNFG

Internal error 16 (IO module - relay)

Probable Cause
Option module error.
• Communication interruption of the output relays option module.
• Internal error of the output relays option module.

Remedy
• Verify that the option module is correctly connected to the control electronics.
• Replace the option module.
• Contact your local Lauritz Knudsen Electrical & Automation representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Internal Error 17] iNFH

Internal error 17 (IO module - Standard)

Probable Cause
Extension module error.
• Communication interruption with the extension module of digital & analog I/O.
• Internal error of the extension module of digital & analog I/O.

Remedy
• Verify that the option module is correctly connected to the control electronics.
• Replace the option module.
• Contact your local Lauritz Knudsen Electrical & Automation representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

268 SP51105 01/2025

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Internal Error 20] iNFk

Internal error 20 (option interface PCBA)

Probable Cause
Option module interface board error.

Remedy
• Replace the option module.
• Contact your local Lauritz Knudsen Electrical & Automation representative

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Internal Error 21] iNFL

Internal error 21 (RTC)

Probable Cause
Internal Real Time Clock error.
• Communication interruption between the Graphic Display Terminal and the device.
• Clock oscillator error.

Remedy
• Replace the Graphic Display Terminal.
• Contact your local Lauritz Knudsen Electrical & Automation representative

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

SP51105 01/2025 269

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Internal Error 22] iNFM

Internal error 22 (Embedded Ethernet)

Probable Cause
• An error on the embedded Ethernet adapter has been detected.
• Instability of external 24 Vdc supply

Remedy
• Verify the connection to the Ethernet port.
• Verify the external 24 Vdc supply voltage stability.
• Contact your local Lauritz Knudsen Electrical & Automation representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Internal Error 25] iNFP

Internal error 25 (Incompatibility CB & SW)

Probable Cause
Incompatibility between Control Board hardware version and firmware version.

Remedy
• Update the firmware package.
• Contact your local Lauritz Knudsen Electrical & Automation representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

270 SP51105 01/2025

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Internal Error 27] iNFr

Internal error 27 (Diagnostics CPLD)

Probable Cause
Diagnostics in CPLD have detected an error.

Remedy
Contact your local Lauritz Knudsen Electrical & Automation representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Internal Error 30] iNFU

Internal error 30 (Rectifier)

Probable Cause
An error on the rectifier brick has been detected or an [Input Phase Loss] PHF error has been triggered when the
DC bus is charged.

Remedy
Turn off the device and then turn on again. If [Input Phase Loss] PHF error code replaces [Internal Error 30]
iNFU, refer to the instructions of [Input Phase Loss] PHF error.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

SP51105 01/2025 271

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Input Contactor] LCF

input contactor

Probable Cause
Sequences allowed in the time window.

Remedy
• Verify the wiring between the Supply Mains, the contactor/breaker and device.
• Verify that the Supply Mains is present upstream of the contactor/breaker
• Verify the input contactor and its wiring.
• Verify the [Mains V. time out ] LCt timeout.
• Verify the input contactor/breaker configuration.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset Assign]
rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[AI1 4-20mA loss] LFF1

AI1 4-20 mA loss

Probable Cause
Loss of the 4-20 mA on analog input AI1.
This error is triggered when the analog input current is below the minimum threshold value.

Remedy
• Verify the connection on the analog inputs.
• Verify the setting of [AI1 4-20mA loss] LFL1 parameter.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset Assign]
rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

272 SP51105 01/2025

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[AI2 4-20mA loss] LFF2

AI2 4-20mA loss

Probable Cause
Loss of the 4-20 mA on analog input AI2.
This error is triggered when the analog input current is below the minimum threshold value.

Remedy
• Verify the connection on the analog inputs.
• Verify the setting of [AI2 4-20mA loss] LFL2 parameter.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset Assign]
rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[AI3 4-20mA loss] LFF3

AI3 4-20mA loss

Probable Cause
Loss of the 4-20 mA on analog input AI3.
This error is triggered when the analog input current is below the minimum threshold value.

Remedy
• Verify the connection on the analog inputs.
• Verify the setting of [AI3 4-20mA loss] LFL3 parameter.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset Assign]
rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

SP51105 01/2025 273

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[AI4 4-20mA loss] LFF4

AI4 4-20mA loss

Probable Cause
Loss of the 4-20 mA on analog input AI4.
This error is triggered when the analog input current is below the minimum threshold value.

Remedy
• Verify the connection on the analog inputs.
• Verify the setting of [AI4 4-20mA loss] LFL4 parameter.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset Assign]
rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[AI5 4-20mA loss] LFF5

AI5 4-20 mA loss

Probable Cause
Loss of the 4-20 mA on analog input AI5.
This error is triggered when the analog input current is below the minimum threshold value.

Remedy
• Verify the connection on the analog inputs.
• Verify the setting of [AI5 4-20mA loss] LFL5 parameter.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset Assign]
rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

274 SP51105 01/2025

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Lead Pump Error] MpLF

Lead pump not available

Probable Cause
The selected lead pump is not available while in run.

Remedy
Verify the state of the corresponding drive digital input for the pump availability information (for example [Pump
1 Ready Assign] MPi1 for the pump 1).

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset Assign]
rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[DC Bus Overvoltage] obF

DC bus overvoltage

Probable Cause
The DC bus voltage is too high.
• Deceleration time too short or driving load too high.
• Mains voltage too high.
• Braking unit option cannot convert the "braking energy" into heat.

Remedy
• Increase the deceleration time.
• Configure the [Dec Ramp Adapt.]brA function if it is compatible with the application.
• Verify the supply mains voltage.
• Verify the braking circuit capability if present

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset Assign]
rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

SP51105 01/2025 275

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Overcurrent] oCF

Overcurrent

Probable Cause
Overcurrent limitation is reached.
• Inertia or load too high.
• Mechanical locking.
• Motor autotuned values does not match with the motor connected

Remedy
• Verify the motor parameters.
• Verify the size of the motor/drive/load.
• Verify the state of the mechanism.
• Decrease [Current limitation] CLi.
• Increase the switching frequency.
• Proceed to the motor autotuning

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[Device Overheating] oHF

Device overheating

Probable Cause
Device temperature too high.
• Ambient temperature too high.
• Reduced air flow due to blocked air at the inlet or outlet.
• One of the fans does not work properly.

Remedy
• Verify the drive ventilation and the ambient temperature.
• Clean the heat sink.
• Clean the inlet filter.
• Verify the air flow.
• Verify the fans.
• Verify the motor load according to the environmental conditions.
• Verify the external 48V power supply function (if applicable).

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset Assign]
rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

276 SP51105 01/2025

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Process Overload] oLC

Process overload

Probable Cause
Process overload.
• Mechanical root cause in the application.
• Changed load cycle situation of the application.

Remedy
• Verify and remove the cause of the overload.
• Verify the parameters of the [Process overload] oLd- function.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset Assign]
rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[Motor Overload] oLF

Motor overload

Probable Cause
This error is triggered when an excessive motor current has been detected.
The [Motor Overload] oLF threshold is set to 118 % of the [Motor Therm State] tHr.

Remedy
• Verify the setting of the motor thermal monitoring
• Verify the motor load. Wait for the motor to cool down before restarting
• Verify the setting of the following parameters:
 [Motor Th Current] itH
 [Motor Thermal Mode] tHt
 [Motor Therm Thd] ttd
 [MotorTemp ErrorResp] oLL
• Verify the parameter [OutPhaseLoss Delay] odt value.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset Assign]
rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

SP51105 01/2025 277

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Single output phase loss] oPF1

Single output phase loss

Probable Cause
Loss of one phase at device output.

Remedy
Verify the wiring from the device to the motor.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset Assign]
rSF parameter after its cause has been removed.

[Output Phase Loss] oPF2

Output phase loss

Probable Cause
Loss of three phases at device output.
• Motor not connected or motor power too low.
• Output contactor opened.
• Instantaneous instability in the motor current.

Remedy
• Verify the wiring from the device to the motor, including the tightening of the connections (refer to the related
installation manual).
• If an output contactor is being used, set [OutPhase Loss Assign] oPL to [No Error Triggered] oAC.
• If the device is connected to a low-power motor or not connected to a motor: In factory settings mode, motor
phase loss detection is active [OutPhaseLoss Assign] oPL = [OPF Error Triggered] YES. Deactivate motor
phase loss detection [OutPhaseLoss Assign] oPL = [Function Inactive] no.
• Verify and optimize the following parameters: [IR compensation] uFr, [Nom Motor Voltage] unS and
[Nom Motor Current] nCr and perform [Autotuning] tun .

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset Assign]
rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

278 SP51105 01/2025

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Supply Mains Overvoltage] oSF

Supply mains overvoltage

Probable Cause
This error is triggered when the device is not running, and the DC bus voltage exceeds the maximum value
allowed by the device.
• Supply mains voltage too high.

Remedy
Verify the supply Mains voltage.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset Assign]
rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[PID Feedback Error] PFMF

PID feedback detected error

Probable Cause
The PID feedback error was out of the allowed range around the set point during the time window.

Remedy
• Check for mechanical breakdown of pipes.
• Check for water leakage.
• Check for open discharge valve.
• Check for fire hydrant opened.
• Verify the settings of the monitoring function.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset Assign]
rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

SP51105 01/2025 279

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Program Loading Error] PGLF

Program loading detected error

Probable Cause
Verify that the error code can be cleared.

Remedy
Contact your local Lauritz Knudsen Electrical & Automation representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error is cleared as soon as its cause has been removed.

[Program Running Error] PGrF

Program running detected error

Probable Cause
Verify that the error code can be cleared.

Remedy
Contact your local Lauritz Knudsen Electrical & Automation representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

280 SP51105 01/2025

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Input phase loss] PHF

Input phase loss

Probable Cause
• Device incorrectly supplied or a tripped fused.
• One phase is unavailable.
• 3-phase device used on a single-phase supply mains.
• Unbalanced load.

Remedy
• Verify the wiring from the device to the motor, including the tightening of the connections (refer to the related
installation manual).
• Verify the fuses and the power connection.
• Use a 3-phase Supply Mains.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error is cleared as soon as its cause has been removed.

[Motor short circuit] SCF1

Motor short circuit

Probable Cause
The monitoring function of the device has detected a short circuit between the phase outputs or a
phase to the ground.

Remedy
• Verify the cables connecting the device to the motor, and the motor insulation.
• Adjust the switching frequency.
• Connect chokes in series with the motor.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

SP51105 01/2025 281

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Ground Short Circuit] SCF3

Ground short circuit

Probable Cause
• Significant ground leakage current at the device output.
• Short circuit or grounding at the inverter output.
• Short circuit on a motor with long cable.
• Insulation error in the motor or in the cable.
• High resistance at the motor connection.

Remedy
• Verify the cables connecting the drive to the motor, and the motor insulation.
• Adjust the switching frequency.
• Connect chokes in series with the motor.
• In case of long motor cables, verify the setting of [Ground Fault Activation] GrFL.
• Contact your local Lauritz Knudsen Electrical & Automation representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error requires a power reset.

[IGBT Short Circuit] SCF4

IGBT short circuit

Probable Cause
Power component detected error.
At product power-on, the IGBTs are tested for short circuit. Thereby an error (short circuit or interruption) has
been detected on at least one IGBT. The time to check each transistor is between 1 and 10 μs.

Remedy
• Verify the setting of [Output Short Circuit Test] Strt parameter.
• Contact your local Lauritz Knudsen Electrical & Automation representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset Assign]
rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

282 SP51105 01/2025

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Motor Short Circuit] SCF5

Motor short circuit

Probable Cause
Short-circuit at device output.

Remedy
• Verify the cables connecting the device to the motor, and the motor’s insulation.
• Contact your local Lauritz Knudsen Electrical & Automation representative.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset Assign]
rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[Modbus Com Interruption] SLF1

Modbus communication interruption

Probable Cause
Communication interruption on the Modbus port if the command and/or reference value is given by Modbus.

Remedy
• Verify the Modbus communication wiring.
• Verify the Modbus communication parameter settings.
• Verify the timeout.
• Refer to the Modbus user manual.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset Assign]
rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

SP51105 01/2025 283

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[HMI Com Interruption] SLF3

HMI communication interruption

Probable Cause
Communication interruption with the Graphic display terminal.
This error is triggered when the command or reference value are given using the Graphic Display Terminal and
if the communication is interrupted during more than 2 seconds.

Remedy
• Verify the Graphic display terminal connection.
• Verify that the cable length does not exceed 10 m.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset Assign]
rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[Motor Overspeed] SoF

Motor overspeed

Probable Cause
A too high-speed has been detected, based on the speed feedback or on the estimated speed, depending on the
settings.
• Instability or driving load too high.
• If a downstream contactor is used, the contacts between the motor and the drive have not been closed
before applying a Run command.
• The overspeed threshold (corresponding to 110 % of [Max Frequency] tFr) has been reached.

Remedy
• Verify the motor parameter settings.
• Verify the size of the motor/drive/load.
• Add a braking resistor if necessary.
• Verify and close the contacts between the motor and the drive before applying a Run command.
• Verify the consistency between [Max Frequency] tFr and [High Speed] HSP. It is recommended to have
at least [Max Frequency] tFr ≥ 110% * [High Speed] HSP.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared manually with the [Fault Reset Assign] rSF parameter after the cause has
been removed.

284 SP51105 01/2025

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Motor Stall Error] StF

Motor stall detected error

Probable Cause
The stall monitoring function has detected an error.
The [Motor Stall Error] StF is triggered on the following conditions:
• The output frequency is smaller than the stalling frequency [Stall Frequency] StP3
• The output current is higher than the stalling current [Stall Current] StP2
• For a duration longer than the stalling time S[tall Max Time] StP1.

Remedy
• Search for a mechanical blocking of the motor.
• Search for a possible cause of motor overload.
• Verify the settings of the monitoring function.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset Assign]
rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[AI2 Thermal Sensor Error] t2CF

Thermal sensor error on AI2

Probable Cause
The thermal monitoring function has detected an error of the thermal sensor connected to the analog
input AI2::
• Open circuit, or
• Short circuit.

Remedy
• Verify the sensor and its wiring.
• Replace the sensor.
• Verify the setting of [AI2 Type] Ai2t parameter.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset Assign]
rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

SP51105 01/2025 285

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[AI3 Thermal Sensor Error] t3CF

Thermal sensor error on AI3

Probable Cause
The thermal monitoring function has detected an error of the thermal sensor connected to the analog input AI3:
• Open circuit, or
• Short circuit

Remedy
• Verify the sensor and its wiring.
• Replace the sensor.
• Verify the setting of[ AI3 Type] Ai3t parameter.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset Assign]
rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[AI4 Thermal Sensor Error] t4CF

Thermal sensor error on AI4

Probable Cause
The thermal monitoring function has detected an error of the thermal sensor connected to the analog input AI4:
• Open circuit, or
• Short circuit

Remedy
• Verify the sensor and its wiring.
• Replace the sensor.
• Verify the setting of [AI4 Type] Ai4t parameter

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset Assign]
rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

286 SP51105 01/2025

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[AI5 Thermal Sensor Error] t5CF

Thermal sensor error on AI5

Probable Cause
The thermal monitoring function has detected an error of the thermal sensor connected to the analog input AI5:
• Open circuit, or
• Short circuit

Remedy
• Verify the sensor and its wiring.
• Replace the sensor.
• Verify the setting of [AI5 Type] Ai5t parameter.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset Assign]
rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[AI2 Th Level Error] tH2F

AI2 thermal level error

Probable Cause
The thermal sensor monitoring function has detected a high temperature error on analog input AI2.

Remedy
• Search for a possible cause of overheating.
• Verify the settings of the monitoring function.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset Assign]
rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

SP51105 01/2025 287

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[AI3 Th Level Error] tH3F

AI3 thermal level error

Probable Cause
The thermal sensor monitoring function has detected a high temperature on analog input AI3.

Remedy
• Search for a possible cause of overheating.
• Verify the settings of the monitoring function.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset Assign]
rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[AI4 Th Level Error] tH4F

AI4 thermal level error

Probable Cause
The thermal sensor monitoring function has detected a high temperature on analog input AI4.

Remedy
• Search for a possible cause of overheating.
• Verify the settings of the monitoring function.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset Assign]
rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

288 SP51105 01/2025

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[AI5 Th Level Error] tH5F

AI5 thermal level error

Probable Cause
The thermal sensor monitoring function has detected a high temperature on analog input AI5.

Remedy
• Search for a possible cause of overheating.
• Verify the settings of the monitoring function.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset Assign]
rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[IGBT Overheating] tJF

IGBT overheating

Probable Cause
The thermal junction monitoring function helps to prevent the IGBT from junction over temperature.
• Device power stage overheating.

Remedy
• Verify the size of the load/motor/device according to environment conditions.
• Verify the device ventilation and the ambient temperature.
• Reduce the switching frequency.
• Verify the external 48V power supply function (if applicable).

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset Assign]
rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

SP51105 01/2025 289

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Autotuning Error] tnF

Autotuning detected error

Probable Cause
An error has been triggered during a motor autotune.
• Special motor or motor whose power is not suitable for the drive.
• Motor not connected to the drive.
• Motor not stopped.
• For a tune in rotation, the motor has been stopped prematurely.
• The configuration of the drive (including the configuration of the tune in rotation) does not fit the use of tune
in rotation with your application.
• The motor cannot operate correctly during a tune in rotation.
• Autotuning with long motor cables.

Remedy
• Verify that the motor/drive are compatible.
• Verify that the motor is connected to the drive during autotuning.
• If an output contactor is being used, verify that it is closed during autotuning.
• Verify that the motor is present and stopped during autotuning.
• In case of reluctance motor, reduce [PSI Align Curr Max] MCR.
• In case of error detected during a tune in rotation:
◦ Increase [Acceleration] ACC and [Deceleration] dEC. They must not be set to value close to 0 s.
◦ If [Nb Of Repetitions] tnbris different from 1, decrease [2nd Id max current] idH2.
◦ If [Nb Of Repetitions] tnbr is different from 1, increase [2nd Id min current]idH2.
◦ If possible, remove the load of the motor.
◦ Set back [Rotation Tune Freq] tLFr to [Nominal Motor Freq] FrS.
• If the error continues to be triggered, decrease [Rotation Tune Freq] tLFr
• If possible, decrease [Nb Of Repetitions] tnbr.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared manually with the [Fault Reset Assign] rSF parameter after its cause has
been removed.

290 SP51105 01/2025

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

[Process Underload] uLF

Process underload

Probable Cause
Process underload.
• Mechanical root cause in the application.
• Changed load cycle situation of the application.

Remedy
• Verify and remove the cause of the underload.
• Verify the parameters of the [Process underload] uLd- function

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error can be cleared with the [Auto Fault Reset] Atr or manually with the [Fault Reset Assign]
rSF parameter after the cause has been removed.

[Supply Mains UnderV] uSF

Supply mains undervoltage

Probable Cause
The measured DC bus voltage is lower than the rated voltage of the Supply Mains [Mains voltage] urES
configured :
• Supply Mains power too weak.

Remedy
Verify the RMS inptut voltage and the parameters of [Undervoltage handling] uSb.

Clearing the Error Code

This detected error is cleared as soon as its cause has been removed.

SP51105 01/2025 291

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Section 11.3
FAQ

FAQ

FAQ

Introduction
If the display does not light up, verify the supply mains to the drive.
The assignment of the fast stop or freewheel functions help to prevent the drive starting if the corresponding
digital inputs are not switched on. The drive then displays [Freewheel] nSt in freewheel stop and [Fast stop]
FSt in fast stop. This is a normal behavior since these functions are active at zero so that the drive is stopped
if there is a wire break.
Verify that the run command input is activated in accordance with the selected control mode ([2/3-Wire
Control] tCC and [2-wire type] tCt parameters).
If the reference channel or command channel is assigned to a fieldbus, when the supply mains is
connected, the drive displays [Freewheel] nSt. It remains in stop mode until the fieldbus gives a
command.

Drive lock in blocking state

The drive is locked in a blocking state and displays [Freewheel Stop] nSt, if a Run command such as Run
forward, Run reverse, DC injection is still active during:
• A product reset to the factory settings,
• A manual "Fault Reset" using [Fault Reset Assign] rSF,
• A manual "Fault reset" by applying a product switched off and on again,
• A stop command given by a channel that is not the active channel command (such as Stop key of the display
terminal in 2/3 wires control),
It will be necessary to deactivate all active Run commands prior to authorizing a new Run command.

Option Module Changed or Removed

When an option module is removed or replaced by another, the drive locks in [Incorrect configuration] CFF
error mode at power-on. If the option module has been deliberately changed or removed, the detected error can
be cleared by pressing the OK key twice, which causes the factory settings to be restored for the parameter
groups affected by the option module.

Control Block Changed

When a control block is replaced by a control block configured on a drive with a different rating, the drive locks
in [Incorrect configuration] CFF error mode at power-on. If the control block has been deliberately changed,
the detected error can be cleared by pressing the OK key twice, which causes all the factory settings to be
restored.

292 SP51105 01/2025

 Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

Section 11.4
GLOSSARY

Glossary

D
Display terminal :
The display terminal menus are shown in square brackets.
For example: [Communication]
The codes are shown in round brackets.
For example: CoM
Parameter names are displayed on the display terminal in square brackets.
For example: [Fallback Speed]
Parameter codes are displayed in round brackets.
For example: LFF

E
Error :
Discrepancy between a detected (computed, measured, or signaled) value or condition and the specified or
theoretically correct value or condition.

F
Factory setting:
Factory settings when the product is shipped
Fault Reset:
A function used to restore the drive to an operational state after a detected error is cleared by removing the
cause of the error so that the error is no longer active.
Fault:
Fault is an operating state. If the monitoring functions detect an error, a transition to this operating state is
triggered, depending on the error class. A "Fault reset" is required to exit this operating state after the cause of
the detected error has been removed. Further information can be found in the pertinent standards such as IEC
61800-7, ODVA Common Industrial Protocol (CIP).

M
Monitoring function:
Monitoring functions acquire a value continuously or cyclically (for example, by measuring) in order to check
whether it is within permissible limits. Monitoring functions are used for error detection.

P
Parameter:
Device data and values that can be read and set (to a certain extent) by the user.
PELV:
Protective Extra Low Voltage, low voltage with isolation. For more information: IEC 60364-4-41
PLC:
Programmable logic controller
Power stage:
The power stage controls the motor. The power stage generates current for controlling the motor.

SP51105 01/2025 293

Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

W
Warning:
If the term is used outside the context of safety instructions, a warning alerts to a potential error that was
detected by a monitoring function. A warning does not
cause a transition of the operating state.

294 SP51105 01/2025

 “This literature gives information to user about product
installation, operation maintenance and disposal. This
information is not exhaustive and should customer require
further information, in specific cases, customer may contact
customer interaction cell.”

“The manufacturer assumes no responsibility for injuries,

losses, damages to human beings and/or equipments due to
inappropriate application of instructions, provided herein.”

“Product development is a continuous process. The

information given in this literature is Subject to change. For
latest information the customer may contact customer
interaction cell.”

“Product images are indicative”

CUSTOMER Phone No: 022 6932 7800

INTERACTION E-mail: CIC@LK-EA.COM
CELL (CIC) Website: WWW.LK-EA.COM

Electrical Standard Products

A/600, SHIL - MAHAPE ROAD,
TTC Industrial Area, MIDC Thane,
MUMBAI, MAHARASHTRA, 400710

VER. 1.0 SP 51105